System x3530 M4
Type 7160
Installation and Service Guide

System x3530 M4
Type 7160
Installation and Service Guide
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in
“Notices” on page 371 and the IBM Safety Information, and IBM Environmental Notices and User's
Guide on the IBM Documentation CD, and the IBM Warranty Information document that comes with
the server.

Second Edition (June 2012)

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2012.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . 56
Guidelines for trained technicians . . . . . . xiii Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash
Inspecting for unsafe conditions . . . . . . . xiii device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment . . . xiv Installing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Installing an optional 4x2.5-inch hot-swap drive
backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Type 7160 server . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Completing the installation . . . . . . . . 65
The IBM Documentation CD . . . . . . . . . 3 Replacing the air baffle . . . . . . . . 66
Hardware and software requirements . . . . . 3 Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly . . . . 66
Using the Documentation Browser . . . . . . 3 Replacing the server top cover . . . . . . 67
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Connecting the cables . . . . . . . . . 68
Notices and statements in this document . . . . . 5 Updating the server configuration . . . . . 69
Server features and specifications . . . . . . . 6
What your server offers. . . . . . . . . . . 8
Reliability, availability, and serviceability . . . . 12
Chapter 3. Configuration information
IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . 13 and instructions. . . . . . . . . . . 71
Server controls, LEDs, and power . . . . . . . 14 Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . 71
Front view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Configuring UEFI compatible devices . . . . . 72
Operator information panel . . . . . . . . 15 Configuring the server. . . . . . . . . . . 72
Light path diagnostics panel . . . . . . . . 16 Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD 74
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ServerGuide features . . . . . . . . . 74
Server power features . . . . . . . . . . 20 Setup and configuration overview . . . . . 75
Turning on the server . . . . . . . . . 21 Typical operating-system installation . . . . 75
Turning off the server . . . . . . . . . 21 Installing your operating system without
using ServerGuide . . . . . . . . . . 75
Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 23 Using the Setup utility. . . . . . . . . . 75
Starting the Setup utility . . . . . . . . 76
Installing optional hardware devices in the server 24
Setup utility menu choices . . . . . . . 76
Instructions for IBM Business Partners . . . . 24
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
How to send DSA data to IBM . . . . . . . 24
Using the Boot Manager program . . . . . . 82
Server components . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Starting the backup server firmware . . . . . 82
Server internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers 26
The UpdateXpress System Pack Installer . . . . 83
System-board internal connectors . . . . . 26
Using the integrated management module II . . 83
System-board external connectors . . . . . 26
Using the embedded hypervisor . . . . . . 84
System-board jumpers . . . . . . . . . 27
Using the remote presence and blue-screen
System-board LEDs. . . . . . . . . . 28
capture features . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
System-board optional device connectors . . 29
Obtaining the IP address for the IMM . . . 86
PCI riser cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Logging on to the Web interface . . . . . 87
Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 30
Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility
System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . 32
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . 32
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller. . . 87
Removing the server top cover . . . . . . . 33
Configuring RAID arrays . . . . . . . . . 88
Removing the air baffle . . . . . . . . . 33
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program 89
Installing a memory module. . . . . . . . 34
Starting the Human Interface Infrastructure
Installing drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
(HII) Configuration Application . . . . . 89
Installing hot-swap drives . . . . . . . 40
Creating RAID of hard disk drives
IDs for hot-swap drives . . . . . . . . 41
(ServeRAID-C105 only) . . . . . . . . 89
Installing 3.5-inch simple-swap drives . . . 41
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program . . . . 91
Installing an optional optical drive . . . . 42
IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installing a PCI riser-card assembly . . . . . 45
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) 92
Installing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . 46
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data . . . . . . 95
Installing an optional IBM ServeRAID SAS/SATA
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installing an additional microprocessor and heat Chapter 4. Troubleshooting . . . . . . 99
sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Start here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Thermal grease . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Diagnosing a problem . . . . . . . . . . 99

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 iii

Undocumented problems . . . . . . . . 101 Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Service bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Chapter 6. Removing and replacing
About the checkout procedure. . . . . . . 102 components . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Performing the checkout procedure . . . . . 103
Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . 273
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
System reliability guidelines . . . . . . . 275
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . 106
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . 275
Light path diagnostics panel . . . . . . 107
Returning a device or component . . . . . 276
Light path diagnostics LEDs . . . . . . 109
Internal cable routing. . . . . . . . . . 276
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . 114
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.5-inch hard disk drive cable connection . . 280
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility 116
3.5-inch hard disk drive cable connection . . 289
Viewing event logs without restarting the
Removing and replacing components . . . . . 298
server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Removing and replacing Tier 1 CRUs . . . . 299
Clearing the error logs . . . . . . . . 118
Removing an adapter. . . . . . . . . 299
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Replacing an adapter . . . . . . . . . 300
IBM Dynamic System Analysis . . . . . . 118
Removing hot-swap drives . . . . . . . 302
DSA editions . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Installing hot-swap drives . . . . . . . 302
Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic
Removing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA
programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Diagnostic text messages . . . . . . . 120
Replacing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive 304
Viewing the test log results . . . . . . . 121
Removing a CD/DVD drive . . . . . . 305
Call home (automated service request) . . . . . 121
Installing an optional CD/DVD drive . . . 306
Service advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Removing the CD/DVD cable . . . . . . 309
IBM Electronic Service Agent . . . . . . . 121
Replacing the CD/DVD cable . . . . . . 309
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing a fan . . . . . . . . . . 310
POST error codes . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Replacing a fan . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Integrated management module II (IMM2) error
Removing a memory module . . . . . . 312
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Replacing a memory module . . . . . . 313
DSA messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Removing an IBM ServeRAID Controller . . 314
Troubleshooting by symptom . . . . . . . . 241
Replacing an optional IBM ServeRAID
CD/DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . 242
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Hypervisor problems . . . . . . . . . . 243
Removing a remotely installed RAID adapter
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . 243
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Hard disk drive problems . . . . . . . . 244
Replacing a RAID adapter battery remotely
Intermittent problems . . . . . . . . . 246
in the server. . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems 247
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash
Memory problems . . . . . . . . . . . 249
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Microprocessor problems . . . . . . . . 250
Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash
Monitor and video problems . . . . . . . 250
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Network connection problems . . . . . . . 253
Removing a hot-swap power supply . . . 320
Optional-device problems . . . . . . . . 253
Replacing a hot-swap power supply . . . . 322
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Removing the fixed power supply . . . . 324
Serial-device problems . . . . . . . . . 255
Replacing the fixed power supply . . . . 325
ServerGuide problems . . . . . . . . . 256
Removing a PCI riser-card assembly. . . . 328
Software problems. . . . . . . . . . . 257
Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly . . . . 329
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems . . . 257
Removing the operator information panel
Video problems. . . . . . . . . . . . 258
assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Solving power problems. . . . . . . . . . 258
Replacing the operator information panel
Solving Ethernet controller problems . . . . . 258
assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Solving undetermined problems . . . . . . . 259
Removing the system battery . . . . . . 332
Problem determination tips. . . . . . . . . 260
Replacing the system battery . . . . . . 334
Recovering the server firmware . . . . . . . 261
Removing the front USB connector board . . 336
Automated boot recovery (ABR) . . . . . . . 263
Replacing the front USB connector board . . 337
Nx boot failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Removing the front video connector . . . . 339
Replacing the front video connector . . . . 340
Chapter 5. Parts listing, IBM System Removing the power interposer card
x3530 M4 Type 7160 . . . . . . . . 265 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Replaceable server components . . . . . . . 265 Replacing the power interposer card
Consumable parts . . . . . . . . . . . 269 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Structural parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Removing the hot-swap drive backplane . . 344

iv System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Replacing the hot-swap drive backplane . . 344 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Removing the simple-swap SATA drive Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
backplate assembly . . . . . . . . . 345 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Replacing the simple-swap SATA drive Particulate contamination . . . . . . . . . 373
backplate assembly . . . . . . . . . 346 Documentation format . . . . . . . . . . 374
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs . . . . 347 Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . 375
Removing a microprocessor and heat sink 347 Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Replacing a microprocessor and heat sink 349 statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Removing the system board . . . . . . 354 Industry Canada Class A emission compliance
Replacing the system board . . . . . . 359 statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Removing and replacing consumable and Avis de conformité à la réglementation
structural parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . 375
Removing the server top cover . . . . . 362 Australia and New Zealand Class A statement 375
Replacing the server top cover . . . . . 363 European Union EMC Directive conformance
Removing the bezel . . . . . . . . . 364 statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Replacing the bezel . . . . . . . . . 364 Germany Class A statement . . . . . . . 376
Removing the air baffle . . . . . . . . 365 Japan VCCI Class A statement. . . . . . . 377
Replacing the air baffle . . . . . . . . 366 Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) statement . . . 377
Appendix. Getting help and technical Korea Communications Commission (KCC)
assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . 368 A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Getting help and information from the World Wide People's Republic of China Class A electronic
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 emission statement . . . . . . . . . . 378
How to send DSA data to IBM . . . . . . . 368 Taiwan Class A compliance statement . . . . 378
Creating a personalized support web page . . . 369
Software service and support . . . . . . . . 369 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . 369
IBM Taiwan product service . . . . . . . . 369

Contents v
vi System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
Safety
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.

Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.

Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.

Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.

Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.

Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.

Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.

Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 vii

Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.

Antes de instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad.

Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.

Important:

Each caution and danger statement in this documentation is labeled with a

number. This number is used to cross reference an English language caution or
danger statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in
the Safety Information document.

For example, if a caution statement is labeled Statement 1, translations for that

caution statement are in the Safety Information document under Statement 1.

Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with
the server or optional device before you install the device.

Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified

telecommunication line cord.

viii System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Statement 1

DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is
hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices.

To Connect: To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 1. Turn everything OFF.

2. First, attach all cables to devices. 2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet. 4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.

Statement 2

Safety ix
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a
module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type
made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if
not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

Statement 3

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts
inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode.
Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

x System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Statement 4

≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb.) ≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb.) ≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb.)

CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

Statement 6

CAUTION:
Do not place any objects on top of a rack-mounted device unless that
rack-mounted device is intended for use as a shelf.

Statement 8

Safety xi
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

Statement 12

CAUTION:
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.

Statement 26

CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.

xii System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

This server is suitable for use on an IT power-distribution system whose maximum
phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault condition.

Important: Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste

Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger.

United Kingdom - Notice to Customers:

This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for

indirect connection to public telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.

Guidelines for trained technicians

This section contains information for trained technicians.

Inspecting for unsafe conditions

Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions
in an IBM product that you are working on. Each IBM product, as it was designed
and manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service
technicians from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items.
Use good judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by
non-IBM alterations or attachment of non-IBM features or options that are not
addressed in this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine
how serious the hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you
work on the product.

Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.

To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following
steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and observe
any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type, as specified in “Power
cords” on page 270.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the top cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal
filings, contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.

Safety xiii
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.

Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment

Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, power surges, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical currents.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.

xiv System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server
This Installation and Service Guide contains information and instructions for setting
up your IBM® System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server, instructions for installing some
optional devices, instructions for cabling, configuring the server, removing and
replacing devices, and diagnostics and troubleshooting information.

In addition to the instructions in Chapter 2, “Installing optional devices,” on page

23 for installing optional hardware devices, updating firmware and device drivers,
and completing the installation, IBM Business Partners must also complete the
steps in “Instructions for IBM Business Partners” on page 24.

The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 is a 1-U-high rack model, two-socket server
for virtualization, database, and computational intensive computing. It is the next
generation enterprise server based on Intel's Romley-EN technology. This
high-performance, scalable server is ideally suited for enterprise environments that
require superior input/output (I/O) flexibility, scalability, and high manageability.

Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key

considerations in the design of the server. These design features make it possible
for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today and provide
flexible expansion capabilities for the future.

The server comes with a limited warranty. For information about the terms of the
warranty and getting service and assistance, see the IBM Warranty Information
document that comes with the server.

The server contains IBM next generation technologies, which help increase
performance and reliability. For more information, see “What your server offers”
on page 8 and “Reliability, availability, and serviceability” on page 12.

You can obtain up-to-date information about the server and other IBM server
products at http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/. At http://www.ibm.com/support/
mysupport/, you can create a personalized support page by identifying IBM
products that are of interest to you. From this personalized page, you can subscribe
to weekly e-mail notifications about new technical documents, search for
information and downloads, and access various administrative services.

If you participate in the IBM client reference program, you can share information
about your use of technology, best practices, and innovative solutions; build a
professional network; and gain visibility for your business. For more information
about the IBM client reference program, see http://www.ibm.com/ibm/
clientreference/.

The server supports up to eight 2.5-inch hot-swap drives, or four 3.5-inch

simple-swap or hot-swap drives, using the supported drive backplane
configurations. It supports 2.5-inch hot-swap Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA
hard disk drives, 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or SATA hard disk drives, or 3.5-inch
simple-swap SATA hard disk drives. The illustrations in this document might differ
slightly from your hardware.

The following illustration shows the front of the server model with eight 2.5-inch
hot-swap hard disk drive bays.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 1

The following illustration shows the front of the server model with four 3.5-inch
hot-swap hard disk drive bays.

If firmware and documentation updates are available, you can download them
from the IBM website. The server might have features that are not described in the
documentation that comes with the server, and the documentation might be
updated occasionally to include information about those features, or technical
updates might be available to provide additional information that is not included
in the server documentation. To check for updates, go to http://www.ibm.com/
supportportal/.

Record information about the server in the following table.

Product name IBM System x3530 M4

Machine type Type 7160
Model number _____________________________________________
Serial number _____________________________________________

The model number and serial number are on the ID label on the front of the
server. The location of the ID label differs depending on your service model, as
shown in the following illustrations.

Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

2 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

You can download an IBM ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD to help you
configure the hardware, install device drivers, and install the operating system.

For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.

See the Rack Installation Instructions document on the IBM Documentation CD for
complete rack installation and removal instructions.

The IBM Documentation CD

The IBM Documentation CD contains documentation for the server in Portable
Document Format (PDF) and includes the IBM Documentation Browser to help
you find information quickly.

Hardware and software requirements

The IBM Documentation CD requires the following minimum hardware and
software:
v Microsoft Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Red Hat Linux
v 100 MHz microprocessor
v 32 MB of RAM
v Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.0 (or later) or xpdf, which comes with Linux operating
systems

Using the Documentation Browser

Use the Documentation Browser to browse the contents of the CD, read brief
descriptions of the documents, and view documents, using Adobe Acrobat Reader
or xpdf. The Documentation Browser automatically detects the regional settings in
use in your server and displays the documents in the language for that region (if
available). If a document is not available in the language for that region, the
English-language version is displayed.

Use one of the following procedures to start the Documentation Browser:

v If Autostart is enabled, insert the CD into the CD or DVD drive. The
Documentation Browser starts automatically.
v If Autostart is disabled or is not enabled for all users, use one of the following
procedures:
– If you are using a Windows operating system, insert the CD into the CD or
DVD drive and click Start -> Run. In the Open field, type
e:\win32.bat

where e is the drive letter of the CD or DVD drive, and click OK.
– If you are using Red Hat Linux, insert the CD into the CD or DVD drive;
then, run the following command from the /mnt/cdrom directory:
sh runlinux.sh

Select the server from the Product menu. The Available Topics list displays all the
documents for the server. Some documents might be in folders. A plus sign (+)
indicates each folder or document that has additional documents under it. Click
the plus sign to display the additional documents.

When you select a document, a description of the document is displayed under

Topic Description. To select more than one document, press and hold the Ctrl key
Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 3
while you select the documents. Click View Book to view the selected document
or documents in Acrobat Reader or xpdf. If you selected more than one document,
all the selected documents are opened in Acrobat Reader or xpdf.

To search all the documents, type a word or word string in the Search field and
click Search. The documents in which the word or word string appears are listed
in order of the most occurrences. Click a document to view it, and press Crtl+F to
use the Acrobat search function, or press Alt+F to use the xpdf search function
within the document.

Click Help for detailed information about using the Documentation Browser.

Related documentation
This Installation and Service Guide contains general information about the server
including how to set up and cabling the server, how to install supported optional
devices, how to configure the server, and information to help you solve problems
yourself and information for service technicians. The following documentation also
comes with the server:
v Warranty Information:
This document is in printed format and comes with the server. It contains
warranty terms and a pointer to the IBM Statement of Limited Warranty on the
IBM website.
v Important Notices:
This document is in printed format and comes with the server. It contains
information about the safety, environmental, and electronic emission notices for
your IBM product.
v Environmental Notices and User Guide:
This document is in PDF format on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains
translated environmental notices.
v IBM License Agreement for Machine Code:
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It provides translated
versions of the IBM License Agreement for Machine Code for your product.
v Licenses and Attributions Document:
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It provides the open
source notices.
v Safety Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains translated
caution and danger statements. Each caution and danger statement that appears
in the documentation has a number that you can use to locate the corresponding
statement in your language in the Safety Information document.
v Rack Installation Instructions
This printed document contains instructions for installing the server in a rack.

Depending on the server model, additional documentation might be included on

the IBM Documentation CD.

The ToolsCenter for System x and BladeCenter is an online information center that
contains information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying firmware,
device drivers, and operating systems. The ToolsCenter for System x and
BladeCenter is at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/
index.jsp.

4 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The server might have features that are not described in the documentation that
you received with the server. The documentation might be updated occasionally to
include information about those features, or technical updates might be available
to provide additional information that is not included in the server documentation.
These updates are available from the IBM website. To check for updates, go to
http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.

Notices and statements in this document

The caution and danger statements in this document are also in the multilingual
Safety Information document, which is on the IBM Documentation CD. Each
statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding statement in your
language in the Safety Information document.

The following notices and statements are used in this document:

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you
avoid inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or data.
An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage might occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 5

Server features and specifications
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the
server. Depending on the model, some features might not be available, or some
specifications might not apply.
Table 1. Server features and specifications
Microprocessor (depending on the Memory (depending on the model): Drive expansion bays (depending
model): v Slots: 12 dual inline memory on the model):
v Supports one Intel Pentium 1400 module connectors v The server can support up to eight
series microprocessor or up to two v Minimum: 2 GB 2.5-inch drives or up to four
Intel Xeon™ EN E5-2400 series v Maximum: up to 192 GB 3.5-inch drives. The following
microprocessors v Type: DDR3-1066 (PC3-8500), drives are supported:
DDR3-1333 (PC3-10600), or
v Up to 20 MB Level-3 cache v 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA hard
DDR3-1600 (PC3-12800), ECC,
v One QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) disk drive
single-rank or dual-rank, DDR3
link speed up to 8 Giga Transfers registered or unbuffered SDRAM v 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA hard
(GT) per second DIMMs disk drive
v Scalable up to eight cores v Supports: v 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA hard
v Three memory channels per – UDIMM: 4 GB disk drive
microprocessor on the system – RDIMM: 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16
GB, or 32 GB (when available) Note: For specific models that may
board that supports two DIMMs be shipped initially with four hard
per channel disk drives, configuration may be
Note: For a list of supported able to expand to eight hard disk
microprocessors, see drives via Features on Demand
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/ (FoD).
x86servers/serverproven/compat/
us/.

Optional SATA optical drives Integrated functions: Power supply (depending on your
(depending on your model): v Integrated Management Module II model):
v DVD-ROM (IMM2), which provides service v One fixed 460-watt ac power
processor control and monitoring supply
v Multi-burner
functions, video controller, and
v Up to two 460-watt or 675-watt ac
Fans: remote keyboard, video, mouse,
hot-swap power supplies for 1+1
and remote hard disk drive
v The server comes standard with redundancy support
capabilities
four speed-controlled fans for v Onboard Intel Powerville 4-port
one-microprocessor configuration Video controller (integrated into
Gigabit Ethernet controller with IMM, depending on your model):
v Supports up to six fans with two Wake on LAN support (by default v Matrox G200eR2 (two analog ports
microprocessors installed Ethernet 1 and 2 are enabled, to - one optional on front and one
enable Ethernet 3 and 4, it is done rear that can be connected at the
PCI expansion slots (depending on through the Features on Demand
your model): same time)
(FoD)) Note: The maximum video
v Two x8 low-profile, PCIE 3.0 v Onboard PCH with LSI software resolution is 1600 x 1200 at 60 or
adapter slots on the system board RAID with support for RAID 75 Hz.
v One x16 (x16 mechanically) PCIE levels 0, 1 and 10 – SVGA compatible video
3.0 adapter slot v Light path diagnostics controller
v Seven Universal Serial Bus (USB) – DDR2 250 MHz SDRAM video
v One x4 (x8 mechanically) PCIE 3.0
2.0 ports: memory controller
adapter slot on the optional PCI
– Two on the front of the chassis – Avocent Digital Video
riser-card for an optional RAID
– Four on the rear of the chassis Compression
adapter
– One internal – Video memory is not
v One serial port expandable
Note: In messages and
documentation, the term service
processor refers to the integrated
management module II (IMM2).

6 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 1. Server features and specifications (continued)

RAID controllers: Environment: Heat output:

v Air temperature:
The following RAID options are – Server on: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to Approximate heat output:
available for the server: 104°F); altitude: 0 to 915 m (3000 v Minimum configuration: 406 Btu
v ServeRAID H1110 SAS/SATA ft) per hour (119 watts)
Controller for System x – Server on: 5°C to 32°C (41°F to v Maximum configuration: 2627.3
89.6°F); altitude: 915 m (3000 ft) Btu per hour (770 watts)
v ServeRAID M1115 SAS/SATA
Controller for System x to 2134 m (7000 ft)
– Server on: 5°C to 28°C (41°F to Electrical input:
v ServeRAID M5110 SAS/SATA 82.4°F); altitude: 2134 m (7000 v Sine-wave input (50 - 60 Hz)
Controller for IBM System x ft) to 3050 m (10000 ft) required
v ServeRAID M5120 SAS/SATA – Server off: 5°C to 45°C (41° to v Input voltage automatically
Controller for IBM System x 113°F) selected
– Shipment: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F v Input voltage low range:
v ServeRAID M5100 Series Battery
to 140°F) – Minimum: 100 V ac
Kit for IBM System x
v Humidity: – Maximum: 127 V ac
v ServeRAID M5100 Series 512MB v Input voltage high range:
– Server on: 8% to 85%; maximum
Cache/RAID 5 Upgrade for IBM – Minimum: 200 V ac
dew point: 24°C (75.2°F);
System x – Maximum: 240 V ac
maximum rate of change 5
v ServeRAID M5100 Series 512MB °C/hr v Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA),
Flash/RAID 5 Upgrade for IBM – Server off: 8% to 80%; maximum approximately:
System x dew point: 27°C (80°F) – Minimum: 0.12 kVA
v ServeRAID M5100 Series Zero – Shipment: 5% to 100% – Maximum: 0.78 kVA
Cache/RAID 5 Upgrade for IBM v Design to ASHRAE Class A3: Notes:
System x – Ambient of 35°C to 40°C (95°F
1. Power consumption and heat
v ServeRAID M5100 Series 1GB to 104°F), with relaxed support
output vary depending on the
Flash/RAID Upgrade for IBM – Support cloud like workload
number and type of optional
System x with no performance
features installed and the
degradation acceptable
v ServeRAID C105 for IBM System X power-management optional
(Turbo-Off)
features in use.
Size: – Under no circumstance, can any
v Height: 43 mm ( 1.7 inches, 1U) combination of worst case 2. The noise emission level stated is
v Depth: 673.1 mm (26.5 inches) workload and configuration the declared (upper limit) sound
v Width: 447 mm (17.6 inches) result in system shutdown or power level, in bels, for a random
v Maximum weight: 15.8 kg (33.8 lb) design exposure at 40°C (104°F) sample of machines. All
when fully configured v Particulate contamination: measurements are made in
accordance with ISO 7779 and
Attention: Airborne particulates
Acoustical noise emissions: reported in conformance with ISO
and reactive gases acting alone or
v Sound power, idling: 6.5 bels 9296.
in combination with other
v Sound power, operating: 6.5 bels environmental factors such as
humidity or temperature might
pose a risk to the server. For
information about the limits for
particulates and gases, see
“Particulate contamination” on
page 373.

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 7

What your server offers
The server uses the following features and technologies:
v Active Energy Manager
The IBM Active Energy Manager solution is an IBM Systems Director extension
that measures and reports server power consumption as it occurs. This enables
you to monitor power consumption in correlation to specific software
application programs and hardware configurations. You can obtain the
measurement values through the systems-management interface and view them,
using IBM Systems Director. For more information, including the required levels
of IBM Systems Director and Active Energy Manager, see the IBM Systems
Director documentation on the IBM Systems Director DVD, or see
http://www.ibm.com/servers/systems/management/director/extensions/
actengmgr.html/.
v Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot
The server comes with the IBM Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot
diagnostic program stored in the integrated USB memory on the server. DSA
Preboot collects and analyzes system information to aid in diagnosing server
problems, as well as offering a rich set of diagnostic tests of the major
components of the server. DSA Preboot collects the following information about
the server:
– Drive health information
– Event logs for ServeRAID controllers and service processors
– Hardware inventory, including PCI and USB information
– Light path diagnostics status
– Microprocessor, input/out hub, and UEFI error logs
– Network interfaces and settings
– RAID controller configuration
– Service processor (integrated management module) status and configuration
– System configuration
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration
DSA Preboot also provides diagnostics for the following system components
(when they are installed):
– Intel network adapter
– IMM I2C bus
– Light path diagnostics panel
– Memory modules
– Microprocessors
– Optical devices (CD or DVD)
– SAS or SATA drives
For information about both editions (DSA Preboot and Portable) of the Dynamic
System Analysis (DSA) diagnostic programs, see “DSA editions” on page 119.
v IBM next generation technology
IBM next generation technology systems combine proven, innovative IBM
designs to make your x86-processor-based server powerful, scalable, and
reliable. For more information, see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/
xseries/xarchitecture/enterprise/index.html.
v IBM ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD

8 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, which you can download from the
Web, provides programs to help you set up the server and install a Windows
operating system. The ServerGuide program detects installed optional hardware
devices and provides the correct configuration programs and device drivers. For
more information about the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, see “Using the
ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD” on page 74.
v IBM Systems Director DVD
IBM Systems Director is a platform-management foundation that streamlines the
way you manage physical and virtual systems in a heterogeneous environment.
By using industry standards, IBM Systems Director supports multiple operating
systems and virtualization technologies for IBM and non-IBM x86 platforms. For
more information, see the IBM Systems Director documentation on the IBM
Systems Director DVD and “IBM Systems Director” on page 13.
v Integrated Management Module II (IMM2)
The Integrated Management module II (IMM2) combines service processor
functions, video controller, and remote presence and blue-screen capture features
in a single chip. The IMM2 provides advanced service-processor control,
monitoring, and alerting function. If an environmental condition exceeds a
threshold or if a system component fails, the IMM lights LEDs to help you
diagnose the problem, records the error in the IMM2 event log, and alerts you to
the problem. Optionally, the IMM2 also provides a virtual presence capability for
remote server management capabilities. The IMM2 provides remote server
management through the following industry-standard interfaces:
– Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) version 2.0
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3.0
– Common Information Model (CIM)
– Web browser
For additional information, see “Using the integrated management module II”
on page 83 and http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.
v Integrated network support
The server comes with an integrated 4-port (2 ports by default, 2 ports by
upsell) Gigabit Ethernet controller, which supports connection to a 10 Mbps, 100
Mbps, or 1000 Mbps network. For more information, see “Configuring the
Gigabit Ethernet controller” on page 87.
v Integrated Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
This integrated security chip performs cryptographic functions and stores
private and public secure keys. It provides the hardware support for the Trusted
Computing Group (TCG) specification. You can download the software to
support the TCG specification, when the software is available. See
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/xseries/scalable_family.html for details
about the TPM implementation. You can enable TPM support through the Setup
utility under the System Security menu choice (see“Using the Setup utility” on
page 75).
v Large data-storage capacity and hot-swap capability
The server can support a maximum of eight 2.5-inch drives or four 3.5-inch
drives. The server supports 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drives, or
3.5-inch simple-swap SATA or hot-swap SAS/SATA hard disk drives.
With the hot-swap feature, you can add, remove, or replace hard disk drives
without turning off the server.
v Large system-memory capacity

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 9

The server system board provides 12 DIMM connectors for up to 192 GB of
memory.
The server memory controller supports error correcting code (ECC) for up to 12
industry-standard DDR3-1066 (PC3-8500), DDR3-1333 (PC3-10600), DDR3-1600
(PC3-12800) (single-rank or dual-rank), DDR3 (third-generation
double-data-rate), registered or unbuffered, synchronous dynamic random access
memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
v Light path diagnostics
Light path diagnostics provides LEDs to help you diagnose problems. For more
information about the light path diagnostics and the LEDs, see “Light path
diagnostics panel” on page 16 and “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 109.
v Multi-core processors
Depending on your server model, the server supports one Intel Pentium 1400
series microprocessor or up to two Intel Xeon™ EN E5-2400 series
microprocessors.
v PCI Express adapter capabilities
The system board provides up to three PCIe connectors for two PCI riser-card
assemblies. See “Installing an adapter” on page 46 for detailed information.
v Redundant connection
The Intel Gigabit Ethernet controller provides failover capability to a redundant
Ethernet connection with the applicable application installed. If a problem occurs
with the primary Ethernet connection and the optional Ethernet adapter is
installed in the server, all Ethernet traffic that is associated with the primary
connection is automatically switched to an optional Ethernet connection. If the
applicable device drivers are installed, this switching occurs without data loss
and without user intervention.
A feature upgrade key is required to enable ports 3 and 4 on the Gigatbit
Ethernet controller. See https://www-304.ibm.com/systems/x/fod/index.wss
for detailed information on product feature activation.
v Cooling and optional power capabilities
The server supports up to six speed-controlled simple-swap fans for a full
configuration.
The server comes with one fixed 460-watt, or one hot-swap 460-watt or 675-watt
power supply installed. The server supports a maximum of two 460-watt or two
675-watt hot-swap power supplies.
For redundancy support on hot-swap models, two power-supplies must be
installed in the server. Two power supplies enables continued operation if one of
the power supplies fails.
v Remote presence and blue-screen capture features
The blue-screen capture feature is an integrated function of the integrated
management module (IMM).
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the
IMM restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang
condition. A system administrator can use the blue-screen capture feature to
assist in determining the cause of the hang condition.
You can activate the optional remote presence feature in the IMM Premium only
to use the following functions: .
– Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 60 or
75 Hz, regardless of the system state
– Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client

10 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

– Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a
remote client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that
are available for use by the server
– Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server
as a virtual drive
For information on product feature activation, see https://www-304.ibm.com/
systems/x/fod/index.wss
See “Using the remote presence and blue-screen capture features” on page 86 for
additional information.
v ServeRAID support
A ServeRAID adapter provides hardware redundant array of independent disks
(RAID) support to create configurations. The server comes with an onboard
RAID controller which provides RAID levels 0 and 1. Additional optional RAID
adapters are available for purchase that provide RAID level 5.
v Service Advisor
The server comes with the Service Advisor feature that can collect data about the
system when a the system detects a fault and sends that data to IBM Service for
problem determination. It also includes the call home feature that automatically
calls IBM Service when a problem occurs. The Service Advisor feature is
integrated into the Integrated Management Module (IMM). You will need to
setup and configure the Service Advisor feature before you can use it. For more
information about how to setup and configure the Service Advisor feature, see
the Integrated Management Module User's Guide at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770
&brandind=5000008.
v Systems-management capabilities
The server comes with an integrated management module (IMM). When the
IMM is used with the systems-management software that comes with the server,
you can manage the functions of the server locally and remotely. The IMM also
provides system monitoring, event recording, and network alert capability. The
systems-management connector on the rear of the server is dedicated to the
IMM. The dedicated systems-management connector provides additional
security by physically separating the management network traffic from the
production network. You can use the Setup utility to configure the server to use
a dedicated systems-management network or a shared network.
v UEFI-compliant server firmware
The UEFI firmware offers several features, including Unified Extensible
Firmware Interface (UEFI) version 2.1 compliance, Active Energy Management
(AEM) technology, enhanced reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS)
capabilities, and basic input/output system (BIOS) compatibility support. UEFI
replaces the BIOS and defines a standard interface between the operating
system, platform firmware, and external devices. The server is capable of
booting UEFI-compliant operating systems, BIOS-based operating systems, and
BIOS-based adapters as well as UEFI-compliant adapters. For more information
about UEFI-compliant firmware, go to http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5083207
&brandind=5000008.

Note: The server does not support DOS.

v VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor
An optional USB flash device with VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor software
is available for purchase. Hypervisor is virtualization software that enables

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 11

multiple operating systems to run on a host system at the same time. See “Using
the embedded hypervisor” on page 84 for additional information.

Reliability, availability, and serviceability

Three important computer design features are reliability, availability, and
serviceability (RAS). The RAS features help to ensure the integrity of the data that
is stored in the server, the availability of the server when you need it, and the ease
with which you can diagnose and correct problems.

Your server has the following RAS features:

v 3-year parts and 3-year labor limited warranty (Machine Type 7160)
v 24-hour support center
v Automatic error retry and recovery
v Automatic restart on nonmaskable interrupt (NMI)
v Automatic restart after a power failure
v Backup basic input/output system switching under the control of the integrated
management module (IMM)
v Built-in monitoring for fan, power, temperature, voltage, and power-supply
redundancy
v Cable-presence detection on most connectors
v Chipkill memory protection
v Diagnostic support for ServeRAID and Ethernet adapters
v Error codes and messages
v Error correcting code (ECC) L3 cache and system memory
v Full Array Memory Mirroring (FAMM) redundancy
v Hot-swap hard disk drives
v Operator information and light path diagnostics LED panels
v Integrated Management Module (IMM)
v Light path diagnostics LEDs for memory DIMMs, microprocessors, hard disk
drives, power supplies, and fans
v Memory mirroring and memory sparing support
v Memory error correcting code and parity test
v Memory down sizing (non-mirrored memory). After a restart of the server after
the memory controller detected a non-mirrored uncorrectable error and the
memory controller cannot recover operationally, the IMM logs the uncorrectable
error and informs POST. POST logically maps out the memory with the
uncorrectable error, and the server restarts with the remaining installed memory.
v Menu-driven setup, system configuration, and redundant array of independent
disks (RAID) configuration programs
v Microprocessor built-in self-test (BIST), internal error signal monitoring, internal
thermal trip signal monitoring, configuration checking, and microprocessor and
voltage regulator module failure identification through light path diagnostics
v Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) button
v Parity checking on the small computer system interface (SCSI) bus and PCI-E
buses
v Power management: Compliance with Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI)
v Power-on self-test (POST)
v Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) alerts on memory, microprocessors, SAS/SATA
hard disk drives or solid state drives, fans, power supplies, and VRM
v Redundant Ethernet capabilities with failover support
v Redundant hot-swap power supplies
v Redundant network interface card (NIC) support
v Remind button to temporarily turn off the system-error LED on the optional
advanced operator information panel

12 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v ROM-based diagnostics
v ROM checksums
v Serial Presence Detection (SPD) on memory, VPD on system board, power
supply, and hard disk drive or solid state drive backplanes, microprocessor and
memory expansion tray, and Ethernet cards
v Single-DIMM isolation of excessive correctable error or multi-bit error by the
Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
v Standby voltage for system-management features and monitoring
v Startup (boot) from LAN through remote initial program load (RIPL) or dynamic
host configuration protocol/boot protocol (DHCP/BOOTP)
v System auto-configuring from the configuration menu
v System-error logging (POST and IMM)
v Systems-management monitoring through the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
protocol bus
v Uncorrectable error (UE) detection
v Upgradeable POST, Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI), diagnostics,
IMM firmware, and read-only memory (ROM) resident code, locally or over the
LAN
v Vital product data (VPD) on microprocessors, system board, power supplies, and
SAS/SATA (hot-swap hard disk drive) backplane
v Wake on LAN capability

IBM Systems Director

IBM Systems Director is a platform-management foundation that streamlines the
way you manage physical and virtual systems supports multiple operating systems
and virtualization technologies in IBM and non-IBM x86 platforms.

Through a single user interface, IBM Systems Director provides consistent views
for viewing managed systems, determining how these systems relate to one other,
and identifying their statuses, helping to correlate technical resources with business
needs. A set of common tasks that are included with IBM Systems Director
provides many of the core capabilities that are required for basic management,
which means instant out-of-the-box business value. The common tasks include the
following:
v Discovery
v Inventory
v Configuration
v System health
v Monitoring
v Updates
v Event notification
v Automation for managed systems

The IBM Systems Director Web and command-line interfaces provide a consistent
interface that is focused on driving these common tasks and capabilities:
v Discovering, navigating, and visualizing systems on the network with the
detailed inventory and relationships to the other network resources
v Notifying users of problems that occur on systems and the ability to isolate the
sources of the problems
v Notifying users when systems need updates and distributing and installing
updates on a schedule

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 13

v Analyzing real-time data for systems and setting critical thresholds that notify
the administrator of emerging problems
v Configuring settings of a single system and creating a configuration plan that
can apply those settings to multiple systems
v Updating installed plug-ins to add new features and functions to the base
capabilities
v Managing the life cycles of virtual resources

For more information about IBM Systems Director, see the IBM Systems Director
Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/director/v6rlx/
indel.jsp?topic=/director_6.1/fqm0_main.html, and the Systems Management web
page at http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/, which presents an overview
of IBM Systems Management and IBM Systems Director.

Server controls, LEDs, and power

This section describes the controls and light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and how to
turn the server on and off. For the locations of other LEDs on the system board,
see “System-board LEDs” on page 28.

Front view
The following illustration shows the controls, LEDs, and connectors on the front of
the hot-swap server model.

v Rack release latches: Press the latches on each front side of the server to slide it
out of the rack.
v Hard disk drive status LEDs: These LEDs are used on hot-swap SAS or SATA
hard disk drives. When one of these LED are lit, it indicates that the drive has
failed. If an optional IBM ServeRAID controller is installed in the server, when
this LED is flashing slowly (one flash per second), it indicates that the drive is
being rebuilt. When the LED is flashing rapidly (three flashes per second), it
indicates that the controller is identifying the drive.
v Hard disk drive activity LEDs: These LEDs are used on SAS or SATA hard disk
drives. Each hot-swap drive has an activity LED, and when this LED is flashing,
it indicates that the drive is in use.
v CD-RW/DVD eject button (Optional): Press this button to release a DVD or CD
from the CD/DVD drive.
v CD-RW/DVD drive activity LED (Optional): When this LED is lit, it indicates
that the CD-RW/DVD drive is in use.
v Operator information panel: This panel contains controls and LEDs that provide
information about the status of the server. For information about the controls
and LEDs on the operator information panel, see “Operator information panel”
on page 15.

14 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Operator information panel release button (Optional): This release button is on
the advanced operator information panel. Push the blue release button and pull
out the light path diagnostics panel to view the light path diagnostics LEDs and
buttons. See “Operator information panel,” “Light path diagnostics” on page
106, and “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 109 for more information about
light path diagnostics.
v Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector. The video connectors on
the front and rear of the server can be used simultaneously.

Note: The maximum video resolution is 1600 x 1200 at 75 Hz.

v USB connectors: Connect a USB device, such as a USB mouse, keyboard, or
other device, to any of these connectors.

Operator information panel

The following illustrations show the location of the operator information panel and
the LEDs on the operator information panel respectively.

v Power-control button and power-on LED: Press this button to turn the server
on and off manually or to wake the server from a reduced-power state. The
states of the power-on LED are as follows:
– Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has
failed.
– Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is not
ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This lasts
approximately 1 to 3 minutes.

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 15

– Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is ready to
be turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on the server.
– Lit: The server is turned on.
– Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the
server, press the power-control button or use the IMM web interface. See
“Logging on to the Web interface” on page 87 for information on logging on
to the IMM web interface.
v Ethernet activity LEDs: When any of these LEDs is flashing or flickering, it
indicates that the server is transmitting to or receiving signals from the Ethernet
LAN that is connected to the Ethernet port that corresponds to that LED.
v Locator button/LED: Use this blue LED to visually locate the server among
other servers. This LED is also used as a presence detection button. You can use
IBM Systems Director to light this LED remotely. This LED is controlled by the
IMM. When you press the locator button, the LED will be lit and it will continue
to be lit until you press it again to turn it off. Press the locator button to visually
locate the server among the others servers. It is also used as the physical
presence for the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).
v Log LED: When this yellow LED is lit, it indicates that a noncritical event has
occurred. Check the system-event log for additional information. See “Error
messages” on page 122 for more information about event logs.
v System-error LED: When this yellow LED is lit, it indicates that a system error
has occurred. A system-error LED is also on the rear of the server. An LED on
the light path diagnostics panel on the operator information panel is also lit to
help isolate the error. This LED is controlled by the IMM.
v Reset button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on self-test
(POST). You might have to use a pen or the end of a straightened paper clip to
press the button.

Note: All the operator information is on the operator information panel already.
You do not need to pull the panel out for obtaining more information.

Light path diagnostics panel

The light path diagnostics panel is available on the top of the advanced operator
information panel. For additional information about the light path diagnostics and
LEDs on the light path diagnostics panel, see “Light path diagnostics” on page 106
and “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 109.

The following illustration shows the optional advanced light path diagnostics
panel.

16 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

To access the optional advanced light path diagnostics panel, push the blue release
button on the advanced operator information panel. Pull forward on the unit until
the hinge of the operator panel is free of the server chassis. Then pull down on the
unit, so that you can view the light path diagnostics panel information.

Note: When you slide the optional advanced light path diagnostics panel out of
the server to check the LEDs, do not run the server continuously with light path
diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should only be outside of the
server a short time. The optional advanced light path diagnostics panel must
remain in the server when the server is running to ensure proper cooling.

The following illustration shows the LEDs and controls on the light path
diagnostics panel.

v Remind button: This button places the system-error/Check Log LED on the
front panel into Remind mode. In Remind mode, the system-error LED flashes
once every 2 seconds until the problem is corrected, the server is restarted, or a
new problem occurs.

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 17

By placing the system-error LED indicator in Remind mode, you acknowledge
that you are aware of the last failure but will not take immediate action to
correct the problem.
v Reset button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on self-test
(POST). You might have to use a pen or the end of a straightened paper clip to
press the button.

Rear view
The following illustrations show the connectors on the rear of the server.

18 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The following illustrations show the locations of the power-supply LEDs for fixed
and redundant models respectively on the rear of the server.

v PCI riser slot 1: Insert a full-height, half-length PCI Express adapter into this
slot. See “Installing an adapter” on page 46 for the supported adapters for these
riser-cards.
v PCI riser slot 2: Insert a low-profile PCI Express adapter into this slot. See
“Installing an adapter” on page 46 for information about adapters that this riser
card support.
v Power connector: Connect the power cord to this connector.
v AC power LED: Each power supply has an ac power LED and a dc power LED.
When the ac power LED is lit, it indicates that sufficient power is being supplied
to the power supply through the power cord. During normal operation, both the
ac and dc power LEDs are lit. For any other combination of LEDs, see
“Power-supply LEDs” on page 114.
v DC power LED: Each power supply has a dc power LED and an ac power LED.
When the dc power LED is lit, it indicates that the power supply is supplying
adequate dc power to the system. During normal operation, both the ac and dc
power LEDs are lit. For any other combination of LEDs, see “Power-supply
LEDs” on page 114.

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 19

v Power-supply error LED: Each power supply has an ac power LED and a dc
power LED. When the power-supply error LED is lit, it indicates that the power
supply has failed.
v Video connector: Connect a monitor to this connector. The video connectors on
the front and rear of the server can be used simultaneously.

Note: The maximum video resolution is 1600 x 1200 at 75 Hz.

v Serial connector: Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector. The serial port
is shared with the integrated management moduleII (IMM2). The IMM2 can take
control of the shared serial port to redirect serial traffic, using Serial over LAN
(SOL).
v USB connectors: Connect a USB device to any of these connectors.
v Ethernet activity LEDs: When these LEDs are lit, they indicate that the server is
transmitting to or receiving signals from the Ethernet LAN that is connected to
the Ethernet port.
v Ethernet link LEDs: When these LEDs are lit, they indicate that there is an
active link connection on the 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-TX interface
for the Ethernet port.
v Ethernet and system-management connectors:
– IMM2 dedicated mode (default): In this mode, which is the default setting for
the server, the Ethernet 2 connector connects to a network for full
systems-management information control. A dedicated management network
provides additional security by physically separating the management
network traffic from the production network. Meanwhile, the Ethernet 1,
Ethernet 3 and Ethernet 4 connectors are used to connect to the production
network. See “Using the Setup utility” on page 75for more information.
– IMM2 shared mode : In this mode, the Ethernet 1 connector is used to
connect to both the management network and production network.
Meanwhile, the Ethernet 2, Ethernet 3 and Ethernet 4 connectors are used to
connect to the production network. See “Using the Setup utility” on page 75
for more information.

Server power features

When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the
operating system does not run, and all core logic except for the service processor
(the Integrated Management Module) is shut down; however, the server can
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on
the server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac
power but is not turned on.

20 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Turning on the server
Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more
fans might start running to provide cooling while the server is connected to power
and the power-on button LED will blink quickly. Approximately 1 to 3 minutes
after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button becomes active
(the power-on LED will blink slowly), and one or more fans might start running to
provide cooling while the server is connected to power. You can turn on the server
by pressing the power-control button.

The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:

v If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart
automatically when power is restored.
v If your operating system supports the Wake on LAN feature, the Wake on LAN
feature can turn on the server.

Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some

memory is reserved for various system resources and is unavailable to the
operating system. The amount of memory that is reserved for system resources
depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the
configured PCI options.

Turning off the server

When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can
respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on
the server. While the server remains connected to ac power, one or more fans
might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must disconnect
it from the power source.

Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the
server. See your operating-system documentation for information about shutting
down the operating system.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:

Chapter 1. The IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 server 21

v You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system
supports this feature. After an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the
server will turn off automatically.
v You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the
operating system and turn off the server, if your operating system supports this
feature.
v If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the
power-control button for more than 4 seconds to turn off the server.
v The integrated management module (IMM) can turn off the server as an
automatic response to a critical system failure.

22 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices
This chapter provides detailed instructions for installing optional hardware devices
in the server.

In addition to the instructions in this chapter for installing optional hardware

devices, updating the firmware and device drivers, and completing the installation,
IBM Business Partners must also complete the steps in “Instructions for IBM
Business Partners” on page 24.

Important: To help ensure that the devices that you install work correctly and do
not introduce problems, observe the following precautions:
1. Make sure that the server and the installed firmware levels support the devices
that you are installing. If necessary, update the UEFI and IMM firmware and
any other firmware that is stored on the system board. For information about
where firmware is stored in the server, see“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
For a list of supported optional devices for the server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
2. Before you install optional hardware devices, make sure that the server is
working correctly. Start the server and make sure that the operating system
starts, if an operating system is installed, or that a 19990305 error code is
displayed, indicating that an operating system was not found but the server is
otherwise working correctly. If the server is not working correctly, see
“Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs” on page 120 for information
about how to run diagnostics.
3. Follow the installation procedures in this chapter and use the correct tools.
Incorrectly installed device can cause system failure because of damaged pins
in sockets or connectors, loose cabling, or loose components.
4. Use the best practices to apply current firmware and device-driver updates for
the server and optional devices. To download the IBM System x Firmware Update
Best Practices document, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/
docdisplay?brand=50000020&lndocid=MIGR-5082923. Additional hints and tips
are available from the following sites:
v IBM support: http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/
v System x configuration tools: http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/hardware/
configtools.html

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 23

Installing optional hardware devices in the server
This following sections provide detailed instructions for installing optional
hardware devices in the server.

Instructions for IBM Business Partners

In addition to the instructions in this chapter for installing optional hardware
devices, updating firmware and device drivers, and completing the installation,
IBM Business Partners must also complete the following steps:
1. Before you configure a server for a customer, complete the Solution Assurance
checklist at http://w3.ibm.com/support/assure/assur30i.nsf/webindex/
sa294/.
2. After you have confirmed that the server starts correctly and recognizes the
newly installed devices and that no error LEDs are lit, run the Dynamic System
Analysis (DSA) stress test. For information about using DSA, see the Problem
Determination and Service Guide.
3. Shut down and restart the server multiple times to ensure that the server is
correctly configured and functions correctly with the newly installed devices.
4. Save the DSA log as a file and send it to IBM. For information about
transferring data and logs, see http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/
toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/dsa/dsa_main.html.
5. To ship the server, repackage it in the original undamaged packing material
and observe IBM procedures for shipping.

Support information for IBM Business Partners is available at http://

www.ibm.com/partnerworld/pwhome.nsf/weblook/index_us.html.

How to send DSA data to IBM

Before you send diagnostic data to IBM, read the terms of use at
http://www.ibm.com/de/support/ecurep/terms.html.

You can use any of the following methods to send diagnostic data to IBM:
v Standard upload: http://www.ibm.com/de/support/ecurep/send_http.html
v Standard upload with the system serial number:http://www.ecurep.ibm.com/
app/upload_hw
v Secure upload:http://www.ibm.com/de/support/ecurep/
send_http.html#secure
v Secure upload with the system serial number:https://www.ecurep.ibm.com/
app/upload_hw

24 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Server components
The following illustration shows the major components in the server. The
illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component to
remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.

Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates that

the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and operating
system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the component
while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on hot-swap
components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific hot-swap
component for any additional procedures that you might have to perform before
you remove or install the component.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 25

Server internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers
The illustrations in this section show the connectors, LEDs, and jumpers on the
internal boards. The illustrations might differ slightly from your hardware.

System-board internal connectors

The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.

System-board external connectors

The following illustration shows the external input/output connectors on the
system board.

26 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

System-board jumpers
The following illustration shows the location of the jumpers.

The following table describes the jumper on the system board.

Table 2. System board jumpers
Jumper number Jumper name Jumper setting
CN14 Clear CMOS jumper v Pins 1 and 2: Normal
(default) This keeps the
CMOS data.
v Pins 2 and 3: This clears
the CMOS data such as
power-on password and
loads the default UEFI
settings.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 27

Table 2. System board jumpers (continued)
Jumper number Jumper name Jumper setting
J2 UEFI boot recovery jumper v Pins 1 and 2: Normal
(default) Loads the
primary server firmware
ROM page.
v Pins 2 and 3: Loads the
secondary (backup) server
firmware ROM page.
Note:
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2
and 3 before the server is turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not
change the jumper pin position after the server is turned on. This can cause an
unpredictable problem.

Important:
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the
server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. Review the
information in Safety, “Installation guidelines” on page 30, “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 32, and “Turning off the server” on page 21.
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the
illustrations in this document are reserved.

System-board LEDs
The following illustration shows the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the system
board.

28 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

System-board optional device connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors on the system board for
user-installable optional devices.

PCI riser cards

The following illustrations show the connectors on the PCI riser cards in the
riser-card assemblies.

The server comes with one PCI riser-card assembly installed in PCI riser connector
1. The riser-card assembly provides either one or two PCI slots, depending on the
server model. The following illustrations shows the connectors on PCI riser-card
assembly 1.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 29

The optional PCI riser-card assembly 2 is dedicated for an internal ServeRAID
adapter. If your server does not come with PCI riser-card assembly 2, you may
order it for hardware RAID upgrade or for installing additional hard disk drives.

Installation guidelines
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the system to halt, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when removing or installing a hot-swap
devices.

Before you install optional devices, read the following information:

v Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and the guidelines in
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32. This information will help you
work safely.
v Make sure that the devices that you are installing are supported.
v Make sure that the devices that you are installing are supported. For a list of
supported optional devices for the server, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/
info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply
the most recent firmware updates. This step will help to ensure that any known
issues are addressed and that your server is ready to function at maximum
levels of performance. To download firmware updates for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level
of code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
For additional information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying
firmware, see the ToolsCenter for System x and BladeCenter at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
v Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is working
correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts, if an
operating system is installed, or that a 19990305 error code is displayed,

30 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

indicating that an operating system was not found but the server is otherwise
working correctly. If the server is not working correctly, see “Running the DSA
Preboot diagnostic programs” on page 120 for information about how to run
diagnostics.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have
to lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:
– Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy
object.
– To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing
up with your leg muscles.
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.
v To view the error LEDs on the system board and internal components, leave the
server connected to power.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices.
However, you must turn off the server before you perform any steps that
involve removing or installing adapter cables and you must disconnect the
power source from the server before you perform any steps that involve
removing or installing a riser card.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points
on hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a
specific hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have
to perform before you remove or install the component.
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 31

System reliability guidelines
To help ensure proper system cooling and system reliability, make sure that the
following requirements are met:
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.
v If the server has redundant power, each of the power-supply bays has a power
supply installed in it.
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2.0 in.) of open space around the
front and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.
v You have replaced a failed fan within 48 hours.
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 2 minutes of removal.
v You do not operate the server without the air baffles installed. Operating the
server without the air baffles might cause the microprocessor to overheat.

Handling static-sensitive devices

Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices. To
avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until
you are ready to install them.

To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the

following precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains
static electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server
without setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it
back into its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server
cover or on a metal surface.
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.

32 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Removing the server top cover
To remove the server top cover, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. If the server has been installed in a rack, press the two release latches on the
front of the server and remove the server out of the rack enclosure.
Attention: Two or more people are required to remove the system from a rack
cabinet.
4. Loosen the two thumbscrews that secure the cover to the rear of the server.
5. Press on the two blue grip points and slide the cover toward the rear; then, lift
the cover off the server and set it aside.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Removing the air baffle

To remove the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover”).
4. Lift the air baffle from the server and set it aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the air baffle before you
turn on the server. Operating the server with the air baffle removed might
damage server components.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 33

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Installing a memory module

The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)
that the server supports and other information that you must consider when you
install DIMMs (see “System-board optional device connectors” on page 29 for the
location of the DIMM connectors):
v Confirm that the server supports the DIMM that you are installing, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v The server supports only industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 1066
MHz PC3-8500, 1333 MHz PC3-10600, or 1600 MHz PC3-12800, (single-rank,
dual-rank, or quad-rank in specified models), registered or unbuffered,
synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory
modules (DIMMs) with error correcting code (ECC).
– The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the
following format.
ggggg eRxff-PC3v-wwwwwm-aa-bb-ccd
where:
- ggggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)
- eR is the number of ranks
1R = single-rank
2R = dual-rank
4R = quad-rank
- x ff is the device organization or bit width (for example, x4, x8, or x16)
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)
8 = x8 organization
16 = x16 organization
- wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps
8500 = 8.53 GBps (DDR3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
10600 = 10.66 GBps (DDR3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)

34 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

12800 = 12.80 GBps (DDR3-1600 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
14900 = 14.93 GBps (DDR3-1866 SDRAMs, 8 byte primary data bus)
17000 = 17.06 GBps (DDR3-2133 SDRAMs, 8 byte primary data bus)
- m is the DIMM type
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)
- aa is the DDR3 SDRAM CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating
frequency
- bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level
- cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM
- d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM

Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The
information on the label is in the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The
numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether the DIMM is
single-rank (n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).
v Do not install registered and unbuffered DIMMs in the same server.
v The server supports 1.35-volt (low-voltage) and 1.5-volt DIMMs. Do not install a
1.35-volt and 1.5-volt DIMM in the same server.
v The server supports a maximum of 12 DIMMs (single-rank, dual-rank, or
quad-rank) on the system board. If you mix single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank
DIMMs in the server, quad-rank DIMMs must be installed first. When one
quad-rank DIMM is installed, it must be installed in DIMM slot 1.
v The DIMM options that are available for the server are 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB,
and 32 GB (when available).
v The server system board supports a minimum of 2 GB and a maximum of 96 GB
of system memory.

Note: The amount of usable memory is reduced depending on the system

configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system
resources. To view the total amount of installed memory and the amount of
configured memory, run the Setup utility. For additional information, see
“Configuring the server” on page 72.
v The server system board provides three memory channels for each
microprocessor and each memory channel supports up to two DIMMs. The
following table lists the DIMM connectors on each memory channel:
Table 3. DIMM connectors on each memory channel
Microprocessor Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2
Microprocessor 1 DIMM connectors 1 DIMM connectors 3 DIMM connectors 5
and 2 and 4 and 6
Microprocessor 2 DIMM connectors 7 DIMM connectors 9 DIMM connectors 11
and 8 and 10 and 12

v The following table shows the DIMM connectors that are associated with each
microprocessor:

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 35

Table 4. DIMM connectors associated with each microprocessor
DIMM connectors associated with the
Microprocessor microprocessor
Microprocessor 1 1 through 6
Microprocessor 2 7 through 12

v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest

DIMM installed in the server.
v A minimum of one DIMM must be installed for each microprocessor. For
example, you must install a minimum of two DIMMs if the server has two
microprocessors installed. That is, one for microprocessor 1 and one for
microprocessor 2.
v The server comes with a minimum of one DIMM installed in slot 1. When you
install additional DIMMs, install them in the order shown in the information in
the following tables to optimize system performance.
v The server supports independent mode, spare channel mode, and mirroring
mode.
v Independent mode: When you use the independent mode, install DIMMs as
indicated in the following tables.
– The following table lists the DIMM installation sequence for non-mirroring
mode when one or two microprocessors is installed in the server:
Table 5. DIMM population sequence (independent mode)
Number of installed
microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
1 1, 3, 5, 2, 4, 6
2 1, 7, 3, 9, 5, 11, 2, 8, 4, 10, 6, 12

v Spare channel mode: When you use the memory mirroring feature, consider the
following information:
– In spare channel mode, one rank is a spare of the other ranks on the same
channel. The spare rank is held in reserve and is not available as system
memory. The spare rank must have identical or larger memory capacity than
all the other ranks (sparing source ranks) on the same channel. After sparing,
the sparing source rank will be lost.
– DIMMs must be installed in sets of three. The DIMMs in each set must be the
same size and type.
– The following table lists the DIMM installation sequence for rank sparing
mode when one or two microprocessors is installed in the server:
Table 6. DIMM population sequence (rank sparing mode)
Number of installed
microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
1 1, 3, 5

2, 4, 6
2 1, 3, 5

7, 9, 11

2, 4, 6

8, 10, 12

36 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Memory-mirroring mode: When you use the memory mirroring feature,
consider the following information:
– Memory-mirroring mode replicates and stores data on two pairs of DIMMs
simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the memory controller switches from the
primary pair of memory DIMMs to the backup pair of DIMMs. This
mirroring provides redundancy in memory but reduces the total memory
capacity to one third. Channel 1 DIMM connectors 3, 4, 9, and 10 are not used
in memory-mirroring mode. To enable memory mirroring through the Setup
utility, select System Settings → Memory. For more information, see “Using
the Setup utility” on page 75.
– DIMMs must be installed in pairs. The DIMMs in each pair must be the same
size and type.
– The maximum available memory is reduced to one third of the installed
memory when memory mirroring is enabled. For example, if you install 96
GB of memory, only 32 GB of addressable memory is available when you use
memory mirroring.
– The following table lists the DIMM installation sequence for
memory-mirroring mode when one or two microprocessors is installed in the
server:
Table 7. DIMM population sequence (memory-mirroring mode)
Number of installed
microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
1 3, 5

4, 6
2 3, 5

9, 11

4, 6

10, 12

v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information

changes. When you restart the server, the system displays a message that
indicates that the memory configuration has changed.

The following illustration shows the location of the DIMMs connectors on the
system board.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 37

To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.

38 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

5. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
6. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.
7. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with
the slots at the ends of the DIMM connector (see “System-board optional device
connectors” on page 29 for the locations of the DIMM connectors).
8. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure
on both ends of the DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the
locked position when the DIMM is firmly seated in the connector.

Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM
has not been correctly inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM,
and then reinsert it.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Installing drives
The following notes describe the type of drives that the server supports and other
information that you must consider when you install a drive. To confirm that the
server supports the drive that you are installing, see http://www.ibm.com/
systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Locate the documentation that comes with the drive and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this chapter.
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in
the documentation that comes with the drive.
v Select the bay in which you want to install the drive.
v The server supports one optional ultra-slim SATA CD-RW/DVD-ROM optical
drive.
v The server can support up to eight 2.5 inch hot-swap SAS/SATA drives, four
3.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA drives, or four 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drives.
(see Supported SAS/SATA drive backplane configurations for the supported
configurations).
v You can mix hot-swap SAS and SATA hard disk drives in the same server as
long as you do not mix drives on the same array.
v The electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling of the server are
protected by having all bays and PCI Express slots covered or occupied. When
you install a drive, save the EMC shield and filler panel from the bay in the
event that you later remove the device.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 39

Installing hot-swap drives
To install a hot-swap SAS or SATA drive, complete the following steps.

Note: If you install only one drive, you must install it in drive bay 0.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
3. Install a 3.5-inch hot-swap drive:
a. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay.
b. Make sure that the drive-tray handle is in the open (unlocked) position.
c. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.

d. Gently push the drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive stops.
e. Rotate the drive-tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
f. Skip to step 5.
4. Install a 2.5-inch hot-swap drive:
a. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay.
b. Make sure that the drive-tray handle is in the open (unlocked) position.
c. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.

d. Gently push the drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive stops.
e. Rotate the drive-tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
5. Check the drive status LED to verify that the drive is operating correctly. If the
yellow drive status LED for a drive is lit continuously, that drive is faulty and
must be replaced. If the green drive activity LED is flashing, the drive is being
accessed.

Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID

adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install drives.
See the ServeRAID adapter documentation for additional information about
RAID operation and complete instructions for using the ServeRAID adapter.
6. If you are installing additional hot-swap drives, do so now.

40 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

7. Restart the server. Confirm that it starts correctly and recognizes the newly
installed devices, and make sure that no error LEDs are lit.
8. Complete the additional steps in “Instructions for IBM Business Partners” on
page 24.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

IDs for hot-swap drives

The hot-swap-drive ID that is assigned to each drive is printed on the front of the
server. The following illustrations show the location of the IDs of the drives. The
ID numbers and the drive bay numbers are the same.

The following illustration shows the drive bay IDs on a 3.5-inch drive server
model.

The following illustration shows the drive bay IDs on a 2.5-inch drive server
model.

Installing 3.5-inch simple-swap drives

To install a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive, complete the following steps.

Note: If you install only one drive, you must install it in drive bay 0.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
4. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay.
5. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 41

6. Gently slide the drive assembly into the drive bay until it clicks into place.
7. Install the filler panel.
8. If you are installing additional simple-swap drives, do so now.
9. Restart the server. Confirm that it starts correctly and recognizes the newly
installed devices, and make sure that no error LEDs are lit.

Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID

adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install drives.
See the ServeRAID adapter documentation for additional information about
RAID operation and complete instructions for using the ServeRAID adapter.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Installing an optional optical drive

To install an optional optical drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Locate the blue release tab on the rear of the drive bay; then, while you press
the tab, push the optical drive filler toward the front of the server.

42 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

5. Pull the optical drive filler out of the front of the server.
6. Remove the retention clip from the side of the drive filler.

Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following
safety precaution.
Statement 3

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 43

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new optical drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the optical drive from the
package and place it on a static-protective surface.
8. Attach the drive retention clip that you removed from the previous drive to the
side of the new drive.
9. Align the drive in the drive bay and slide the drive into the optical drive bay
until the drive clicks into place.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

44 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Installing a PCI riser-card assembly
To install a PCI riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Install the adapter in the PCI riser-card assembly (see “Installing an adapter”
on page 46).
5. Align the PCI riser-card assembly with the PCI slot connector on the system
board and align nailheads with the slots on the chassis; then, press down firmly
until the riser-card assembly is seated correctly in the connector on the system
board.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 45

Installing an adapter
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and
other information that you must consider when you install an adapter:
v To confirm that the server supports the adapter that you are installing, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section.
v Do not set the maximum digital video adapter resolution above 1280 x 1024 at
75 Hz for an LCD monitor. This is the highest resolution that is supported for
any add-on video adapter that you install in the server.
v Any high-definition video-out connector or stereo connector on any add-on
video adapter is not supported.
v The server provides two PCI riser slots on the system board. The riser cards
provide up to three PCIE 3 adapter slots (see “PCI riser cards” on page 29 for
the location of the PCI-e slots on the riser cards). The following table lists the
PCI-e slots on the riser-card and the system board, the microprocessor to which
each slot is connected, and the supported adapters that you can install in each
slot:
Table 8. PCI riser slots supported configurations
Microprocessor
PCI riser-card PCI-e slot to which the
assembly number slot is connected Configuration 1 Configuration 2
1 1 Microprocessor 1 PCIE 3.0 x16 PCIE 3.0 x8 (x16
(x16 mechanically)
mechanically) full-height,
full-height, half-length
half-length adapter
adapter
1 2 Microprocessor 1 N/A PCIE 3.0 x8 (x16
mechanically)
low-profile
adapter
2 3 Microprocessor 1 PCIE 3.0 x4 PCIE 3.0 x4
low-profile, low-profile,
internal RAID internal RAID
adapter adapter
Note: PCI-e slot 3 on PCI riser-card assembly 2 is reserved for an optional internal RAID
adapter. Do not install any internal RAID adapter in PCI riser-card assembly 1.

v Depending on your server model, the server comes with an onboard RAID
controller which provides basic RAID levels 0 and 1 functionality. The server
supports the following optional RAID adapters that you can purchase for
additional RAID support. For configuration information, see the documentation
that comes with the adapter or the ServeRAID documentation at
http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level
of code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
– ServeRAID controllers:
- ServeRAID H1110 SAS/SATA Controller for System x
- ServeRAID M1115 SAS/SATA Controller for System x
- ServeRAID M5120 SAS/SATA Controller for IBM System x

46 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

- ServeRAID M5110 SAS/SATA Controller for IBM System x
– ServeRAID controller upgrade options:
- ServeRAID M5100 Series 512 MB Cache/RAID 5 Upgrade for IBM System
x
- ServeRAID M5100 Series 512 MB Flash/RAID 5 Upgrade for IBM System x
- ServeRAID M5100 Series 1 GB Flash/RAID 5 Upgrade for IBM System x
- ServeRAID M5100 Series RAID 6 Upgrade for IBM System x
- ServeRAID M5100 Series Performance Key

Notes:
v The instructions in this section apply to any supported adapter (for example,
video graphics adapters or network adapters).
v You must install an internal ServeRAID adapter in PCI riser-card assembly 2.
v When you install an adapter, make sure that the adapter is correctly seated in
the riser-card assembly and that the riser-card assembly is securely seated in the
riser-card connector on the system board before you turn on the server. An
incorrectly seated adapter might cause damage to the system board, the
riser-card assembly, or the adapter.
v Do not set the maximum digital video adapter resolution above 1600 x 1200 at
75 Hz for an LCD monitor. This is the highest resolution that is supported for
any add-on video adapter that you install in the server.
v Any high-definition video-out connector or stereo connector on any add-on
video adapter is not supported
v

To install an adapter, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Follow the cabling instructions, if any come with the adapter. Route the adapter
cables before you install the adapter.
5. Installing an adapter in PCI riser-card assembly 1:
Insert the adapter into the PCI riser-card assembly, aligning the edge connector
on the adapter with the connector on the PCI riser-card assembly. Press the
edge of the connector firmly into the PCI riser-card assembly. Make sure that
the adapter snaps into the PCI riser-card assembly securely.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 47

6. Installing a ServeRAID adapter in PCI riser-card assembly 2:
a. Pull the release pin to unlock the release latch.
b. Rotate the retention latch to the open position.
c. Insert the adapter into the PCI riser-card assembly, aligning the edge
connector on the adapter with the connector on the PCI riser-card assembly.
Press the edge of the connector firmly into the PCI riser-card assembly. Make
sure that the adapter snaps into the PCI riser-card assembly securely.
d. Rotate the retention latch to the close position. Make sure the retention latch
engages the adapter securely; then, push in the release pin to lock the
retention latch.

7. Install the PCI riser-card assembly in the server (see “Installing a PCI riser-card
assembly” on page 45).
8. Perform any configuration tasks that are required for the adapter.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

48 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Installing an optional IBM ServeRAID SAS/SATA Controller

You can purchase an optional IBM ServeRAID SAS/SATA controller. You must
install the optional ServeRAID adapter in PCI slot 3 on PCI riser-card assembly 2.
If the server does not already come with PCI riser-card assembly 2, you must
purchase the PCI riser-card assembly option. For configuration information, see the
ServeRAID documentation at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

Note:
1. Follow the general rule for connecting the SAS signal cables to the adapter and
drive backplane, port 0 on the adapter to port 0 on the drive backplane; then
port 1 on the adapter to port 1 on the drive backplane (depending on the drive
backplane you install in the server).
2. When you install an IBM ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter that has a battery, you
must install the ServeRAID battery remotely on the remote battery holder in
the server (see “Installing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the server” on
page 60).

To install an IBM ServeRAID adapter, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Carefully grasp PCI riser-card assembly 2 by the blue touch points and pull it
until the PCI riser-card assembly disengages from the connector on the system
board.
5. Pull the release pin on the rear of the PCI riser-card assembly to unlock the
retention latch; then rotate the retention latch to the open position.
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the ServeRAID adapter to
any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then, grasp the adapter by
the top edge or upper corners of the adapter and remove it from the package.
7. Align the ServeRAID adapter so that the keys align correctly with the
connector on the PCI riser-card assembly.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 49

8. Insert the ServeRAID adapter into the connector on the riser-card until it is
firmly seated.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the server or the
adapter.
9. Rotate the retention latch to the closed position, making sure the retention
latch engages the ServeRAID adapter. Then, push in the release pin to lock the
retention latch in place.
10. Connect the power/configuration cable to the drive backplane and the system
board.
11. Connect the signal cable to the drive backplane and to the adapter. Be sure to
route the signal cables as shown in the following illustration. Secure the cables
with any cable clips on the system board so that they do not get in the way or
get damaged.
12. Reinstall PCI riser-card assembly 2 onto the system board.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Installing an additional microprocessor and heat sink

Note: If your server comes with one Intel Pentium 1400 series microprocessor, the
second microprocessor socket is not used. The server supports only one Intel
Pentium microprocessor. If you plan to install two Intel Xeon microprocessors in
the server, you must first remove the Intel Pentium microprocessor that came with
the server.

The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a microprocessor
and heat sink:
v A microprocessor must be replaced or serviced by a trained technician.
v Be extremely careful, the pins on the socket are fragile. Any damage to the pins
may require replacing the system board.
v The microprocessor tool assembly comes with the microprocessor and
microprocessor cover attached to the tool. The microprocessor comes protected
between the tool and the microprocessor cover. Store the microprocessor tool in
a safe location for future use.
v Use the microprocessor tool to install or remove a microprocessor in the server.
Failure to use the microprocessor tool may cause damage to the pins in the
socket. Any damage to the pins may require replacing the system board.
v The server supports one Intel Pentium 1400 series microprocessor or up to two
Intel Xeon four-core, six-core, or eight-core microprocessors (depending on your
model). To confirm that the server supports the microprocessor, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/ for a
list of supported microprocessors.
v Do not mix four-core, six-core, and eight-core microprocessors in the same
server.
v The microprocessor options that IBM supports are limited by the capacity and
capability of the server. Any microprocessor options that you install must have
the same specifications as the microprocessor(s) that came with the server.
v The first microprocessor must always be installed in microprocessor socket 1 on
the system board.

50 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Do not remove the first microprocessor from the system board when you install
the second microprocessor.
v When you install the second microprocessor, you must also install additional
memory and the fourth and sixth fans. See “Installing a memory module” on
page 34 for details about the memory installation sequence.
v To ensure proper server operation when you install an additional
microprocessor, use microprocessors that have the same QuickPath Interconnect
(QPI) link speed, integrated memory controller frequency, core frequency, power
segment, internal cache size, and type.
v Mixing microprocessors of different stepping levels within the same server
model is supported.
v When mixing microprocessors with different stepping levels within the same
server model, you do not have to install the microprocessor with lowest
stepping level and features in microprocessor socket 1.
v Both microprocessor voltage regulator modules are integrated on the system
board.
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor, so that you can
determine whether you have to update the server firmware. To download the
latest level of the server firmware and other code updates for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.
v If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner) is
removed from the heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of
the heat sink or set down the heat sink. For details, see Thermal grease.

Note: Removing the heat sink from the microprocessor destroys the even
distribution of the thermal grease and requires replacing the thermal grease.
v To order an additional optional microprocessor, contact your IBM marketing
representative or authorized reseller.
v The following table shows the DIMM connectors on the system board and the
DIMM connectors that are associated with each microprocessor:
Table 9. DIMM connectors associated with each microprocessor
Microprocessor DIMM connectors
Microprocessor socket 1 1 through 6
Microprocessor socket 2 7 through 12

To install an additional microprocessor and heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to
avoid damage from static electricity. For details about handling these devices,
see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 33).
5. Locate microprocessor socket 2 on the system board.
6. Remove the heat-sink filler, if one is present.
7. Open the microprocessor socket release lever and retainer.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 51

a. Press down and out on the release lever on microprocessor socket 2 and
lift up the microprocessor release lever until it stops in the fully open
position.
b. Lift the hinged microprocessor bracket frame into an open position.
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to
avoid damage from static electricity. For details about handling these
devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32.

8. Install the microprocessor:

a. Remove the socket cover from the microprocessor socket.

b. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new microprocessor

to any unpainted metal surface on the server.
c. Remove the microprocessor installation tool assembly from the package.
The microprocessor installation tool assembly comes with the
microprocessor and microprocessor cover attached to the tool. The
microprocessor comes protected between the tool and the microprocessor
cover.
Attention:
v Do not rotate the handle on the tool until you are ready to install the
microprocessor into the microprocessor socket.
v Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil
from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and
the socket.
v Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor
during installation or removal can damage the contacts.
d. Remove the cover from the bottom of the microprocessor installation tool.
Press both microprocessor cover release tabs outward (in opposite
directions as shown in the illustration) and remove the microprocessor

52 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

installation tool with the microprocessor attached.

e. Carefully align the microprocessor installation tool over the microprocessor

socket. .

Note: The microprocessor fits only one way in the socket.

f. Twist the handle on the microprocessor tool counterclockwise to insert the

microprocessor into the socket.

g. Take off the microprocessor installation tool from the microprocessor

socket and close the microprocessor bracket frame.
h. Carefully close the microprocessor release lever to the closed position to
secure the microprocessor in the socket.
9. Install the heat sink that came with the microprocessor:
a. Remove the plastic protective cover from the bottom of the heat sink.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat
sink after you remove the plastic cover. Touching the thermal grease will
contaminate it. See Thermal grease for more information.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 53

b. Align the screws on the heat sink with the screw holes on the system
board; then, place the heat sink on the microprocessor with the
thermal-grease side down.

c. Press firmly on the captive screws and tighten them with a screwdriver.
The follow illustration shows the sequence in tightening the screws, which
is also shown on top of the heat sink. Begin with the screw labeled as "1",
then "2", "3" and finally "4". If possible, each screw should be rotated two
full rotations at a time. Repeat until the screws are tight. Do not
overtighten the screws by using excessive force. If you are using a torque
wrench, tighten the screws to 8.5 Newton-meters (Nm) to 13 Nm (6.3
foot-pounds to 9.6 foot-pounds).

10. If you installed the second microprocessor, install the two fans on Fan
connector 4 and Fan connector 6 of the system board respectively (see
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly).
11. Reinstall the air baffle, (see Replacing the microprocessor air baffle).
12. Reconnect any cables that you have disconnected from the adapters or system
board.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

54 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Thermal grease
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.

When you are installing the heat sink on the same microprocessor that is was
removed from, make sure that the following requirements are met:
v The thermal grease on the heat sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.
v Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the
heat sink and microprocessor.

Note:
v Read the Safety information on page Safety.
v Read the “Installation guidelines” on page 30.
v Read “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32.

To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and

heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.

Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.

4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.

5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL

each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge of the microprocessor; this is to ensure
uniform distribution of the grease.

Note: If the grease is properly applied, approximately half of the grease will
remain in the syringe.
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing an
additional microprocessor and heat sink” on page 50.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 55

Installing a hot-swap power supply
The following notes describe the type of power supply that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a power supply:
v To confirm that the server supports the power supply that you are installing, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Before you install an additional power supply or replace a power supply with
one of a different wattage, you may use the IBM Power Configurator utility to
determine current system power consumption. For more information and to
download the utility, go to http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/
resources/powerconfig.html.
v The server comes standard with one of the following power supplies that
connects to power supply bay 1. The input voltage is 100-127 V ac or 200-240 V
ac auto-sensing.
– 460-watt fixed power supply
– 460-watt hot-swap power supply
– 675-watt high-efficiency, hot-swap power supply

Note: You cannot mix 110 V ac and 220 V ac, or 460-watt and 675-watt power
supplies in the server, it is not supported.
v Power supply 1 is the default/primary power supply. If power supply 1 fails,
you must replace the power supply with the same wattage immediately.
v The server supports a maximum of two hot-swap power supplies. These power
supplies are designed for parallel operation. In the event of a power-supply
failure, the redundant power supply continues to power the system.
v The server can run fully configured with one power supply. For redundancy
support, you must install the second hot-swap power supply.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

Statement 8

56 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components. If you suspect a with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap power supply
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply
from the package and place it on a static-protective surface.
3. If you are installing a hot-swap power supply into an empty bay, remove the
power-supply filler panel from the power-supply bay.

4. Grasp the handle on the rear of the power supply with the gold contact ; then,
slide the power supply forward into the power-supply bay until it clicks.
Make sure that the power supply connects firmly into the power-supply
connector.
5. Route the power cord through the cable retainer clip on the rear of the server
so that it does not accidentally become unplugged.
6. Connect the power cord for the new power supply to the power-cord
connector on the power supply.
7. Connect the other end of the power cord to a properly grounded electrical
outlet.
8. Make sure that the ac power LED and the dc power LED on the power
supply are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. The two
green LEDs are to the right of the power-cord connector.
9. If you are replacing a power supply with one of a different wattage in the
server, apply the new power information label provided over the existing
power information label on the server. Power supplies in the server must be

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 57

with the same power rating or wattage to ensure that the server will operate
correctly.

10. If you are adding a power supply to the server, attach the redundant power
information label that comes with this option on the server cover near the
power supplies.

11. Restart the server. Confirm that it starts correctly and recognizes the newly
installed device, and make sure that no error LEDs are lit.

58 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device
To install a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Remove PCIe riser-card assembly 1 (see “Removing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 328).
5. Locate the embedded hypervisor USB flash device connector on the system
board as shown in the following illustration:

6. Slide the lockbar toward the riser-card assembly to the locked position until it
is seated firmly.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 59

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 65.

Installing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the server

When you install a RAID adapter in the server that come with a battery or a
power module (Supercap pack), the RAID battery or power module must be
installed remotely to prevent it from overheating. The battery or power module
must be installed in the RAID battery tray on top of the power interposer card.

To install a RAID adapter battery or power module remotely in the server,

complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. If the RAID adapter was shipped with a battery and battery carrier attached,
disconnect the battery carrier cable from the battery and remove the three
screws that secure the battery carrier to the adapter. Set the battery and
battery carrier aside.

60 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

4. Install the interposer card in the interposer card connector on the RAID
adapter:
a. Remove the interposer card and the screw from the bag.
b. Rotate the plastic standoff on the interposer card so that it aligns with the
hole on the RAID adapter; then, align the connector on interposer card
with the interposer card connector on the RAID adapter.

c. Press the interposer card down onto the interposer card connector on the
RAID adapter until it is firmly seated.
d. From underneath the RAID adapter, insert the screw that you took from
the bag and tighten the screw to secure the interposer card to the RAID
adapter.
5. Connect one end of the remote battery cable to the interposer card.
Attention: To avoid damage to the hardware, make sure that the black dot
on the remote battery cable connector faces away from the interposer card on
the adapter. Do not force the remote battery cable into the connector.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 61

6. Install the RAID adapter on the riser card and install the PCI riser-card
assembly in the server (see “Installing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 45).
7. Connect the other end of the remote battery cable to the remote battery cable
connector on the battery carrier.
Attention: To avoid damage to the hardware, make sure that the black dot
on the remote battery cable connector faces away from the interposer card on
the adapter. Do not force the remote battery cable into the connector.
8. Route the remote battery cable in server as shown in the following illustration.
Attention: Make sure that the cable is not pinched and does not cover any
connectors or obstruct any components on the system board.
9. Install the battery on the safety cover:
a. Orient the battery as shown in the following illustration; then, lower the
battery onto the safety cover. If the battery comes with a battery carrier,
ensure that battery carrier posts align with the rings on the battery
mounting slot so that the battery carrier is secure in the slot.

Note: The positioning of the remote battery depends on the type of remote
battery that you install.
b. Rotate the retention clip to the close position and press down on the
retention clip until it snaps in place to hold the battery in place.
10. Connect the remote battery cable to the remote battery cable connector to the
ServeRAID adapter. Route the remote battery cable in the server as shown in
the following illustration.
Attention: Make sure that the cable is not pinched and does not cover any
connectors or obstruct any components on the system board.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation” on page 65.

62 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Installing an optional 4x2.5-inch hot-swap drive backplane
To install an optional 4x2.5-inch hot-swap drive backplane, complete the following
steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Connect the configuration, signal, and power cables to the connectors on the
backplane, if they are not already connected.
5. Slide the backplane into the guide channels, making sure that any nearby wires
or cables are not trapped or pinched.

6. Connect the cables:

a. Connect the other end of the power cable to the power connector to the
power supply.
1) The redundant power model:

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 63

2) The fixed power model:

64 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

b. Connect the other end of the signal cable to the Port 1 connector on the
RAID adapter or the connector on the system board. Be sure to route the
signal cable through the cage hole next to the power distribution board.

c. Use the cable clips on the chassis to secure the cables so that they do not get
in the way or get damaged.

If you have other devices to install or remove, do so now. Otherwise, go to

“Completing the installation.”

Completing the installation

To complete the installation, complete the following steps:
1. If you removed the air baffle, reinstall it (see “Replacing the air baffle” on page
66).
2. If you removed a PCIe riser-card assembly, reinstall it (see “Replacing a PCI
riser-card assembly” on page 66).
3. If you removed the server cover, replace it (see “Replacing the server top
cover” on page 67).
4. Install the server in the rack cabinet (see the Rack Installation Instructions that
come with the server for instructions).
5. Reconnect the cables and power cords (see “Connecting the cables” on page
68).
6. Start the server. Confirm that is starts correctly and recognizes the newly
installed devices, and make sure that no error LEDs are lit.
7. Update the server configuration (see “Updating the server configuration” on
page 69).

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 65

8. Complete the additional steps in “Instructions for IBM Business Partners” on
page 24.

Replacing the air baffle

To install the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the tabs on the sides of the air baffle with the slots on the fan cage and
lower the air baffle into the server.

Note: Make sure that no cable is pinched.

Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly

To replace a PCI riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Install the adapter in the PCI riser-card assembly (see “Installing an adapter”
on page 46).
3. Align the PCI riser-card assembly with the PCIe slot connector on the system
board and align nailheads with the slots on the chassis; then, press down firmly
until the riser-card assembly is seated correctly in the connector on the system
board.

66 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Replacing the server top cover
To replace the server cover, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.
2. Align the cover over the server (toward the rear of the server) until the cover
edges slip into position over the chassis.
Important: Before you slide the cover forward, make sure that all the tabs on
the cover engage the chassis correctly. If all the tabs do not engage the chassis
correctly, it will be hard to remove the cover later.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 67

3. Slightly slide the cover toward the front of the server until the inset tabs start
to engage on the server; then, tighten the thumbscrews to secure the cover to
the chassis.
4. Install the server into the rack enclosure and push the server into the rack until
it clicks into place.

Connecting the cables

The following illustration shows the locations of the input and output connectors
on the front of the server.

The following illustration shows the locations of the input and output connectors
for both non-hot-swap and hot-swap power supplies respectively on the rear of the
server.

You must turn off the server before you connect or disconnect cables.

See the documentation that comes with any external devices for additional cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route cables before you connect the
devices to the server.

68 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Updating the server configuration
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove a device, you
might receive a message that the configuration has changed. The Setup utility
starts automatically so that you can save the new configuration settings.

Some optional devices have device drivers that you must install. For information
about installing device drivers, see the documentation that comes with each device.

If the server has an optional RAID adapter and you have installed or removed a
hard disk drive, see the documentation that comes with the RAID adapter for
information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.

The server comes with at least one microprocessor. If more that one microprocessor
is installed, the server can operate as a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server.
You might have to upgrade the operating system to support SMP. For more
information, see “Typical operating-system installation” on page 75 and the
operating-system documentation.

For information about configuring the integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller, see
“Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller” on page 87.

Chapter 2. Installing optional devices 69

70 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions
This chapter provides information about updating the firmware and using the
configuration utilities.

Updating the firmware

Important:: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

You can install code updates that are packaged as an UpdateXpress System Pack or
UpdateXpress CD image. An UpdateXpress System Pack contains an
integration-tested bundle of online firmware and device-driver updates for your
server. Use UpdateXpress System Pack Installer to acquire and apply UpdateXpress
System Packs and individual firmware and device-driver updates. For additional
information and to download the UpdateXpress System Pack Installer, go to the
ToolsCenter for System x and BladeCenter at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp9.42.212.195/ and click UpdateXpress System
Pack Installer.

When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a list of the
problems that the update fixes. Review this list for your specific problem; however,
even if your problem is not listed, installing the update might solve the problem.

Be sure to separately install any listed critical updates that have release dates that
are later than the release date of the UpdateXpress System Pack or UpdateXpress
image.

The firmware for the server is periodically updated and is available for download
on the IBM wb site. To check for the latest level of firmware, such as the UEFI
firmware, vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and integrated
management module (IMM) firmware, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/
fixcentral/.

Note: Before you update the firmware, be sure to back up any data that is stored
in the Trusted Platform Module (TPM), in case any of the TPM characteristics are
changed by the new firmware. For instructions, see your encryption software
documentation.

Download the latest firmware for the server; then, install the firmware, using the
instructions that are included with the downloaded files.

When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the
firmware that is stored in memory on the device or restore the pre-existing
firmware from a diskette or CD image.

The following list indicates where the firmware is stored:

v UEFI firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the system board.
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 71

v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the ServeRAID adapter.
v SAS/SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS/SATA controller on the
system board.

Configuring UEFI compatible devices

Use this information to configure UEFI compatible devices.

UEFI compatible expansion cards can be configured through the Setup utility. To
configure a UEFI compatible expansion card, complete the following steps:

Note: Before configuring a UEFI compatible device, it is recommended to update

the firmware for your server. See “Updating the firmware” on page 71 for
information on how to update the firmware for your server.
1. Run the Setup utility (see “Using the Setup utility” on page 75).
2. Select System Settings → Network or Storage depending on the type of your
adapters.

Note: Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers for UEFI 2.0 (and
prior) compliant adapters and drivers installed in the server.
3. Select Please refresh this page first and press Enter.
4. Select the device driver that you want to configure and press Enter.
5. When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.

Configuring the server

The following configuration programs come with the server:
v Setup utility
The UEFI Setup Utility program is part of the basic input/output system
firmware. Use it to change interrupt request (IRQ) settings, change the
startup-device sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords. For
information about using this program, see “Using the Setup utility” on page 75.
v Boot Manager program
The Boot Manager program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the
startup sequence that is set in the Setup utility and temporarily assign a device
to be first in the startup sequence. For more information about using this
program, see “Using the Boot Manager program” on page 82.
v IBM ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide program provides software-setup tools and installation tools
that are designed for the server. Use this CD during the installation of the server
to configure basic hardware features, such as an integrated SAS/SATA controller
with RAID capabilities, and to simplify the installation of your operating system.
For information about using this CD, see “Using the ServerGuide Setup and
Installation CD” on page 74.
v Integrated Management Module
Use the integrated management module II (IMM2) for configuration, to update
the firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and
to remotely manage a network. For information about using the IMM, see
“Using the integrated management module II” on page 83 and the Integrated
Management Module User's Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.

72 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor
An optional USB flash device with VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor software
is available for purchase. Hypervisor is virtualization software that enables
multiple operating systems to run on a host system at the same time. The USB
embedded hypervisor flash device installs in the USB connector on the system
board. For more information about using the embedded hypervisor, see “Using
the embedded hypervisor” on page 84.
v Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the Integrated Management Module II (IMM2). The remote presence feature
provides the following functions:
– Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 75 Hz,
regardless of the system state
– Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
– Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a
remote client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that
are available for use by the server
– Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server
as a virtual drive
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the
IMM restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang
condition. A system administrator can use the blue-screen capture feature to
assist in determining the cause of the hang condition.
v Ethernet controller configuration
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the
Gigabit Ethernet controller” on page 87.
v Configuring RAID arrays
For information about configuring RAID arrays, see Configuring RAID arrays.
v IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI
settings and IMM settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to
modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the
server to access the Setup utility. For more information about using this
program, see “IBM Advanced Settings Utility program” on page 91.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 73

Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD provides software setup tools and
installation tools that are designed for your server. The ServerGuide program
detects the server model and optional hardware devices that are installed and uses
that information during setup to configure the hardware. The ServerGuide
simplifies the operating-system installations by providing updated device drivers
and, in some cases, installing them automatically.

You can download a free image of the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD or
purchase the CD from the ServerGuide fulfillment Web site at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/serverguide/sub.html. To download
the free image. click IBM Service and Support Site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.

The ServerGuide program requires a supported IBM server with an enabled

startable (bootable) CD drive. In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD, you must have your operating-system CD to install the operating system.

To start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the CD, and restart the server. If the CD does not start, see “ServerGuide
problems” on page 256.
2. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the following steps:
a. Select your language.
b. Select your keyboard layout and country.
c. View the overview to learn about ServerGuide features.
d. View the readme file to review installation tips for your operating system
and adapter.
e. Start the operating-system installation. You will need your operating-system
CD.

ServerGuide features
Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the ServerGuide
program. To learn more about the version that you have, start the ServerGuide Setup
and Installation CD and view the online overview. Not all features are supported on
all server models.

The ServerGuide program performs the following tasks:

v Sets system date and time
v Detects the RAID adapter or controller and runs the SAS/SATA RAID
configuration program
v Checks the microcode (firmware) levels of a ServeRAID adapter and determines
whether a later level is available from the CD
v Detects installed hardware options and provides updated device drivers for
most adapters and devices
v Provides diskette-free installation for supported Windows operating systems
v Includes an online readme file with links to tips for your hardware and
operating-system installation

74 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Setup and configuration overview
When you use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you do not need setup
diskettes. You can use the CD to configure any supported IBM server model. The
setup program provides a list of tasks that are required to set up your server
model. On a server with a ServeRAID adapter or SAS/SATA controller with RAID
capabilities, you can run the SAS/SATA RAID configuration program to create
logical drives.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.

Typical operating-system installation

The ServerGuide program can reduce the time it takes to install an operating
system. It provides the device drivers that are required for your hardware and for
the operating system that you are installing. This section describes a typical
ServerGuide operating-system installation.

Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
1. After you have completed the setup process, the operating-system installation
program starts. (You will need your operating-system CD to complete the
installation.)
2. The ServerGuide program stores information about the server model, service
processor, hard disk drive controllers, and network adapters. Then, the
program checks the CD for newer device drivers. This information is stored
and then passed to the operating-system installation program.
3. The ServerGuide program presents operating-system partition options that are
based on your operating-system selection and the installed hard disk drives.
4. The ServerGuide program prompts you to insert your operating-system CD
and restart the server. At this point, the installation program for the operating
system takes control to complete the installation.

Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide

If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the
ServerGuide program to install your operating system, you can download
operating-system installation instructions for the server from http://
www.ibm.com/supportportal/.

Using the Setup utility

Use the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Setup Utility program to
perform the following tasks:
v View configuration information
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports
v Set the date and time
v Set and change passwords
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features
v View and clear error logs
v Change interrupt request (IRQ) settings
v Resolve configuration conflicts

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 75

Starting the Setup utility
To start the Setup utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access
the full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a
limited Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select settings to view or change.

Setup utility menu choices

The following choices are on the Setup utility main menu for the UEFI. Depending
on the version of the IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware), some menu
choices might differ slightly from these descriptions. For more information on
UEFI-compliant firmware, go to http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5083207&brandind=5000008.
v System Information
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes
through other choices in the Setup utility, some of those changes are reflected in
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system
information. This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
– System Summary
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.
When you make configuration changes through other options in the Setup
utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change
settings directly in the system summary.
– Product Data
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and
diagnostics code, and the version and date.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v System Settings
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers
Select this choice to view information about the adapters and device drivers
installed in the server that are compliant with UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0.
– Processors
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.
– Memory
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings. To configure
memory mirroring, select System Settings → Memory → Memory Mode →
Mirrored.
– Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and
input/output (I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports; configure remote
console redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the
SAS/SATA adapter, SATA optical drive channels, and PCI slots; and view the

76 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

system Ethernet MAC addresses. If you disable a device, it cannot be
configured, and the operating system will not be able to detect it (this is
equivalent to disconnecting the device).
– Power
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,
processors, and performance states.
- Active Energy Manager
Select this choice to enable or disable power capping. If you enable power
capping, the Active Energy Manager program will limit the maximum
power that is consumed by the server.

Note: It is available only when System Settings → Processors → Processor

Performance States is enabled.
- Power/Performance Bias
Select this choice to determine how the power management of the
microprocessor is controlled. You can choose either Platform Controlled
(system) or OS Controlled (operating system) to control the setting. Not all
operating systems support this feature.
- Platform Controlled Type
Select this choice to determine how to balance between performance and
power consumption. Choosing Maximum Performance will disable power
management functions and allow the most aggressive use of turbo.
Choosing Minimal Power will maximizes the use of power management
features for least power consumption and disable turbo.

Note: It is available only when System Settings → Power →

Power/Performance Bias → Platform Controlled is enabled.
- Workload Configuration
Select this choice to determine how to balance between I/O bandwidth and
balanced workload. Choosing I/O sensitive will get higher I/O bandwidth
while expansion cards are used. Choosing Balanced will allow enough
frequency for workload while the microprocessor cores are idle.
– Operating Modes
Select this choice to view or change the operating profile (performance and
power utilization). This choice specify a preset operating mode to configure
the server for maximum power savings, maximum efficiency, and maximum
performance.
- Choose Operating Mode
Select the operating mode based on your preference. Power savings and
performance are also highly dependent on hardware and software running
on the system. When a present mode is selected, the low-level settings are
not changeable and will be grayed out.
- Memory Speed
Select the desired memory speed. Maximum performance mode maximizes
performance. Balanced mode offers a balance between performance and
power. Minimal power mode maximizes power savings.
- Memory Power Management
Select this choice to enable or disable power management on memory. If
you choose Disabled, it will provide maximum performance but minimum
power savings. If you choose Automatic, it is suitable for most applications.
- Proc Performance States

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 77

Select this choice to enable or disable processor performance states.
Enabling processor performance states (Intel Speedstep Technology) saves
power by reducing speed and voltage as the microprocessor utilized is
reduced.

Note: Some operating systems must have the correct power profile selected
to take advantage of this feature.
- C1 Enhance Mode
Select this choice to enable or disable C1E (C1 Enhanced) state. Enabling
C1E (C1 Enhanced) state can save power by halting CPU cores that are
idle.

Note: An operating system that supports C1E state must be installed to

take advantage of this feature. Changing this setting will be effective after
the next system reboot.
- QPI Link Frequency
Select this choice to determine the desired microprocessor QPI link
frequency. Maximum performance mode maximizes performance. Balanced
mode offers a balance between performance and power. Minimal power
maximizes power savings.
- Turbo Mode
Select this choice to enable or disable turbo mode. Enabling turbo mode
can boost the overall microprocessor performance when all microprocessor
cores are not fully utilized. A microprocessor core can run above its rated
frequency for a short period of time when it is in turbo mode.
- CPU C-States
Select this choice to enable or disable ACPI C2 Processor Power states. It
will be effective after the next system reboot.
- Package ACPI CState Limit
Select this choice to determine the level of C-state. Selecting a higher
C-state limit allows the microprocessors to consume less power when they
are idle. If you experience problems with legacy operating systems, set the
ACPI Cstate limit to C2.
- Power/Performance Bias
Select this choice to determine how the power management of the
microprocessor is controlled. You can choose either Platform Controlled
(system) or OS Controlled (operating system) to control the setting. Not all
operating systems support this feature.
- Platform Controlled Type
Select this choice to determine how to balance between performance and
power consumption. Choosing Maximum Performance will disable power
management functions and allow the most aggressive use of turbo.
Choosing Minimal Power will maximizes the use of power management
features for least power consumption and disable turbo.
– Legacy Support
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.
- Force Legacy Video on Boot
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does
not support UEFI video output standards.
- Rehook INT 19h

78 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the
boot process. The default is Disable.
- Legacy Thunk Support
Select this choice to enable or disable UEFI to interact with PCI mass
storage devices that are non-UEFI compliant.
- Infinite Boot Retry
Select this choice to enable or disable Infinitely retry the Legacy Boot order.
- BBS Boot
Select this choice to enable or disable legacy boot in BBS manner.
– System Security
Select this choice to view or configure Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
support.
– Integrated Management Module
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated
management module.
- Power Restore Policy
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.
- Commands on USB Interface Preference
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on
IMM.
- Network Configuration
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and the host name;
define the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address;
specify whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM
IP address; save the network changes; and reset the IMM.
- Reset IMM to Defaults
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.
- Reset IMM
Select this choice to reset the IMM settings.
– Recovery
Select this option to configure recovery settings.
– Storage
Select this option to see all the storage device settings.
– Network
Select this choice to view or configure the network device options, such as
iSCSI, PXE, and network devices. There might be additional configuration
choices for optional network devices that are compliant with UEFI 2.1 and
later.
– Driver Health
Select this option to view the status of the controllers in the system as
reported by their corresponding drivers.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format
(hour:minute:second).
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Start Options

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 79

Select this choice to view or change the start options, including the startup
sequence, keyboard NumLock state, PXE boot option, and PCI device boot
priority. Changes in the startup options take effect when you start the server.
The startup sequence specifies the order in which the server checks devices to
find a boot record. The server starts from the first boot record that it finds. If the
server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the
Wake on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a disc in the CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive,
and then checks a network adapter.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Boot Manager
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot
from a file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.
v System Event Logs
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the
POST event log and the system-event log. You can use the arrow keys to move
between pages in the error log.
The POST event log contains the three most recent error codes and messages
that were generated during POST.
The system-event log contains POST and system management interrupt (SMI)
events and all events that are generated by the baseboard management
controller that is embedded in the integrated management module (IMM).
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are
no other error indications, clear the system-event log. Also, after you complete a
repair or correct an error, clear the system-event log to turn off the system-error
LED on the front of the server.
– POST Event Viewer
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the POST event log.
– System Event Log
Select this choice to view the system event log.
– Clear System Event Log
Select this choice to clear the system event log.
v User Security
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” on page 81
for more information.
This choice is on the full and limited Setup utility menu.
– Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Power-on
password” on page 81 for more information.
– Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is
set, the full Setup utility menu is available only if you type the administrator
password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator
password” on page 82.
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.
v Restore Settings

80 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the previous settings.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the factory settings.
v Exit Setup
Select this choice to exit from the Setup utility. If you have not saved the
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to
save the changes or exit without saving them.

Passwords
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full
Setup utility menu only.

If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup utility menu.

An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it

limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If you set only an administrator
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup utility menu.

If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system
startup. A system administrator who types the administrator password has access
to the full Setup utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority
to set, change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on
password has access to only the limited Setup utility menu; the user can set,
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given
the user that authority.

Power-on password:
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup
will not be completed until you type the power-on password. You can use any
combination of 6 to 20 printable ASCII characters for the password.

When a power-on password is set, you can enable the Unattended Start mode, in
which the keyboard and mouse remain locked but the operating system can start.
You can unlock the keyboard and mouse by typing the power-on password.

If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of
the following ways:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
password prompt. Start the Setup utility and reset the power-on password.
v Remove the battery from the server and then reinstall it. See “Removing the
system battery” on page 332 for instructions for removing the battery.
v Clear CMOS data by using the clear CMOS jumper (see “System-board jumpers”
on page 27 for more information).
Attention: Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn
off the server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. See the
safety information that begins on page Safety. Do not change settings or move
jumpers on any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in this
document.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 81

Clearing CMOS data does not affect the administrator password.

Administrator password:
If an administrator password is set, you must type the administrator password for
access to the full Setup utility menu. You can use any combination of 6 to 20
printable ASCII characters for the password.

Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no
way to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.

Using the Boot Manager program

The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility
program that you can use to temporarily redefine the first startup device without
changing settings in the Setup utility.

To use the Boot Manager program, complete the following steps:

1. Turn off the server.
2. Restart the server.
3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a
bootable USB mass storage device is installed, a submenu item (USB Key/Disk)
is displayed.
4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot
Selection Menu and press Enter.

The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the
Setup utility.

Starting the backup server firmware

The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a
secondary copy of the server firmware that you update only during the process of
updating the server firmware. If the primary copy of the server firmware becomes
damaged, use this backup copy.

To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place
the J2 jumper in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).

Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored.
After the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the J2 jumper
back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).

82 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The UpdateXpress System Pack Installer
The UpdateXpress System Pack Installer detects supported and installed device
drivers and firmware in the server and installs available updates. For additional
information and to download the UpdateXpress System Pack Installer, go to the
ToolsCenter for System x and BladeCenter at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp and click UpdateXpress System Pack Installer.

Using the integrated management module II

The integrated management module II (IMM2) is a second generation of the
functions that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller
hardware. It combines service processor functions, video controller, and remote
presence function in a single chip.

The IMM supports the following basic systems-management features:

v Active Energy Manager.
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR).
v Automatic microprocessor disable on failure and restart in a two-microprocessor
configuration when one microprocessor signals an internal error. When one of
the microprocessors fail, the server will disable the failing microprocessor and
restart with the other microprocessor.
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating
system hangs and the operating system watchdog timer times-out. The IMM
might be configured to watch for the operating system watchdog timer and
reboot the system after a timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise, the
IMM allows the administrator to generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) by
pressing an NMI button on the light path diagnostics panel for an
operating-system memory dump. ASR is supported by IPMI.
v A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video,
remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage).
v Boot sequence manipulation.
v Command-line interface.
v Configuration save and restore.
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
disables a failing DIMM that is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the
associated system error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan
failure, power supply failure, and power backplane failure.
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support.
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs indicators to report errors that occur with fans,
power supplies, microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors.
v Local firmware code flash update
v Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) detection and reporting.
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.
v PCI configuration data.
v PECI 3 support.
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset,
schedule power control).

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 83

v Query power-supply input power.
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.
v Serial over LAN (SOL).
v Serial port redirection over telnet or ssh.
v SMI handling
v System event log (SEL) - user readable event log.

The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities
through the OSA SMBridge management utility program:
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify
the server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the
file as a script.
v Serial over LAN
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard
Telnet client application can access the SOL connection.

For more information about IMM, see the Integrated Management Module User's
Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.

Using the embedded hypervisor

The VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor software is available on the optional IBM
USB flash device with embedded hypervisor. The USB flash device can be installed
in the USB connector near PCI riser slot 1 on the system board. Hypervisor is
virtualization software that enables multiple operating systems to run on a host
system at the same time. The USB flash device is required to activate the
hypervisor functions.

84 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

To start using the embedded hypervisor functions, you must add the USB flash
device to the startup sequence in the Setup utility.

To add the USB flash device to the startup sequence, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select Boot Manager.
4. Select Add Boot Option; then, select USB Storage. Press Enter, and then select
Esc.
5. Select Change Boot Order and then select Commit Changes; then, press Enter.
6. Select Save Settings and then select Exit Setup.

If the embedded hypervisor flash device image becomes corrupt, you can use the
VMware Recovery CD that comes with the system to recover the flash device image.
To recover the flash device image, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. Insert the VMware Recovery CD into the CD or DVD drive.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 85

For additional information and instructions, see the VMware ESXi Server 31
Embedded Setup Guide a http://www.vmware.com/pdf/vi3_35/esx_3i_e/r35/
vi3_35_25_3i_setup.pdf

Using the remote presence and blue-screen capture features

The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the integrated management module (IMM). The remote presence feature provides
the following functions:
v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 75 Hz,
regardless of the system state
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are
available for use by the server
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as
a virtual drive

The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the
cause of the hang condition.

For more information on Features on Demand (FoD), including instructions for

automating the activation and installation of the activation key by using IBM
ToolsCenter or IBM Director, see the IBM System x Features on Demand User's
Guide athttps://www-304.ibm.com/systems/x/fod/index.wss under the Help
section.

Note: The server may need to be restarted to activate the feature.

Obtaining the IP address for the IMM

To access the Web interface to use the remote presence feature, you need the IP
address of the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address through the Setup utility.
The server comes with a default IP address for the IMM of 192.168.70.125. To locate
the IP address, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. (This prompt is displayed
on the screen for only a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have
set both a power-on password and an administrator password, you must type
the administrator password to access the full Setup utility menu.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.
6. Find the IP address and write it down.
7. Exit from the Setup utility.

86 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Logging on to the Web interface
To log on to the IMM Web interface, complete the following steps:
1. Open a Web browser on a computer that connects to the server and in the
Address or URL field, type the IP address or host name of the IMM to which
you want to connect.

Note: If you are logging on to the IMM for the first time after installation, the
IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM assigns a
static IP address of 192.168.70.125. The MAC address tag provides the default
hostname of the IMM and does not require you to start the server.
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the
IMM for the first time, you can obtain the user name and password from your
system administrator. All login attempts are documented in the event log.

Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write
access. You must change the default password the first time you log on.
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is
provided. The IMM will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is
inactive for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick
view of the system status.

Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program

The Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You can
use it to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize where
the network startup option appears in the startup sequence. Enable and disable the
Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program from the Setup utility.

Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller

The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an
interface for connecting to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide
full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and
reception of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support
auto-negotiation, the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the
network and automatically operate at that rate and mode.

By default the server has enabled Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2. Ethernet 3 and
Ethernet 4 can be enabled by the Features on Demand (FoD). Please note that the
server may need to be restarted to activate the feature. Meanwhile, when switching
from dedicated mode (Ethernet 2) to shared mode (Ethernet 1), followed by the
activation of Ethernet 3 and Ethernet 4 via the Features on Demand (FoD) or vice
versa, remember to first unplug and subsequently plug back the power cable or
cables to the server (power cycle). For more information on Features on Demand
(FoD), including instructions for automating the activation and installation of the
activation key by using IBM ToolsCenter or IBM Director, see the IBM System x
Features on Demand User's Guide at https://www-304.ibm.com/systems/x/fod/
index.wss under the Help section.

You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you
must install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the
controllers. For device drivers and information about configuring the Ethernet
controllers or to find updated information about configuring the controllers, see

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 87

http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.

Configuring RAID arrays

Use the configuration utility programs to configure and manage redundant array
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in
this document.

The following table lists the different server configurations and the applications
that are available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.
Table 10. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays
RAID array configuration RAID array management
(before operating system is (after operating system is
Server configuration installed) installed)
ServeRAID-H1110 adapter LSI Utility (Setup utility, MegaRAID Storage Manager
press Ctrl+C), ServerGuide, (MSM), SAS2IRCU
Human Interface (Command Line) Utility for
Infrastructure (HII) Storage Management
ServeRAID-M1115 adapter MegaRAID BIOS MegaRAID Storage Manager
Configuration Utility (press (MSM), MegaCLI (Command
Ctrl+H to start), pre-boot CLI Line Interface), and IBM
(press Ctrl+P to start), Director
ServerGuide, HII
ServeRAID-M5110, MegaRAID BIOS MegaRAID Storage Manager
ServeRAID-M5120 adapters Configuration Utility (press (MSM), MegaCLI, and IBM
Ctrl+H to start), pre-boot CLI Director
(press Ctrl+P to start),
ServerGuide, HII
ServeRAID-C105 HII MegaRAID Storage Manager
(MSM), MegaCLI, and IBM
Director

Note:
1. For more information about Problem Determination and Service Guide for
ServeRAID M controllers, see http://www-947.ibm.com/support/entry/
portal/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5085607.
2. For more information about Configuration and Options Guide (COG), see
http://www-947.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=SCOD-
3ZVQ5W&brandind=5000019.
3. For further details on creating a software RAID array of hard disk drives,
please see the ServeRAID C105 documentation at http://www-947.ibm.com/
support/entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5089068.
4. When the ServeRAID adapter is removed, software RAID will not be
supported. This system does not support downgrade software RAID function
from hardware RAID configuration.

88 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program
Use these instructions to start the LSI Configuration Utility program.

To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server, and make sure that the server is the owner of the keyboard,
video, and mouse.
2. When the prompt message is displayed, you may perform either of the
following:
a. ServeRAID-H1110: press Ctrl+C.
b. ServeRAID-M5110, ServeRAID-M5120, or ServeRAID-M1115: press
Ctrl+H.

When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.

Starting the Human Interface Infrastructure (HII) Configuration

Application
Use these instructions to start the Human Interface Infrastructure (HII)
configuration utility program.

To start the Human Interface Infrastructure (HII) configuration utility program,

complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active after the power-on LED flashes slowly.
2. When prompted, <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you are prompted to type the password.
3. Under System Settings, select Storage.

When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.

Creating RAID of hard disk drives (ServeRAID-C105 only)

Note:
1. If there is a ServeRAID adapter in slot 3, ServeRAID-C105 will not work.
2. ServeRAID-C105 uses HII only for configuration and there is no legacy
configuration utility.
To create RAID of hard disk drives (ServeRAID-C105 only), complete the following
steps:
1. Turn on the server.

Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power,

the power-control button becomes active after the power-on LED flashes
slowly.
2. When prompted, <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you are prompted to type the password.
3. Under System Settings, select Storage.
4. Under Storage, select ServeRAID C105.
5. Under Configuration Options, select Virtual Drive Management → Create
Configuration.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 89

6. Select the type of array that you want to create.
7. Select Select Drives and use space key to select all the drives for your array.
8. Select Apply Changes to create the array.
9. When the prompt Success is displayed, select OK to continue.
10. After the system auto skip to the next screen, select Save Configuration.
11. When the prompt Creating Virtual Drives will cause the data lost on
the associated Drives to be permanently deleted. is displayed, use space
key to select Yes to continue.
12. Select OK to continue.
13. To initialize virtual disk, select ServeRAID C105 → Virtual Drive Management
→ Select Virtual Drive Operations.
14. Under Virtual Drive Operation, choose Select Operation. Select the type of
initialization you want to initialize.
15. Select Start Operation.
16. Select Yes to confirm.
17. Select OK to continue.
18. When the prompt Success is displayed, select OK.

Note:
1. For further details on creating a software RAID array of hard disk drives,
please see the ServeRAID C105 documentation at http://www-947.ibm.com/
support/ entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5089068.
2. Some specific models may be shipped initially with four hard disk drives.
Configuration may be able to expand to eight hard disk drives via Features on
Demand (FoD). Please note that the server may need to be restarted to activate
the feature. For more information on Features on Demand (FoD), including
instructions for automating the activation and installation of the activation key
by using IBM ToolsCenter or IBM Systems Director, see the IBM Features on
Demand User's Guide at https://www-304.ibm.com/systems/x/fod/index.wss
under the Help section.
3. Software RAID does not support VMware 5 and VMware 4.1.
4. Software RAID does not support legacy configuration.
5. In order to install the legacy OS in the software RAID, you have to set the SCU
Controller as the first device in the option ROM execution order.

90 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

IBM Advanced Settings Utility program
The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup
utility for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to
modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the
system to access the Setup utility.

You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced
systems-management capabilities.

In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.

Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting
environments through a batch-processing mode.

For more information and to download the ASU program, go to

http://www-947.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=TOOL-ASU.

IBM Systems Director

IBM Systems Director is a platform-management foundation that streamlines the
way you manage physical and virtual systems supports multiple operating systems
and virtualization technologies in IBM and non-IBM x86 platforms.

Through a single user interface, IBM Systems Director provides consistent views
for viewing managed systems, determining how these systems relate to one other,
and identifying their statuses, helping to correlate technical resources with business
needs. A set of common tasks that are included with IBM Systems Director
provides many of the core capabilities that are required for basic management,
which means instant out-of-the-box business value. The common tasks include the
following:
v Discovery
v Inventory
v Configuration
v System health
v Monitoring
v Updates
v Event notification
v Automation for managed systems

The IBM Systems Director Web and command-line interfaces provide a consistent
interface that is focused on driving these common tasks and capabilities:
v Discovering, navigating, and visualizing systems on the network with the
detailed inventory and relationships to the other network resources
v Notifying users of problems that occur on systems and the ability to isolate the
sources of the problems
v Notifying users when systems need updates and distributing and installing
updates on a schedule
v Analyzing real-time data for systems and setting critical thresholds that notify
the administrator of emerging problems

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 91

v Configuring settings of a single system and creating a configuration plan that
can apply those settings to multiple systems
v Updating installed plug-ins to add new features and functions to the base
capabilities
v Managing the life cycles of virtual resources

For more information about IBM Systems Director, see the IBM Systems Director
Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/director/v6rlx/
indel.jsp?topic=/director_6.1/fqm0_main.html, and the Systems Management web
page at http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/, which presents an overview
of IBM Systems Management and IBM Systems Director.

Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)

The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board
is replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) to update the UUID in the
UEFI-based server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating
systems. Make sure that you download the version for your operating system. You
can download the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update
the UUID, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.
b. Click on the Downloads tab at the top of the panel.
c. Under ToolsCenter, select View ToolsCenter downloads.
d. Select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
e. Scroll down and click on the link and download the ASU version for your
operating system.
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the UUID:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool
kits are also available to build a bootable media. These tool kits provide an
alternate method to creating a Windows Professional Edition or Master
Control Program (MCP) based bootable media, which will include the ASU
application.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat

92 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]
Where:
<uuid_value>
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.
[access_method]
The access method that you selected to use from the following
methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the
default values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access
the IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --user <user_id>
--password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.

Example:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You can access
the ASU Users Guide from the IBM Web site.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 93

b. Click on the Downloads tab at the top of the panel.
c. Under ToolsCenter, select View ToolsCenter downloads.
d. Select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
e. Scroll down and click on the link and download the ASU version for
your operating system. Scroll down and look under Online Help to
download the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide.
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
--user <user_id> --password <password>

Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/
docdisplay?brand=5000008&lndocid=TOOL-CENTER. From the IBM Tools
Center page, scroll down for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.

94 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data
The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system
board is replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) to update the DMI in
the UEFI-based server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating
systems. Make sure that you download the version for your operating system. You
can download the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update
the DMI, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go tohttp://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ .
b. Click on the Downloads tab at the top of the panel.
c. Under ToolsCenter, select View ToolsCenter downloads.
d. Select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
e. Scroll down and click on the link and download the ASU version for your
operating system.
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the DMI:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)

Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site. In addition, the Windows and Linux based tool
kits are also available to build a bootable media. These tool kits provide an
alternate method to creating a Windows Professional Edition or Master
Control Program (MCP) based bootable media, which will include the ASU
application.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
– device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
– cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]
Where:
<m/t_model>
The server machine type and model number. Type mtm xxxxyyy, where
xxxx is the machine type and yyy is the server model number.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 95

<s/n> The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz, where zzzzzzz is the
serial number.
<asset_method>
The server asset tag number. Type asset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset tag number.
[access_method]
The access method that you select to use from the following methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).

Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the
default values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access
the IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --user <imm_user_id>
--password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
You can download the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the
Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide, complete the following steps.

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a. Go tohttp://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ .

96 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

b. Click on the Downloads tab at the top of the panel.
c. Under ToolsCenter, select View ToolsCenter downloads.
d. Select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
e. Scroll down and click on the link and download the ASU version for
your operating system. Scroll down and look under Online Help to
download the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Remote LAN access, type the command:

Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:

Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip> --user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>

Examples that do use the userid and password default values:

asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the ToolsCenter Web site athttp://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/
docdisplay?brand=5000008&lndocid=TOOL-CENTER. From the IBM
ToolsCenter page, scroll down for the available tools
5. Restart the server.

Chapter 3. Configuration information and instructions 97

98 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools and troubleshooting information that
are available to help you solve problems that might occur in the server.

If you cannot diagnose and correct a problem by using the information in this
chapter, see “Start here” and “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 367
for more information.

Start here
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures in this documentation and on the World Wide Web.

This Problem Determination and Service Guide describes the diagnostic tests that you
can perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and
error codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and
software also contains troubleshooting information.

Diagnosing a problem
Before you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider, follow these
procedures in the order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with
your server.
1. Return the server to the condition it was in before the problem occurred. If
any hardware, software, or firmware was changed before the problem occurred,
if possible, reverse those changes. This might include any of the following
items:
v Hardware components
v Device drivers and firmware
v System software
v UEFI firmware
v System input power or network connections
2. View the light path diagnostics LEDs and event logs. The server is designed
for ease of diagnosis of hardware and software problems.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs: See “Light path diagnostics” on page 106 for
information about using light path diagnostics LEDs.
v Event logs: See “Event logs” on page 115 for information about notification
events and diagnosis.
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for the
software or operating system for information about a specific error code. See
the manufacturer's website for documentation.
3. Run IBM Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) and collect system data. Run
Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to collect information about the hardware,
firmware, software, and operating system. Have this information available
when you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider. For
instructions for running DSA, see the Dynamic System Analysis Installation and
User's Guide.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 99

To download the latest version of DSA code and the Dynamic System Analysis
Installation and User's Guide, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/
docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA .
4. Check for and apply code updates. Fixes or workarounds for many problems
might be available in updated UEFI firmware, device firmware, or device
drivers.

Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated

code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest
level of code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
a. Install UpdateXpress system updates. You can install code updates that are
packaged as an UpdateXpress System Pack or UpdateXpress CD image. An
UpdateXpress System Pack contains an integration-tested bundle of online
firmware and device-driver updates for your server. In addition, you can
use IBM ToolsCenter Bootable Media Creator to create bootable media that
is suitable for applying firmware updates and running preboot diagnostics.
For more information about UpdateXpress System Packs, see
http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-
XPRESS and “Updating the firmware” on page 71. For more information
about the Bootable Media Creator, see http://www.ibm.com/support/
entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=TOOL-BOMC .
Be sure to separately install any listed critical updates that have release
dates that are later than the release date of the UpdateXpress System Pack or
UpdateXpress image (see step 4b).
b. Install manual system updates.
1) Determine the existing code levels.
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click
Software to view operating-system levels.
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.
To display a list of available updates for the blade server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/ .
When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including
a list of the problems that the update fixes. Review this list for your
specific problem; however, even if your problem is not listed, installing
the update might solve the problem.
5. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration. If the server is incorrectly
configured, a system function can fail to work when you enable it; if you make
an incorrect change to the server configuration, a system function that has been
enabled can stop working.
a. Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported. See
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/
to verify that the server supports the installed operating system, optional
devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is not
supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem. You
must remove nonsupported hardware before you contact IBM or an
approved warranty service provider for support.
b. Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are installed
and configured correctly. Many configuration problems are caused by loose
power or signal cables or incorrectly seated adapters. You might be able to
solve the problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables, reseating
adapters, and turning the server back on. For information about performing
the checkout procedure, see “Checkout procedure” on page 102. For

100 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

information about configuring the server, see Chapter 3, “Configuration
information and instructions,” on page 71.
6. See controller and management software documentation. If the problem is
associated with a specific function (for example, if a RAID hard disk drive is
marked offline in the RAID array), see the documentation for the associated
controller and management or controlling software to verify that the controller
is correctly configured.
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as RAID
and network adapters.
For problems with operating systems or IBM software or devices, go to
http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ .
7. Check for troubleshooting procedures and RETAIN tips. Troubleshooting
procedures and RETAIN tips document known problems and suggested
solutions. To search for troubleshooting procedures and RETAIN tips, go to
http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ .
8. Use the troubleshooting tables. See “Troubleshooting by symptom” on page
241 to find a solution to a problem that has identifiable symptoms.
A single problem might cause multiple symptoms. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure for the most obvious symptom. If that procedure does not diagnose
the problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible.
If the problem remains, contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider
for assistance with additional problem determination and possible hardware
replacement. To open an online service request, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/entry/portal/Open_service_request/ . Be prepared to provide
information about any error codes and collected data.

Undocumented problems
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the
problem might not have been previously identified by IBM. After you have
verified that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and software configurations
are valid, and no light path diagnostics LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware
component failure, contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider for
assistance.

To open an online service request, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/

portal/Open_service_request/ . Be prepared to provide information about any
error codes and collected data and the problem determination procedures that you
have used.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 101

Service bulletins
IBM updates the support web site with the latest tips and techniques that you can
use to solve many problems.

To find service bulletins that are available for the IBM System x3530 M4 server, go
to http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ and search for 7160 and retain.

Checkout procedure
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to
diagnose a problem in the server.

About the checkout procedure

Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page Safety.
v IBM Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) provides the primary methods of testing
the major components of the server, such as the system board, Ethernet
controller, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard disk drives.
You can also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether
a problem is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is working correctly.
v When you run DSA, a single problem might cause more than one error message.
When this happens, correct the cause of the first error message. The other error
messages usually will not occur the next time you run DSA.

Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a

microprocessor error, the error might be in the microprocessor or in the
microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 250 for
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v Before you run diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing
server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing
external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you can run all diagnostic
programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The
failing server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers
sharing external storage devices).
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at
least one of the attached storage units is also attached to another server or
unidentifiable device.
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.

Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test
at a time. Do not run any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests,
because this might enable the hard disk drive diagnostic tests.
v If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see “POST error
codes” on page 122. If the server is halted and no error message is displayed,
see “Troubleshooting by symptom” on page 241 and “Solving undetermined
problems” on page 259.
v For information about power-supply problems, see “Solving power problems”
on page 258 and “Power-supply LEDs” on page 114.

102 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v For intermittent problems, check the event log; see “Event logs” on page 115 and
“DSA messages” on page 193.

Performing the checkout procedure

To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
1. Is the server part of a cluster?
v No: Go to step 2.
v Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step 2.
2. Complete the following steps:
a. Check the power supply LEDs (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 114).
b. Turn off the server and all external devices.
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
d. Check all cables and power cords.
e. Set all display controls to the middle positions.
f. Turn on all external devices.
g. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see “Troubleshooting by
symptom” on page 241.
h. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel. If it is
flashing, check the light path diagnostics LEDs (see “Light path diagnostics”
on page 106).

Note: When you slide the light path diagnostics panel out of the server to
check the LEDs or checkpoint codes, do not run the server continuously
with light path diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should
only be outside of the server a short time. The light path diagnostics panel
must remain in the server when the server is running to ensure proper
cooling.
i. Check for the following results:
v Successful completion of POST (see “POST” on page 118 for more
information)
v Successful completion of startup, which is indicated by a readable display
of the operating-system desktop
3. Is there a readable image on the monitor screen?
v No: Find the failure symptom in “Troubleshooting by symptom” on page
241; if necessary, see “Solving undetermined problems” on page 259.
v Yes: Run DSA (see “Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs” on page
120).
– If DSA reports an error, follow the instructions in “DSA messages” on
page 193.
– If DSA does not report an error but you still suspect a problem, see
“Solving undetermined problems” on page 259.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 103

Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v Light path diagnostics
Use light path diagnostics to diagnose system errors quickly. See “Light path
diagnostics” on page 106 for more information.
v Event logs
The event logs list the error codes and messages that are generated when an
error is detected for the subsystems IMM2, POST, DSA, and the server
baseboard management controller. See “Event logs” on page 115 for more
information.
v Integrated Management Module (IMM)
The Integrated Management Module (IMM) combines service processor
functions, video controller, and remote presence and blue-screen capture features
in a single chip. The IMM provides advanced service-processor control,
monitoring, and alerting function. If an environmental condition exceeds a
threshold or if a system component fails, the IMM lights LEDs to help you
diagnose the problem, records the error in the IMM event log, and alerts you to
the problem. Optionally, the IMM also provides a virtual presence capability for
remote server management capabilities. The IMM provides remote server
management through the following industry-standard interfaces:
– Intelligent Platform Management Protocol (IPMI) version 2.0
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3
– Common Information Model (CIM)
– Web browser
For more information about the Integrated Management Module (IMM), see
“Using the integrated management module II” on page 83, Integrated
management module II (IMM2) error messages, and the Integrated Management
Module User's Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.
v IBM Dynamic System Analysis
Two editions of IBM Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) are available for
diagnosing problems, DSA Portable and DSA Preboot:
– DSA Portable
DSA Portable collect and analyze system information to aid in diagnosing
server problems. DSA Portable runs on the server's operating system and
collect the following information about the server:
- Drive health information
- Event logs for ServeRAID controllers and service processors
- Installed hardware, including PCI and USB information
- Installed applications and hot fixes
- Kernel modules
- Light path diagnostics status
- Microprocessor, input/out hub, and UEFI error logs
- Network interfaces and settings
- RAID controller configuration
- Service processor (integrated management module) status and
configuration

104 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

- System configuration
- Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration
DSA Portable create a DSA log, which is a chronologically ordered merge of
the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the integrated management
module (IMM) chassis-event log (as the ASM event log), and the
operating-system event logs. You can send the DSA log as a file to IBM
service (when requested by service) or view the information as a text file or
HTML file.

Note: Use the latest available version of DSA to make sure you are using the
most recent configuration data. For documentation and download information
for DSA, see http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/.
For additional information, see “IBM Dynamic System Analysis” on page 118
and “DSA messages” on page 193.
– DSA Preboot
DSA Preboot diagnostic program is stored in the integrated USB memory on
the server. DSA Preboot collects and analyzes system information to aid in
diagnosing server problems, as well as offering a rich set of diagnostic tests of
the major components of the server. DSA Preboot collects the following
information about the server:
- Drive health information
- Event logs for ServeRAID controllers and service processors
- Installed hardware, including PCI and USB information
- Light path diagnostics status
- Microprocessor, input/out hub, and UEFI error logs
- Network interfaces and settings
- RAID controller configuration
- Service processor (integrated management module) status and
configuration
- System configuration
- Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration
DSA Preboot also provides diagnostics for the following system components
(when they are installed):
1. Network adapter
2. IMM 12C bus
3. Lightpath diagnostics panel
4. Memory modules
5. Microprocessors
6. Optical devices (CD or DVD)
7. SAS or SATA drives
8. Tape drives (SCSI)
See “Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs” on page 120 for more
information on running the DSA Preboot program on the server.
v Troubleshooting by symptom
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
“Troubleshooting by symptom” on page 241 for more information.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 105

Light path diagnostics
Light path diagnostics is a system of LEDs on various external and internal
components of the server. When an error occurs, LEDs are lit throughout the
server. By viewing the LEDs in a particular order, you can often identify the source
of the error.

When LEDs are lit to indicate an error, they remain lit when the server is turned
off, provided that the server is still connected to power and the power supply is
operating correctly and the top cover is closed and latched correctly.

Before you work inside the server to view light path diagnostics LEDs, read the
safety information that begins on page “Safety” on page vii and “Handling
static-sensitive devices” on page 32.

If an error occurs, view the light path diagnostics LEDs in the following order:
1. Look at the operator information panel on the front of the server.
v If the Log LED is lit, it indicates that information about a suboptimal
condition in the server is available in the IMM system-event log or in the
system-event log.
v If the system-error LED is lit, it indicates that an error has occurred; go to
step 2.
The following illustration shows the operator information panel:

2. To view the advanced operator information panel, press the blue latch on the
right of the operator panel. Lit LEDs on this panel indicate the type of error
that has occurred.

106 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Look at the system service label inside the server cover, which gives an
overview of internal components that correspond to the LEDs on the light path
diagnostics panel. This information and the information in “Light path
diagnostics LEDs” on page 109 can often provide enough information to
diagnose the error.
3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain
components inside the server have LEDs that are lit to indicate the location of a
problem.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.

Light path diagnostics panel

The light path diagnostics panel is available on the top of the advanced operator
information panel. For additional information about the light path diagnostics and
LEDs on the light path diagnostics panel, see “Light path diagnostics” on page 106
and “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 109.

The following illustration shows the optional advanced light path diagnostics
panel.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 107

To access the optional advanced light path diagnostics panel, push the blue release
button on the advanced operator information panel. Pull forward on the unit until
the hinge of the operator panel is free of the server chassis. Then pull down on the
unit, so that you can view the light path diagnostics panel information.

Note: When you slide the optional advanced light path diagnostics panel out of
the server to check the LEDs, do not run the server continuously with light path
diagnostics panel outside of the server. The panel should only be outside of the
server a short time. The optional advanced light path diagnostics panel must
remain in the server when the server is running to ensure proper cooling.

The following illustration shows the LEDs and controls on the light path
diagnostics panel.

v Remind button: This button places the system-error/Check Log LED on the
front panel into Remind mode. In Remind mode, the system-error LED flashes
once every 2 seconds until the problem is corrected, the server is restarted, or a
new problem occurs.

108 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

By placing the system-error LED indicator in Remind mode, you acknowledge
that you are aware of the last failure but will not take immediate action to
correct the problem.
v Reset button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on self-test
(POST). You might have to use a pen or the end of a straightened paper clip to
press the button.

Light path diagnostics LEDs

The following table describes the LEDs on the light path diagnostics panel and
suggested actions to correct the detected problems. For additional information, see
“Server controls, LEDs, and power” on page 14 and the “System-board LEDs” on
page 28 for the location of the system board LEDs.

Note: Check the IMM system-event log or system event log for additional
information before replacing a FRU.
Table 11. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained technician only)," that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
LED Description Action
None, but the An error has occurred and cannot 1. Check the IMM2 system even log and the system-error
Check Log LED be isolated. The error is not log for information about the error.
is lit. represented by a path.
2. Save the log if necessary and clear the log afterwards.
System Error An error occurred. 1. Check the light path LEDs and follow the listed
LED instruction.
2. Check the IMM2 system even log and the system-error
log for information about the error.
3. Save the log if necessary and clear the log afterwards.
OVER SPEC The power supplies are using
more power than their maximum If the OVER SPEC LED is lit, use one of the following
rating. The system is drawing procedures:
power incoherent to power 1. Turn off the server, disconnect the power from the server.
supply specified ratings. 2. Remove the optical drive, fans, hard disk drives, and hard
disk drive backplanes.
3. Restart the server to see whether the problem remains.
4. Reinstall each device that was removed in step 2 one at a
time, starting the server each time, to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace any failing device.
6. (Trained technician only) Replace the system board.
LINK Reserved.
PS A power supply is not detected 1. Check the power-supply in the server that has an lit
or has failed. yellow LED (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 114).
2. Make sure that the power supplies are seated correctly.
3. Remove one of the power supplies to isolate the failed
power supply.
4. Replace the failed power supply.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 109

Table 11. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained technician only)," that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
LED Description Action
PCI An error has occurred on a PCI 1. Check the system-event log for information about the
card, a PCI bus or on the system error.
board. An additional LED is lit
2. Check the LEDs on the PCI riser cards to identify the
on one of the riser cards.
component that caused the error.
3. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter by using the
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,
remove one adapter at a time from the failing PCI bus;
and restart the server after each adapter is removed.
4. Replace the following components, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
v PCI riser card
v (Trained technician only) Replace the system board.
FAN A fan has failed, is operating too 1. Check the LEDs on the server.
slowly, or has been removed. The
2. Reseat the failing fan, which is indicated by a lit LED on
TEMP LED might also be lit.
the fan.
3. Replace the failing fan.
TEMP The system temperature has 1. Make sure that the air vents are not blocked.
exceeded a threshold level. A
2. Determine whether a fan has failed. If it has, replace it.
failing fan can cause the TEMP
LED to be lit. 3. Make sure that the heat sink is seated correctly.
4. Make sure that the room temperature is not too high. See
“Server features and specifications” on page 6 and
“System reliability guidelines” on page 32 for the server
temperature information.
MEM An invalid memory configuration Note: Each time you install or remove a DIMM, you must
(both the MEM LED and disconnect the server from the power source; then, wait 10
CONFIG LED might be lit) or a seconds before restarting the server.
memory error has occurred . 1. If the MEM LED and the CONFIG LED are lit, the system
issues an invalid memory configuration error. Complete
the following steps to correct the problem:
a. Check the system-event log in the Setup utility or
IMM error messages. Follow steps indicated in “POST
error codes” on page 122 and Integrated management
module II (IMM2) error messages.
2. If the CONFIG LED is not lit, the system has detected a
memory error. Complete the following steps to correct the
problem:
a. Update the firmware to the latest level (see “Updating
the firmware” on page 71).
b. Reseat or swap the DIMMs.
c. Check the system-event log in the Setup utility or
IMM error messages. Follow steps indicated in “POST
error codes” on page 122 and Integrated management
module II (IMM2) error messages.
NMI A nonmaskable interrupt has Check the system-event log for information about the error.
occurred, or the NMI button was
pressed.

110 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 11. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained technician only)," that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
LED Description Action
CONFIG A hardware configuration error 1. If the CONFIG LED and the CPU LED are lit, complete
has occurred. the following steps to correct the problem:
a. Check the microprocessors that were just installed to
make sure that they are compatible with each other
(see “Replacing a microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349 for additional information about
microprocessor requirements).
b. (Trained technician only) Replace the incompatible
microprocessor.
c. Check the system-event logs for information about the
error. Replace any components that are identified in
the error log.
2. If the CONFIG LED and the MEM LED are both lit,
complete the following steps:
a. Make sure that the DIMM configuration is supported
(see “Installing a memory module” on page 34 for
DIMM requirements and installation sequence
information).
b. Replace the DIMMs with a supported configuration.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 111

Table 11. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained technician only)," that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
LED Description Action
CPU An invalid microprocessor 1. If the CONFIG LED is lit, the system issues an invalid
configuration or a microprocessor microprocessor configuration error. Complete the
has failed (both the CPU LED following steps to correct the problem:
and the CONFIG LED might be
a. Check the microprocessors that were just installed to
lit).
make sure that they are compatible with each other
(see “Replacing a microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349 for additional information about
microprocessor requirements) and use the Setup utility
and select System Information → System Summary →
Processor to verify the microprocessors information.
b. (Trained technician only) Replace the incompatible
microprocessor.
c. Check the system-event logs for information about the
error. Replace any components that are identified in
the error log.
2. If the CPU LED is lit and the CONFIG LED is not lit,
complete the following steps:
a. (Trained technician only) Make sure that the failing
microprocessor, which is indicated by a lit LED on the
system board, is installed correctly. See “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on page 349 for
information about installation and requirements.
When only the CPU LED is lit, a If the CONFIG LED is not lit, a microprocessor failure occurs,
microprocessor has failed. complete the following steps to correct the problem:
1. (Trained technician only) Make sure that the failing
microprocessor and its heat sink, which are indicated by a
lit LED on the system board, are installed correctly. See
“Replacing a microprocessor and heat sink” on page 349
for information about installation and requirements.
2. (Trained technician only) Replace the failing
microprocessor (see “Removing a microprocessor and heat
sink” on page 347 and “Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
3. For more information, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

112 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 11. Light path diagnostics panel LEDs (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If a action step is preceded by "(Trained technician only)," that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
LED Description Action
HDD A hard disk drive has failed or is 1. Check the LEDs on the hard disk drives for the drive
missing. with a lit status LED and reseat the hard disk drive.
2. Make sure that the cables are correctly connected to the
hard disk drive backplane.
3. For more information, see “Hard disk drive problems” on
page 244.
4. If the error remains, replace the following components in
the order listed, restarting the server after each:
a. Replace the hard disk drive.
b. Replace the hard disk drive backplane.
5. If the error remains, replace the following components
one at a time, in the order listed, restarting the server
after each:
a. Replace the hard disk drive.
b. Replace the hard disk drive backplane.
6. If the problem remains, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
BOARD An error has occurred on the 1. Check the LEDs on the server.
system board.
2. Check the LEDs on the system board to identify the
component that caused the error. The BOARD LED can be
lit due to any of the following reasons:
v Battery
v Missing PCI riser-card assembly
v Failed firmware update
v Failed system board
3. Check the system-event log for information about the
error.
4. Replace any failed or missing replacement components,
such as the battery or PCI riser-card assembly.
5. (Trained technician only) replace the server system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 113

Power-supply LEDs
The following minimum configuration is required for the DC LED on the power
supply to be lit:
v Power supply
v Power cord

The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:

v One microprocessor in microprocessor socket 1
v One 2 GB DIMM (per microprocessor) on the system board
v One power supply
v Power cord
v Four cooling fans

The following illustrations show the locations of the power-supply LEDs for fixed
and redundant models respectively.

The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the power-on LED on the operator
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.

Power-supply LEDs
AC DC Error Description Action Notes
On On Off Normal operation
Off Off Off No ac power to the 1. Check the ac power to the This is a normal
server or a problem server. condition when no ac
with the ac power power is present.
2. Make sure that the power
source.
cord is connected to a
functioning power source.
3. Restart the server. If the error
remains, check the
power-supply LEDs.
4. Replace the power-supply.

114 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Power-supply LEDs
AC DC Error Description Action Notes
Off Off On No ac power to the v Make sure that the power This happens only
server or a problem cord is connected to a when a second power
with the ac power functioning power source. supply is providing
source and the power to the server.
v Replace the power supply.
power-supply had
detected an
internal problem.
Off On Off Faulty Replace the power supply.
power-supply
Off On On Faulty Replace the power supply.
power-supply
On Off Off Power-supply not 1. Make sure that the top cover Typically indicates a
fully seated, faulty is closed and latched power-supply is not
system board, or correctly. fully seated.
faulty
2. Reseat the power supply.
power-supply
3. Replace the failing power
supply.
On Off On Faulty power Replace the power supply.
-supply
On On On Power-supply is Replace the power supply.
faulty

Event logs
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs.
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the contents of the
POST event log from the Setup utility (see “Starting the Setup utility” on page
76). For more information about POST error codes, see “POST error codes” on
page 122.
v System-event log: This log contains POST and system management interrupt
(SMI) events and all events that are generated by the baseboard management
controller that is embedded in the integrated management module (IMM). You
can view the contents of the system-event log through the Setup utility and
through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as IPMI event log).
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically clear the
system-event log through the Setup utility. When you are troubleshooting an
error, you might have to save and then clear the system-event log to make the
most recent events available for analysis. For more information about the
system-event log, see Integrated management module II (IMM2) error messages.
Messages are listed on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected
message are displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry
to the next, use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.
Some IMM sensors cause assertion events to be logged when their setpoints are
reached. When a setpoint condition no longer exists, a corresponding deassertion
event is logged. However, not all events are assertion-type events.
v Integrated management module (IMM2) event log: This log contains a filtered
subset of all IMM, POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You
can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web interface. For more

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 115

information, see “Logging on to the Web interface” on page 87. You can also
view the IMM event log through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program
(as the ASM event log). For more information about IMM error messages, see
Integrated management module II (IMM2) error messages.
v DSA event log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA)
program, and it is a chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as
the IPMI event log), the IMM chassis-event log (as the ASM event log), and the
operating-system event logs. You can view the DSA event log through the DSA
program (see “Viewing event logs without restarting the server”). For more
information about DSA and DSA messages, see “DSA messages” on page 193
and “IBM Dynamic System Analysis” on page 118.

For more information about viewing the logs or clearing the logs, see “Viewing
event logs through the Setup utility,” “Viewing event logs without restarting the
server,” and “Clearing the error logs” on page 118.

Viewing event logs through the Setup utility

To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the event logs.
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.
v To view the system-event log, select System Event Log.

Viewing event logs without restarting the server

If the server is not hung and the IMM is connected to a network, methods are
available for you to view one or more event logs without having to restart the
server.

If you have installed Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Portable, you can use it to
view the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), or the IMM event log (as the
ASM event log), the operating-system event logs, or the merged DSA log. You can
also use DSA Preboot to view these logs, although you must restart the server to
use DSA Preboot. The server comes with DSA Preboot stored in integrated USB
memory. To install DSA Portable or check for and download a later version of DSA
Preboot CD image, go to http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA&brandind=5000008.

If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of
IPMItool. For an overview of IPMI, go to http://www.ibm.com/developerwork/
linux/blueprints/ and click Using Intelligent Platform Management Interface
(IPMI) on IBM Linux platforms.

You can view the IMM event log through the Event Log link in the integrated
management module (IMM) Web interface. For more information, see “Logging on
to the Web interface” on page 87.

The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,
depending on the condition of the server. The first three conditions generally do
not require that you restart the server.

116 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 12. Methods for viewing event logs
Condition Action
The server is not hung and is connected to a
network (using an operating system Use any of the following methods:
controlled network ports). v Run DSA Portable to view the diagnostic
event log (requires IPMI driver) or create
an output file that you can send to IBM
service and support (using ftp or local
copy).
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log
(requires IPMI driver).
v Use the Web browser interface to the IMM
to view the system-event log locally
(requires RNDIS USB LAN driver).
The server is not hung and is not connected
to a network (using an operating system Use any of the following methods:
controlled network ports). v Run Portable DSA to view the diagnostic
event log (requires IPMI driver) or create
an output file that you can send to IBM
service and support (using a local copy).
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log
(requires IPMI driver).
v Use the Web browser interface to the IMM
to view the system-event log locally
(requires RNDIS USB LAN driver). For
more information, see “Obtaining the IP
address for the IMM” on page 86 and
“Logging on to the Web interface” on
page 87.
The integrated management module (IMM)
is connected to a network and AC power is Use any of the following methods:
applied - the server state might be hung, not v Use IPMItool over the network to the
hung, or powered off. IMM external IP address to view the
system-event log.
v Use the Web browser interface to the IMM
to view the system-event log. In the Web
browser, type the IP address for the IMM
and go to the Event Log page. For more
information, see “Obtaining the IP address
for the IMM” on page 86 and “Logging
on to the Web interface” on page 87.
The server is hung and no communication
can be made with the IMM. Restart the server and press F2 to start DSA
Preboot and view the diagnostic event log
(see “Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic
programs” on page 120 for more
information).

Alternatively, you can restart the server and

press F1 to start the Setup utility and view
the POST event log or system-event log. For
more information, see “Viewing event logs
through the Setup utility” on page 116.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 117

Clearing the error logs
To clear the event logs, complete the following steps.

Note: The POST event log is automatically cleared each time the server is
restarted.
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the event logs.
3. Use one of the following procedures:
v To clear the IMM system-event log, select System Event Logs --> System
Event Log. Select Clear System Event Log; then, press Enter twice.

POST
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.

Note: This server does not use beep codes for server status.

If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter (when
you are prompted), for POST to run.

If POST detects a problem an error message is displayed. See “POST error codes”
on page 122 for more information.

If POST detects a problem, an error message is sent to the POST event log, see
“Event logs” on page 115 for more information.

IBM Dynamic System Analysis

IBM Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) collects and analyzes system information to
aid in diagnosing server problems. DSA collects the following information about
the server:
v Drive health information
v Event logs for ServeRAID controllers and service processors
v Hardware inventory, including PCI and USB information
v Installed applications and hot fixes (available in DSA Portable only)
v Kernel modules (available in DSA Portable only)
v Light path diagnostics status
v Network interfaces and settings
v Performance data and details about processes that are running
v RAID and controller configuration
v Service processor (integrated management module) status and configuration
v System configuration
v Vital product data and firmware information

For system-specific information about the action that you should take as a result of
a message that DSA generates, see “Diagnostic text messages” on page 120.

If you cannot find a problem by using DSA, see “Solving undetermined problems”
on page 259 for information about testing the server.

118 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Note:
1. In a multi-node environment, each server has a unique DSA interface. You can
view server-specific information, such as event logs, from these unique DSA
interfaces.
2. DSA Preboot might appear to be unresponsive when you start the program.
This is normal operation while the program loads.

Make sure that the server has the latest version of the DSA code. To obtain DSA
code and the Dynamic System Analysis Installation and User's Guide, go to
http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-DSA.

DSA editions
Two editions of Dynamic System Analysis are available:
v DSA Portable
DSA Portable Edition runs within the operating system; you do not have to
restart the server to run it. It is packaged as a self-extracting file that you
download from the Web. When you run the file, it self-extracts to a temporary
folder and performs comprehensive collection of hardware and operating-system
information. After it runs, it automatically deletes the temporary files and folder
and leaves the results of the data collection and diagnostics on the server.
If you are able to start the server, use DSA Portable.
v DSA Preboot
DSA Preboot runs outside of the operating system; you must restart the server to
run it. It is provided in the flash memory on the server, or you can create a
bootable media such as a CD, DVD, ISO, USB, or PXE using the IBM
ToolsCenter Bootable Media Creator (BoMC). For more details, see the BoMC
User Guide at http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/
docdisplay?lndocid=TOOL-BOMC . In addition to the capabilities of the other
editions of DSA, DSA Preboot includes diagnostic routines that would be
disruptive to run within the operating-system environment (such as resetting
devices and causing loss of network connectivity). It has a graphical user
interface that you can use to specify which diagnostics to run and to view the
diagnostic and data collection results.
DSA Preboot provides diagnostics for the following system components, if they
are installed:
– Broadcom network adapter
– Optical devices (CD or DVD)
– Tape drives (SCSI, SAS, or SATA)
– Memory
– Microprocessor
– Checkpoint panel
– I2C bus
– SAS and SATA drives
If you are unable to restart the server or if you need comprehensive diagnostics,
use DSA Preboot.
The IBM System x3530 M4 server comes with DSA Preboot diagnostics code on
the integrated USB flash memory. Utilities are available to reset and update the
diagnostics code on the integrated USB flash device, if the diagnostic partition
becomes damaged and does not start the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs. For
more information and to download the utilities, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA .
Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 119
Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs
Note: The DSA memory test might take up to 30 minutes to run. If the problem is
not a memory problem, skip the memory test.

To run the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs that is stored in integrated flash
memory on the server, complete the following steps:
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.
3. When the prompt <F2> Diagnostics is displayed, press F2.

Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive

for an unusual length of time when you start the program. This is normal
operation while the program loads.
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic
program.

Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment,
you must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic
environment again.
5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the
DSA interactive menu.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.

If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and
try running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains,
replace the component that was being tested when the server stopped.

Diagnostic text messages

Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic
text message contains one of the following results:

Passed: The test was completed without any errors.

Failed: The test detected an error.

Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration

Additional information concerning test failures is available in the extended

diagnostic results for each test.

120 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Viewing the test log results
To view the test log for the results when the tests are completed, click the Success
link in the Status column, if you are running the DSA graphical user interface, or
type :x to exit the Execute Tests menu, if you are running the DSA interactive
menu, or select Diagnostic Event Log in the graphical user interface. To transfer
DSA Preboot collections to an external USB device, type the copy command in the
DSA interactive menu.
v If you are running the DSA graphical user interface (GUI), click the Success link
in the Status column.
v If you are running the DSA interactive menu (CLI), type :x to exit the Execute
Tests menu; then, select the completed tests to view the results.

Call home (automated service request)

IBM provide tools that can automatically collect and send data or call IBM service
when an error is detected. These tools can help IBM service speed up the process
of diagnosing problems. The following sections provide information about the call
home tools.

Service advisor
The server comes with the Service Advisor feature that can collect data about the
system when the system detects a fault and sends that data to IBM Service for
problem determination. It also includes the call home feature that automatically
calls IBM Service when a problem occurs. The Service Advisor feature is integrated
into the Integrated Management Module (IMM). You will need to setup and
configure the Service Advisor feature before you can use it. For more information
about how to setup and configure the Service Advisor feature, see the Integrated
Management Module User's Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.

IBM Electronic Service Agent

IBM Electronic Service Agent is a software tool that monitors the server for
hardware error events and automatically submits electronic service requests to IBM
service. It also can collect and transmit system configuration information on a
scheduled basis so that the information is available to you and your support
representative. It uses minimal system resources, and can be downloaded from the
IBM Web site. For more information and to download IBM Electronic Service
Agent, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/Open_service_request/
http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 121

Error messages
The following sections lists the error codes and messages for POST, IMM2, UEFI,
and DSA that are generated when a problem is detected.

POST error codes

The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or
informational.
v Severe = S
v Warning = W
v Informational = I

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
I.11002 [I.11002] A processor mismatch One or More Mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
has been detected between one Processors Detected. is on the ServerProven website at
or more processors in the http://www.ibm.com/systems/
system. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

122 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.11004 [W.11004] A processor within Processor Self Test Failure 1. Check the IBM support website
the system has failed the BIST. Detected. for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
2. (Trained technician only) If there
are more than one microprocessor
installed, swap the
microprocessors. If the problem
follows the affected
microprocessor or there is only
one microprocessor installed,
replace the affected
microprocessor (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349).
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
S.1100C [S.1100C] An uncorrectable Uncorrectable microprocessor 1. Check the IBM support website
error has been detected on error detected. for an applicable retain tip or
processor %. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Restart the server.
3. Contact your IBM service
representative for support.
(% = microprocessor number)
I.18005 [I.18005] A discrepancy has Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
been detected in the number of number of cores. is on the ServerProven website at
cores reported by one or more http://www.ibm.com/systems/
processor packages within the info/x86servers/serverproven/
system. compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 123

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
I.18006 [I.18006] A mismatch between Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
the maximum allowed QPI link QPI Speed. is on the ServerProven website at
speed has been detected for one http://www.ibm.com/systems/
or more processor packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.18007 [I.18007] A power segment Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for Power Segments. is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.18008 [I.18008] Currently, there is no Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
additional information for this Internal DDR3 Frequency. is on the ServerProven website at
event. http://www.ibm.com/systems/
info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

124 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
I.18009 [I.18009] A core speed Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for Core Speed. is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.1800A [I.1800A] A mismatch has been Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
detected between the speed at Bus Speed. is on the ServerProven website at
which a QPI link has trained http://www.ibm.com/systems/
between two or more processor info/x86servers/serverproven/
packages. compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.1800B [I.1800B] A cache size mismatch Processors have one or more 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
has been detected for one or cache levels with mismatched is on the ServerProven website at
more processor packages. size. http://www.ibm.com/systems/
info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 125

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
I.1800C [I.1800C] A cache type Processors have one or more 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for cache levels with mismatched is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor type. http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.1800D [I.1800D] A cache associativity Processors have one or more 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for cache levels with mismatched is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor associativity. http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.1800E [I.1800E] A processor model Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for Model Number. is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

126 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
I.1800F [I.1800F] A processor family Processors have mismatched 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for Family. is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
I.18010 [I.18010] A processor stepping Processors of the same model 1. Make sure that the microprocessor
mismatch has been detected for have mismatched Stepping ID. is on the ServerProven website at
one or more processor http://www.ibm.com/systems/
packages. info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/ .
2. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this problem.
3. (Trained technician only) Remove
and replace the affected
microprocessor (error LED is lit)
with a supported type (see
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 127

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.50001 [W.50001] A DIMM has been DIMM Disabled. Note: Each time you install or
disabled due to an error remove a DIMM, you must
detected during POST. disconnect the server from the power
source; then, wait 10 seconds before
restarting the server.
1. Make sure the DIMM is installed
correctly (see “Installing a
memory module” on page 34).
2. If the DIMM was disabled
because of a memory fault, follow
the suggested actions for that
error event.
3. If no memory fault is recorded in
the logs and no DIMM connector
error LED is lit, you can re-enable
the DIMM through the Setup
utility or the Advanced Settings
Utility (ASU).
S.51003 [S.51003] An uncorrectable Fatal Memory Error Occurred. 1. Check the IBM support website
memory error was detected in for an applicable retain tip or
DIMM slot % on rank %. firmware update that applies to
this problem.
[S.51003] An uncorrectable
memory error was detected on 2. If the problem remains, replace
processor % channel %. The the affected DIMMs.
failing DIMM within the 3. (Trained technician only) If the
channel could not be problem occurs on the same
determined. DIMM connector, check the
DIMM connector. If the connector
[S.51003] An uncorrectable contains any foreign material or is
memory error has been damaged, replace the system
detected during POST. board.
4. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the
system board.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

128 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
S.51006 [S.51006] A memory mismatch One or More Mismatched Note: Each time you install or
has been detected. Please verify DIMMs Detected. remove a DIMM, you must
that the memory configuration disconnect the server from the power
is valid. source; then, wait 10 seconds before
restarting the server.Make sure that
the DIMMs match and are installed
in the correct sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on
page 34).
S.51009 [S.51009] No system memory No Memory Detected. 1. Make sure that there is at least
has been detected. one DIMM installed in the server.
2. If there are no memory fault
recorded in the logs and no
DIMM connector error LEDs are
lit, make sure that all DIMM
connectors are enabled by using
the Setup utility or the Advance
Settings Utility (ASU).
3. Reinstall all DIMMs in the correct
population sequence (see
“Installing a memory module” on
page 34 for more information).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 129

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.58001 [W.58001] The PFA Threshold DIMM PFA Threshold Note: Each time you install or
limit (correctable error logging Exceeded. remove a DIMM, you must
limit) has been exceeded on disconnect the server from the power
DIMM number % at address %. source; then, wait 10 seconds before
MC5 Status contains % and restarting the server.
MC5 Misc contains %. 1. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this memory error.
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
indicated by the error LEDs on
the system board or the event
logs) to a different memory
channel (see “Installing a memory
module” on page 34 for memory
population sequence).
3. If the error still occurs on the
same DIMM, replace the affected
DIMM.
4. If the problem occurs on the same
DIMM connector, swap other
DIMMs (in the same memory
channel) to a different memory
channel or microprocessor (see
“Installing a memory module” on
page 34 for memory population
sequence). If the problem follows
a moved DIMM to a different
memory channel, replace the
affected DIMM.
5. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same
DIMM connector, check the
DIMM connector. Remove any
foreign material on the DIMM
connector, if found. If the
connector is damaged, replace the
system board.
6. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found or the
microprocessor is an upgrade
part, replace the system board.
7. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
130 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide heat sink” on page 349).
8. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.58007 [W.58007] Invalid memory Unsupported DIMM Note: Each time you install or
configuration (Unsupported Population. remove a DIMM, you must
DIMM Population) detected. disconnect the server from the power
Please verify memory source; then, wait 10 seconds before
configuration is valid. restarting the server.
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then
restart the server.
2. Make sure that the DIMMs are
installed in the proper sequence
(see “Installing a memory
module” on page 34).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 131

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
S.58008 [S.58008] A DIMM has failed DIMM Failed Memory Test. Note: Each time you install or
the POST memory test. remove a DIMM, you must
disconnect the server from the power
source; then, wait 10 seconds before
restarting the server.
1. Check the IBM support website
for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this memory error.
2. Make sure that the DIMMs are
firmly seated and no foreign
material is found in the DIMM
connector. Then, retry with the
same DIMM.
3. If the problem is related to a
DIMM, replace the failing DIMM
indicated by the error LEDs
4. If the problem occurs on the same
DIMM connector, swap the
affected DIMMs (as indicated by
the error LEDs on the system
board or the event logs) to a
different memory channel or
microprocessor (see “Installing a
memory module” on page 34 for
memory population sequence).
5. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same
DIMM connector, check the
DIMM connector. If the connector
contains any foreign material or is
damaged, replace the system
board.
6. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the
system board.
7. (Trained technician only) Swap
the affected microprocessor, if
there are more than one
microprocessor installed. If the
problem follows the
microprocessor, replace the
affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
132 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide 8. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.580A1 [W.580A1] Invalid memory Unsupported DIMM Population 1. If a DIMM connector error LED is
configuration for Mirror Mode. for Mirror Mode. lit on the system board, check the
Please correct memory event logs and follow the
configuration. procedure for that event and
restart the server.
2. Make sure that the DIMMs have
been installed in the correct
sequence for mirrored channel
mode.
W.580A2 [W.580A2] Invalid memory Unsupported DIMM Population Make sure that the DIMMs have been
configuration for Sparing for Spare Mode. installed in the correct sequence for
Mode. Please correct memory rank sparing mode.
configuration.
I.580A4 [I.580A4] Memory population DIMM Population Change Information only. Memory has been
change detected. Detected. added, moved, or changed.
I.580A5 [I.580A5] Mirror Fail-over DIMM Mirror Fail-over Information only. Memory
complete. DIMM number % has Detected. redundancy has been lost. Check the
failed over to to the mirrored event log for uncorrected DIMM
copy. failure events.
I.580A6 [I.580A6] Memory spare copy Spare Copy Complete. Information only. Memory
has completed successfully. redundancy or spare rank has been
lost. Check the event log for
uncorrected DIMM failure events.
I.58015 [I.58015] Memory spare copy Spare Copy Started. No action; information only.
initiated.
W.68002 [W.68002] A CMOS battery CMOS Battery Fault. 1. Check the IBM support website
error has been detected. for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this memory error.
2. Replace the CMOS battery.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
S.68005 [S.68005] An error has been Critical IOH-PCI Error. 1. Check the IBM support website
detected by the IIO core logic for an applicable retain tip or
on Bus %. The Global Fatal firmware update that applies to
Error Status register contains %. this memory error.
The Global Non-Fatal Error
2. Replace the following components
Status register contains %.
one at a time in the order shown,
Please check error logs for the
restarting the server each time:
presence of additional
downstream device error data. a. PCI express adapter.
b. (Trained technician only)
System board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 133

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
S.680B8 [S.680B8] Internal QPI Link Internal QPI Link Failure 1. Check the IBM support website
Failure Detected. Detected. for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Inspect the microprocessor socket
for foreign material, if the
microprocessor socket contains
any foreign material, remove the
foreign material. If it is found
damaged, (trained technician
only) replace the system board.
S.680B9 [S.680B9] External QPI Link External QPI Link Failure 1. Check the IBM support website
Failure Detected. Detected. for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Inspect the microprocessor socket
for foreign material, if the
microprocessor socket contains
any foreign material, remove the
foreign material. If it is found
damaged, (trained technician
only) replace the system board.
S.2011001 [S.2011001] An Uncorrected PCI SERR Detected. 1. Check the PCI riser slot LEDs on
PCIe Error has Occurred at Bus the system board.
% Device % Function %. The
2. Reseat all affected adapters and
Vendor ID for the device is %
PCI riser-card assembly.
and the Device ID is %.
3. Update the adapter firmware.
4. Replace the affected adapters and
riser cards.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
S.2018001 [S.2018001] An Uncorrected PCIe Uncorrected Error 1. Check the PCI riser slot LEDs on
PCIe Error has Occurred at Bus Detected. the system board.
% Device % Function %. The
2. Reseat all affected adapters and
Vendor ID for the device is %
PCI riser-card assembly.
and the Device ID is %.
3. Update the adapter firmware.
4. Replace the affected adapters and
riser cards.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.

134 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
I.2018002 [I.2018002] The device found at OUT_OF_RESOURCES (PCI 1. Run the Setup utility (see “Using
Bus % Device % Function % Option ROM). the Setup utility” on page 75).
could not be configured due to Select Startup Options from the
resource constraints. The menu and modify the boot
Vendor ID for the device is % sequence to change the load order
and the Device ID is %. of the optional-device ROM code.
2. Informational message that some
devices might not be initialized.
3. See retain tip H197144
(http://www-947.ibm.com/
support/entry/portal/
docdisplay?lndocid=migr-5084743)
for more information.
I.2018003 [I.2018003] A bad option ROM ROM CHECKSUM ERROR. 1. Check the riser-card LEDs.
checksum was detected for the
2. Reseat all affected adapters and
device found at Bus % Device
riser cards.
% Function %. The Vendor ID
for the device is % and the 3. Move the affected adapter to a
Device ID is %. different slot.
4. Update the PCI adapter firmware.
5. Replace the affected adapters and
riser cards.
S.3020007 [S.3020007] A firmware fault Internal UEFI Firmware Fault 1. Check the IBM support website
has been detected in the UEFI Detected, System halted. for an applicable retain tip or
image. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Recover the server firmware.
3. (Trained technician only) replace
the system board.
S.3028002 [S.3028002] Boot permission Boot Permission Negotiation 1. Check the IMM2 error messages
timeout detected. Timeout. for communication errors and
follow the actions.
2. Restart the server.
3. If the problem remains, contact
your IBM service representative
for support.
S.3030007 [S.3030007] A firmware fault Internal UEFI Firmware Fault 1. Check the IBM support website
has been detected in the UEFI Detected, System halted. for an applicable retain tip or
image. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Recover the server firmware.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 135

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
S.3040007 [S.3040007] A firmware fault Internal UEFI Firmware Fault 1. Check the IBM support website
has been detected in the UEFI Detected, System halted. for an applicable retain tip or
image. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Recover the server firmware.
I.3048005 [I.3048005] UEFI has booted Booting Backup UEFI Image. Information only. Set the JP2 jumper
from the backup flash bank. in the backup position (pins 2 and 3)
to allow the server to boot from the
backup UEFI.
W.3048006 [W.3048006] UEFI has booted Automated Boot Recovery, 1. Run the Setup utility (see “Using
from the backup flash bank due Booting Backup UEFI Image. the Setup utility” on page 75).
to an Automatic Boot Recovery Select Load Default Settings and
(ABR) event. save the settings.
2. Recover the server firmware.
S.3050007 [S.3050007] A firmware fault Internal UEFI Firmware Fault 1. Check the IBM support website
has been detected in the UEFI Detected, System halted. for an applicable retain tip or
image. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Recover the server firmware.
W.305000A [W.305000A] An invalid date RTC Date and Time Incorrect. 1. Run the Setup utility (see “Using
and time have been detected. the Setup utility” on page 75).
Select Load Default Settings and
save the settings.
2. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the battery.

136 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
S.3058004 [S.3058004] A Three Strike boot POST failure has occurred! 1. Undo any recent system changes,
failure has occurred. The System booted with default such as new settings or newly
system has booted with default settings. installed devices.
UEFI settings.
2. Make sure that the server is
attached to a reliable power
source.
3. Remove all hardware that is not
listed on the ServerProven Web
site at http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/
compat/us/.
4. Update the firmware to the latest
level.
5. Make sure that the operating
system is not corrupted.
6. Run the Setup utility, save the
configuration, and then restart the
server.
7. (Trained technician only) If the
problem remains, replace the
system board.
W.3058009 [W.3058009] DRIVER HEALTH DRIVER HEALTH PROTOCOL: 1. Select System Settings → Settings
PROTOCOL: Missing Missing Configuration. → Driver Health Status List and
Configuraiton. Requires Change Requires Change Settings From find a driver/controller reporting
Settings From F1. F1. configuration required status.
2. Search for the driver menu from
System Settings and change the
settings appropriately.
3. Save the settings and restart the
system.
W.305800A [W.305800A] DRIVER HEALTH DRIVER HEALTH PROTOCOL: 1. Restart the system.
PROTOCOL: Reports 'Failed' Reports 'Failed' Status
2. If the problem persists, switch to
Status Controller. Controller.
the backup UEFI image or reload
the current UEFI image.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
W.305800B [W.305800B] DRIVER HEALTH DRIVER HEALTH PROTOCOL: 1. No action required. The system
PROTOCOL: Reports 'Reboot' Reports 'Reboot' Required will reboot at the end of POST.
Required Controller. Controller.
2. If the problem persists, switch to
the backup UEFI image or reload
the current UEFI image.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 137

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.305800C [W.305800C] DRIVER HEALTH DRIVER HEALTH PROTOCOL: 1. Restart the system.
PROTOCOL: Reports 'System Reports 'System Shutdown'
2. If the problem persists, switch to
Shutdown' Required Controller. Required Controller.
the backup UEFI image or reload
the current UEFI image.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
W.305800D [W.305800D] DRIVER HEALTH DRIVER HEALTH PROTOCOL: 1. Restart the system.
PROTOCOL: Disconnect Disconnect Controller Failed.
2. If the problem persists, switch to
Controller Failed. Requires Requires 'Reboot'.
the backup UEFI image or reload
'Reboot'.
the current UEFI image.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
W.305800E [W.305800E] DRIVER HEALTH DRIVER HEALTH PROTOCOL: 1. Restart the system.
PROTOCOL: Reports Invalid Reports Invalid Health Status
2. If the problem persists, switch to
Health Status Driver. Driver.
the backup UEFI image or reload
the current UEFI image.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
S.3060007 [S.3060007] A firmware fault Internal UEFI Firmware Fault 1. Check the IBM support website
has been detected in the UEFI Detected, System halted. for an applicable retain tip or
image. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Recover the server firmware.
S.3070007 [S.3070007] A firmware fault Internal UEFI Firmware Fault 1. Check the IBM support website
has been detected in the UEFI Detected, System halted. for an applicable retain tip or
image. firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. Recover the server firmware.
S.3108007 [S.3108007] The default system System Configuration Restored 1. Check the IBM support website
settings have been restored. to Defaults. for an applicable retain tip or
firmware update that applies to
this error.
2. If the settings differ from defaults,
run the Setup utility, select Load
Default Settings, and save the
settings.

138 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.3808000 [W.3808000] An IMM IMM Communication Failure. 1. Shut down the system and
communication failure has remove the power cords from the
occurred. server for 30 seconds; then,
reconnect the server to power and
restart it.
2. Update the IMM firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
W.3808002 [W.3808002] An error occurred Error Updating System 1. Run the Setup utility, select Save
while saving UEFI settings to Configuration to IMM. Settings, and restart the server
the IMM. (see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 75).
2. Update the IMM firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
W.3808003 [W.3808003] Unable to retrieve Error Retrieving System 1. Run the Setup utility, select Save
the system configuration from Configuration from IMM. Settings, and restart the server
the IMM. (see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 75).
2. Update the IMM firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
I.3808004 [I.3808004] The IMM System IPMI System Event Log is Full. Run the Setup utility to clear IMM
Event log (SEL) is full. logs and restart the server (see
“Using the Setup utility” on page 75).
I.3818001 [I.3818001] The firmware image Current Bank CRTM Capsule 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
capsule signature for the Update Signature Invalid. Default Settings, and save the
currently booted flash bank is settings.
invalid.
2. Recover the server firmware.
I.3818002 [I.3818002] The firmware image Opposite Bank CRTM Capsule 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
capsule signature for the Update Signature Invalid. Default Settings, and save the
non-booted flash bank is settings.
invalid.
2. Recover the server firmware.
I.3818003 [I.3818003] The CRTM flash CRTM Could not lock secure 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
driver could not lock the secure flash region. Default Settings, and save the
flash region. settings.
2. Recover the server firmware.
S.3818004 [S.3818004] The CRTM flash CRTM Update Failed. 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
driver could not successfully Default Settings, and save the
flash the staging area. A failure settings.
occurred.
2. Recover the server firmware.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 139

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support website at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information, hints,
tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Diagnostic
code Message Description Action
W.3818005 [W.3818005] The CRTM flash CRTM Update Aborted. 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
driver could not successfully Default Settings, and save the
flash the staging area. The settings.
update was aborted.
2. Recover the server firmware.
S.3818007 [S.3818007] The firmware image CRTM image capsule could not 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
capsules for both flash banks be verified. Default Settings, and save the
could not be verified. settings.
2. Recover the server firmware.
W.3938002 [W.3938002] A boot Boot Configuration Error. 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load
configuration error has been Default Settings, and save the
detected. settings.
2. Recover the server firmware.

Integrated management module II (IMM2) error messages

The following table describes the IMM2 error messages and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems.

For more information about IMM2, see the Integrated Management Module II User's
Guide at http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-
5086346.
Table 13. IMM2 error messages

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Event ID Message Severity Description Action
Temperature and fan messages
80010701-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Warning An upper 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
adapter Ambient non-critical sensor
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
Temp going high going high has
that nothing is blocking the air from
(upper non-critical) asserted.
coming into or preventing the air
has asserted.
from exiting the server.
80010701-0c01xxxx Numeric sensor Warning An upper 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
Ambient Temp going non-critical sensor
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
high (upper going high has
that nothing is blocking the air from
non-critical) has asserted.
coming into or preventing the air
asserted.
from exiting the server.

140 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
80010901-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error An upper critical 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
adapter Ambient sensor going high
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
Temp going high has asserted.
that nothing is blocking the air from
(upper critical) has
coming into or preventing the air
asserted.
from exiting the server.
80010901-0c01xxxx Numeric sensor Error An upper critical 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
Ambient Temp going sensor going high
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
high (upper critical) has asserted.
that nothing is blocking the air from
has asserted.
coming into or preventing the air
from exiting the server.
80010b01-0c01xxxx Numeric sensor Error An upper Check the server airflow. Make sure
Ambient Temp going non-recoverable that nothing is blocking the air from
high (upper sensor going high coming into or preventing the air from
non-recoverable) has has asserted. exiting the server.
asserted.
81010701-0c01xxxx Numeric sensor Info An upper No action; information only.
Ambient Temp going non-critical sensor
high (upper going high has
non-critical) has deasserted.
deasserted.
81010901-0c01xxxx Numeric sensor Info An upper critical No action; information only.
Ambient Temp going sensor going high
high (upper critical) has deasserted.
has deasserted.
81010b01-0c01xxxx Numeric sensor Info An upper No action; information only.
Ambient Temp going non-recoverable
high (upper sensor going high
non-recoverable) has has deasserted.
deasserted.
80010701-1401xxxx Sensor CPU n VR Warning An upper 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
80010701-1402xxxx Temp going high non-critical sensor
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
(upper non-critical) going high has
that nothing is blocking the air from
has asserted. (n = asserted.
coming into or preventing the air
microprocessor
from exiting the server.
number)
80010901-1401xxxx Sensor CPU n VR Error An upper critical 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
80010901-1402xxxx Temp going high sensor going high
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
(upper critical) has has asserted.
that nothing is blocking the air from
asserted. (n =
coming into or preventing the air
microprocessor
from exiting the server.
number)
80010b01-1401xxxx Sensor CPU n VR Error An upper Check the server airflow. Make sure
80010b01-1402xxxx Temp going high non-recoverable that nothing is blocking the air from
(upper sensor going high coming into or preventing the air from
non-recoverable) has has asserted. exiting the server.
asserted. (n =
microprocessor
number)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 141

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
80010701-2d01xxxx Numeric sensor PCH Warning An upper 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
Temp going high non-critical sensor
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
(upper non-critical) going high has
that nothing is blocking the air from
has asserted. asserted.
coming into or preventing the air
from exiting the server.
80010901-2d01xxxx Numeric sensor PCH Error An upper critical 1. Reduce the ambient temperature.
Temp going high sensor going high
2. Check the server airflow. Make sure
(upper critical) has has asserted.
that nothing is blocking the air from
asserted.
coming into or preventing the air
from exiting the server.
80010b01-2d01xxxx Numeric sensor PCH Error An upper Check the server airflow. Make sure
Temp going high non-recoverable that nothing is blocking the air from
(upper sensor going high coming into or preventing the air from
non-recoverable) has has asserted. exiting the server.
asserted.
81010701-2d01xxxx Numeric sensor PCH Info An upper No action; information only.
Temp going high non-critical sensor
(upper non-critical) going high has
has deasserted. deasserted.
81010901-2d01xxxx Numeric sensor PCH Info An upper critical No action; information only.
Temp going high sensor going high
(upper critical) has has deasserted.
deasserted.
81010b01-2d01xxxx Numeric sensor PCH Info An upper No action; information only.
Temp going high non-recoverable
(upper sensor going high
non-recoverable) has has deasserted.
deasserted.
80010204-1d01xxxx Numeric sensor Fan Error A lower critical 1. Reseat the failing fan n, which is
80010204-1d02xxxx n A Tach going low sensor going low indicated by a lit LED near the fan
80010204-1d03xxxx (lower critical) has has asserted. connector on the system board.
80010204-1d04xxxx asserted. (n = 1Aa,
2. Replace the failing fan (see
80010204-1d05xxxx 1Ab, 2Aa, 2Ab, 3Aa,
“Removing a fan” on page 310 and
80010204-1d06xxxx 3Ab)
“Replacing a fan” on page 311).
80010204-1d07xxxx
80010204-1d08xxxx (n = fan number)
80010204-1d09xxxx
80010204-1d0axxxx
80010204-1d0bxxxx
80010204-1d0cxxxx

142 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
800b010a-1e81xxxx Cooling Zone n Error Redundancy lost 1. Make sure that the connectors on
800b010a-1e82xxxx redundancy lost has has asserted. fan n are not damaged.
800b010a-1e83xxxx asserted. (n = 1,2,3)
2. Make sure that the fan n connectors
on the system board are not
damaged.
3. Make sure that the fans are correctly
installed.
4. Reseat the fans.
5. Replace the failing fan (see
“Removing a fan” on page 310 and
“Replacing a fan” on page 311).
(n = fan number)
800b050a-1e81xxxx Cooling Zone n Error There is no 1. Make sure that the connectors on
800b050a-1e82xxxx insufficient resources redundancy and fan n are not damaged.
800b050a-1e83xxxx has asserted. (n = insufficient to
2. Make sure that the fan n connectors
1,2,3) continue operation.
on the system board are not
damaged.
3. Make sure that the fans are correctly
installed.
4. Reseat the fans.
5. Replace the failing fan (see
“Removing a fan” on page 310 and
“Replacing a fan” on page 311).
(n = fan number)
80070204-0a01xxxx Sensor PS n Fan Error A sensor has 1. Make sure that there are no
80070204-0a02xxxx Fault has changed to Critical obstructions, such as bundled
transitioned to state from a less cables, to the airflow from the
critical from a less severe state. power-supply fan.
severe state. (n =
2. Replace power supply n.
power supply
number) (n = power supply number)

Power messages
80010902-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error An upper critical (Trained technician only) Replace the
Planar 3.3V going sensor going high system board (see “Removing the
high (upper critical) has asserted. system board” on page 354 and
has asserted. “Replacing the system board” on page
359).
80010202-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error A lower critical (Trained technician only) Replace the
Planar 3.3V going sensor going low system board (see “Removing the
low (lower critical) has asserted. system board” on page 354 and
has asserted. “Replacing the system board” on page
359).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 143

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
80010902-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error An upper critical (Trained technician only) Replace the
Planar 5V going high sensor going high system board (see “Removing the
(upper critical) has has asserted. system board” on page 354 and
asserted. “Replacing the system board” on page
359).
80010202-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error A lower critical (Trained technician only) Replace the
Planar 5V going low sensor going low system board (see “Removing the
(lower critical) has has asserted. system board” on page 354 and
asserted. “Replacing the system board” on page
359).
80010902-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error An upper critical 1. Check power supply n LED.
Planar 12V going sensor going high
2. Remove the failing power supply.
high (upper critical) has asserted.
has asserted. 3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
(n = power supply number)
80010202-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error A lower critical 1. Check power supply n LED.
Planar 12V going sensor going low
2. Remove the failing power supply.
low (lower critical) has asserted.
has asserted. 3. Follow actions for OVER SPEC LED
in System-board LEDs.
4. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
(n = power supply number)
80010002-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Warning A lower critical Replace the system battery (see
Planar VBAT going sensor going low “Removing the system battery” on page
low (lower has asserted. 332 and “Replacing the system battery”
non-critical) has on page 334).
asserted.
80010202-0701xxxx Numeric sensor Error A lower critical Replace the system battery (see
Planar VBAT going sensor going low “Removing the system battery” on page
low (lower critical) has asserted. 332 and “Replacing the system battery”
has asserted. on page 334).
806f0008-0a01xxxx The Power Supply Info Power supply n No action; information only.
806f0008-0a02xxxx (Power Supply n) has been added. (n
presence has been = power supply
added to container. number)
(n = power supply
number)
806f0009-1301xxxx The Power Supply Info This message is for No action; information only.
(Power Supply n) the use case when
has been turned off. an implementation
has detected a
Power Unit that
has been Disabled.

144 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0108-0a01xxxx The Power Supply n Error Power supply n 1. Reseat power supply n.
806f0108-0a02xxxx has failed. (n = has failed. (n =
2. If the power-on LED is not lit and
power supply power supply
the power-supply error LED is lit,
number) number)
replace power supply n.
3. If both the power-on LED and the
power-supply error LED are not lit,
see “Power problems” on page 254
for more information.
(n = power supply number)
806f0109-1301xxxx The Power Supply n Info This message is for No action; information only.
has been Power the use case when
Cycled. (n = power an implementation
supply number) has detected a
Power Unit that
has been power
cycled.
806f0223-2101xxxx Powering off system Info This message is for No action; information only.
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when
initiated by an implementation
[WatchdogElementName]. has detected a
Poweroff by
Watchdog has
occurred.
806f0308-0a01xxxx The Power Supply n Info Power supply n 1. Reconnect the power cords.
806f0308-0a02xxxx has lost input. (n = AC has lost. (n =
2. Check power supply n LED.
power supply power supply
number) number) 3. See “Power problems” on page 254
for more information.
(n = power supply number)
806f0608-1301xxxx [PowerSupplyElementName]
Error This message is for 1. Reseat the power supply, and then
has a Configuration the use case when restart the server.
Mismatch. an implementation
2. Replace the power supply.
has detected a
power supply with (n = power supply number)
a configuration
error.
80070208-0a01xxxx Sensor PS n Therm Error A sensor has 1. Make sure that there are no
80070208-0a02xxxx Fault has changed to Critical obstructions, such as bundled
transitioned to state from a less cables, to the airflow from the
critical from a less severe state. power-supply fan.
severe state. (n =
2. Use the IBM Power Configurator
power supply
utility to determine current system
number)
power consumption. For more
information and to download the
utility, go to http://www-
03.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/
resources/powerconfig.html.
3. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 145

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
80070608-0a01xxxx Sensor PS n 12V Error A sensor has 1. Check power supply n LED.
80070608-0a02xxxx AUX Fault has changed to
2. Replace power supply n.
transitioned to non-recoverable
non-recoverable from state from a less (n = power supply number)
a less severe state. (n severe state.
= power supply
number)
80070608-0a01xxxx Sensor PS n 12V OC Error A sensor has 1. Use the IBM Power Configurator
80070608-0a02xxxx Fault has changed to utility to determine current system
transitioned to non-recoverable power consumption. For more
non-recoverable from state from a less information and to download the
a less severe state. (n severe state. utility, go to http://www-
= power supply 03.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/
number) resources/powerconfig.html.
2. Check the OVER SPEC LED in
“Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
page 109.
80070608-0a01xxxx Sensor PS n 12V OV Error A sensor has 1. Check power supply n LED.
80070608-0a02xxxx Fault has changed to
2. Remove the failing power supply.
transitioned to non-recoverable
non-recoverable from state from a less 3. (Trained technician only) Replace
a less severe state. (n severe state. the system board.
= power supply (n = power supply number)
number)
80070608-0a01xxxx Sensor PS n 12V UV Error A sensor has 1. Check power supply n LED.
80070608-0a02xxxx Fault has changed to
2. Remove the failing power supply.
transitioned to non-recoverable
non-recoverable from state from a less 3. Follow actions for OVER SPEC LED
a less severe state. (n severe state. in System-board LEDs.
= power supply 4. (Trained technician only) Replace
number) the system board.
(n = power supply number)
800b0008-1301xxxx Power Unit has been Info Power unit No action; information only.
fully redundant. redundancy has
been restored.
800b0108-1301xxxx Power Unit Error Redundancy has 1. Check the LEDs for both power
redundancy lost has been lost and is supplies.
asserted. insufficient to
2. Follow the actions in “Power-supply
continue operation.
LEDs” on page 114.
806f0608-1301xx03 Power supply PS Error A power supply 1. Make sure that the power supplies
Configuration error configuration error installed are with the same rating or
with rating (rating mismatch) wattage.
mismatch. has occurred.
2. Reinstall the power supplies with
the same rating or wattage.
Microprocessor messages

146 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0007-0301xxxx The Processor CPU n Error A processor failed - 1. Make sure that the latest levels of
806f0007-0302xxxx Status has Failed IERR condition has firmware and device drivers are
with IERR. (n = occurred. installed for all adapters and
microprocessor standard devices, such as Ethernet,
number) SCSI, and SAS.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
2. Update the firmware (UEFI and
IMM) to the latest level “Updating
the firmware” on page 71).
3. Run the DSA program.
4. Reseat the adapter.
5. Replace the adapter.
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n.
7. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
(n = microprocessor number)
806f000f-22010cxx CPU voltage Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
mismatch detected the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
on an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
[ProcessorElementName]. has detected a message text. Please refer to the
CPU voltage UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
mismatch with the diagnostic code" section of the Info
socket voltage. Center for the appropriate user
response.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 147

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0107-0301xxxx The Processor CPU n Error An over 1. Make sure that the latest levels of
806f0107-0302xxxx Status has been temperature firmware and device drivers are
detected an condition has installed for all adapters and
over-temperature occurred. standard devices, such as Ethernet,
condition. (n = SCSI, and SAS.
microprocessor Important: Some cluster solutions
number) require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
2. Update the firmware (UEFI and
IMM) to the latest level “Updating
the firmware” on page 71).
3. Run the DSA program.
4. Reseat the adapter (see “Removing
an adapter” on page 299 and
“Replacing an adapter” on page
300).
5. Replace the adapter.
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Installing an
additional microprocessor and heat
sink” on page 50).
7. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
(n = microprocessor number)
806f0207-0301xxxx The Processor CPU n Error A processor failed - 1. Make sure that the fans are
806f0207-0302xxxx Status has Failed BIST condition has operating. There are no obstructions
with BIST condition. occurred. to the airflow (front and rear of the
(n = microprocessor server), the air baffles are in place
number) and correctly installed, and the
server cover is installed and
completely closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink for
microprocessor nis installed
correctly.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349).
(n = microprocessor number)

148 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0207-2584xxxx All CPUs / one of Error A Processor Failed 1. Reseat the microprocessor, and then
the CPUs has failed - FRB1/BIST restart the server.
with FRB1/BIST condition has been
2. Replace microprocessor n.
condition. detected.
(n = microprocessor number)
806f030c-2581xxxx Scrub Failure for All Error A memory scrub 1. Reseat the DIMM, and then restart
DIMMS / one of the failure has been the server
DIMMs on detected.
2. Replace DIMM n.
subsystem.
(n = DIMM number)
806f0507-0301xxxx The Processor CPU n Error A processor 1. Check the CPU LED. See more
806f0507-0302xxxx Status has a configuration information about the CPU LED in
806f0507-2584xxxx Configuration mismatch has “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
Mismatch. (n = occurred. page 109.
microprocessor
2. Check for a server firmware update.
number)
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
3. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are compatible with
each other (see “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349 for information about
microprocessor requirements).
4. (Trained technician only) Reseat
microprocessor n (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349).
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349).
(n = microprocessor number)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 149

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0607-0301xxxx An SM BIOS Error The system 1. Make sure that the installed
806f0607-0302xxxx Uncorrectable CPU management microprocessors are compatible with
806f0607-2584xxxx complex error for handler has each other (see “Replacing a
Processor n has detected an microprocessor and heat sink” on
asserted. (n = internal page 349 for information about
microprocessor microprocessor microprocessor requirements).
number) error.
2. Update the server firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the incompatible microprocessor
(see “Removing a microprocessor
and heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).
806f0807-0301xxxx The Processor CPU n Info A processor has No action; information only.
806f0807-0302xxxx has been disabled. (n been disabled.
= microprocessor
number)
806f0807-2584xxxx The Processor for Info A processor has No action; information only.
One of the CPUs has been disabled.
been disabled.
806f0807-2584xxxx The Processor for All Info A processor has No action; information only.
CPUs has been been disabled.
disabled.
806f0a07-0301xxxx The Processor CPU n Warning Throttling has 1. Make sure that the fans are
806f0a07-0302xxxx is operating in a occurred for operating, that there are no
Degraded State. (n = microprocessor n. obstructions to the airflow (front
microprocessor (n = and rear of the server), that the air
number) microprocessor baffles are in place and correctly
number) installed, and that the server cover
is installed and completely closed.
2. Check the ambient temperature. You
must be operating within the
specifications.
3. Make sure that the heat sink for
microprocessor nis installed
correctly.
4. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n.
(n = microprocessor number)

150 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
80070201-0301xxxx Sensor CPU n Error A sensor has 1. Make sure that the fans are
80070201-0302xxxx OverTemp has changed to critical operating, that there are no
transitioned to state from a less obstructions to the airflow (front
critical from a less severe state. and rear of the server), that the air
severe state. (n = baffles are in place and correctly
microprocessor installed, and that the server cover
number) is installed and completely closed.
2. Check the ambient temperature. You
must be operating within the
specifications (see “Server features
and specifications” on page 6 for
more information).
3. Make sure that the heat sink for
microprocessor nis installed
correctly.
4. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349).
(n = microprocessor number)
80070301-0301xxxx Sensor CPU n Error A sensor has 1. Make sure that the fans are
80070301-0302xxxx OverTemp has changed to operating, that there are no
transitioned to non-recoverable obstructions to the airflow (front
non-recoverable from state from a less and rear of the server), that the air
a less severe state. (n severe state. baffles are in place and correctly
= microprocessor installed, and that the server cover
number) is installed and completely closed.
2. Check the ambient temperature. You
must be operating within the
specifications (see “Server features
and specifications” on page 6 for
more information).
3. Make sure that the heat sink for
microprocessor n is installed
correctly (see “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349 for more information).
4. (Trained technician only) Replace
microprocessor n (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 349).
(n = microprocessor number)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 151

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
8007021b-0301xxxx Sensor CPU n QPI Error A sensor has 1. Remove cpu
8007021b-0302xxxx link error has changed to critical
2. Check cpu socket pins, any damage
transitioned to state from a less
or contained or bending, replace the
critical from a less severe state.
system board.
severe state. (n =
microprocessor 3. Check cpu damage, replace cpu.
number)
806f0813-2584xxxx An Uncorrectable Error A bus 1. Check the system-event log.
Bus Error has uncorrectable error
2. (Trained technician only) Remove
occurred on system has occurred.
the failing microprocessor from the
%1.(%1 = (Sensor = Critical
system board (see “Removing a
CIM_ComputerSystem. Int CPU)
microprocessor and heat sink” on
ElementName)
page 347).
3. Check for a server firmware update.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Make sure that the two
microprocessors are matching.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
Memory errors
806f000f-220101xx The System Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
has detected no an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
memory in the has detected that message text. Please refer to the
system. memory was UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
detected in the diagnostic code" section of the Info
system. Center for the appropriate user
response.
806f000f-220102xx Subsystem Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
[MemoryElementName] the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
has insufficient an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
memory for has detected that message text. Please refer to the
operation. the usable Memory UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
is insufficient for diagnostic code" section of the Info
operation. Center for the appropriate user
response.

152 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0813-2581xxxx An Uncorrectable Error A bus 1. Check the system-event log.
Bus Error has uncorrectable error
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.
occurred on system has occurred.
%1.(%1 = (Sensor = Critical 3. Remove the failing DIMM from the
CIM_ComputerSystem. Int DIMM) system board (see “Removing a
ElementName) memory module” on page 312).
4. Check for a server firmware update.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
5. Make sure that the installed DIMMs
are supported and configured
correctly (see “Replacing a memory
module” on page 313 for more
information).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 153

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f010c-2001xxxx Memory Error A memory 1. Check the IBM support website for
806f010c-2002xxxx uncorrectable error uncorrectable error an applicable retain tip or firmware
806f010c-2003xxxx detected for Memory has occurred. update that applies to this memory
806f010c-2004xxxx DIMM n Status. (n = error.
806f010c-2005xxxx DIMM number)
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
806f010c-2006xxxx
indicated by the error LEDs on the
806f010c-2007xxxx
system board or the event logs) to a
806f010c-2008xxxx
different memory channel or
806f010c-2009xxxx
microprocessor (see “Installing a
806f010c-200axxxx
memory module” on page 34 for
806f010c-200bxxxx
memory population).
806f010c-200cxxxx
3. If the problem follows the DIMM,
replace the failing DIMM (see
“Removing a memory module” on
page 312 and “Replacing a memory
module” on page 313).
4. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
5. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

154 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f010c-2581xxxx Memory Error A memory 1. Check the IBM support website for
uncorrectable error uncorrectable error an applicable retain tip or firmware
detected for One of has occurred. update that applies to this memory
the DIMMs. error.
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
indicated by the error LEDs on the
system board or the event logs) to a
different memory channel or
microprocessor (see “Installing a
memory module” on page 34 for
memory population).
3. If the problem follows the DIMM,
replace the failing DIMM (see
“Removing a memory module” on
page 312 and “Replacing a memory
module” on page 313).
4. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
5. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 155

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f010c-2581xxxx Memory Error A memory 1. Check the IBM support website for
uncorrectable error uncorrectable error an applicable retain tip or firmware
detected for All has occurred. update that applies to this memory
DIMMs. error.
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
indicated by the error LEDs on the
system board or the event logs) to a
different memory channel or
microprocessor (see “Installing a
memory module” on page 34 for
memory population).
3. If the problem follows the DIMM,
replace the failing DIMM (see
“Removing a memory module” on
page 312 and “Replacing a memory
module” on page 313).
4. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
5. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

156 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f030c-2001xxxx Memory DIMM n Error A memory scrub Note: Each time you install or remove
806f030c-2002xxxx Status Scrub failure failure has been a DIMM, you must disconnect the
806f030c-2003xxxx detected. (n = DIMM detected. server from the power source; then,
806f030c-2004xxxx number) wait 10 seconds before restarting the
806f030c-2005xxxx server.
806f030c-2006xxxx 1. Check the IBM support website for
806f030c-2007xxxx an applicable retain tip or firmware
806f030c-2008xxxx update that applies to this memory
806f030c-2009xxxx error.
806f030c-200axxxx
2. Make sure that the DIMMs are
806f030c-200bxxxx
firmly seated and no foreign
806f030c-200cxxxx
material is found in the DIMM
connector. Then, retry with the same
DIMM.
3. If the problem is related to a DIMM,
replace the failing DIMM indicated
by the error LEDs (see “Removing a
memory module” on page 312 and
“Replacing a memory module” on
page 313).
4. If the problem occurs on the same
DIMM connector, swap the affected
DIMMs (as indicated by the error
LEDs on the system board or the
event logs) to a different memory
channel or microprocessor (see
“Replacing a memory module” on
page 313 for memory population).
5. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
(continued on the next page)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 157

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Memory DIMM n Error A memory scrub 1. (Trained technician only) Remove
Status Scrub failure failure has been the affected microprocessor and
detected. (n = DIMM detected. check the microprocessor socket
number) pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
2. (Trained technician only) Swap the
affected microprocessor, if there are
more than one microprocessor
installed. If the problem follows the
microprocessor, replace the affected
microprocessor (see “Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 347 and “Replacing a memory
module” on page 313).
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
806f040c-2001xxxx Memory DIMM Info DIMM disabled. 1. Make sure the DIMM is installed
806f040c-2002xxxx disabled for DIMM n correctly (see “Replacing a memory
806f040c-2003xxxx Status. (n = DIMM module” on page 313).
806f040c-2004xxxx number)
2. If the DIMM was disabled because
806f040c-2005xxxx
of a memory fault (memory
806f040c-2006xxxx
uncorrectable error or memory
806f040c-2007xxxx
logging limit reached), follow the
806f040c-2008xxxx
suggested actions for that error
806f040c-2009xxxx
event and restart the server.
806f040c-200axxxx
806f040c-200bxxxx 3. Check the IBM support website for
806f040c-200cxxxx an applicable retain tip or firmware
update that applies to this memory
event. If no memory fault is
recorded in the logs and no DIMM
connector error LED is lit, you can
re-enable the DIMM through the
Setup utility or the Advanced
Settings Utility (ASU).

158 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f040c-2581xxxx Memory DIMM Info DIMM disabled. 1. Make sure the DIMM is installed
disabled for One of correctly (see “Replacing a memory
the DIMMs. module” on page 313).
2. If the DIMM was disabled because
of a memory fault (memory
uncorrectable error or memory
logging limit reached), follow the
suggested actions for that error
event and restart the server.
3. Check the IBM support website for
an applicable retain tip or firmware
update that applies to this memory
event. If no memory fault is
recorded in the logs and no DIMM
connector error LED is lit, you can
re-enable the DIMM through the
Setup utility or the Advanced
Settings Utility (ASU).
806f040c-2581xxxx Memory DIMM Info DIMM disabled. 1. Make sure the DIMM is installed
disabled for All correctly (see “Replacing a memory
DIMMs. module” on page 313).
2. If the DIMM was disabled because
of a memory fault (memory
uncorrectable error or memory
logging limit reached), follow the
suggested actions for that error
event and restart the server.
3. Check the IBM support website for
an applicable retain tip or firmware
update that applies to this memory
event. If no memory fault is
recorded in the logs and no DIMM
connector error LED is lit, you can
re-enable the DIMM through the
Setup utility or the Advanced
Settings Utility (ASU).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 159

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f050c-2001xxxx Memory Logging Error The memory 1. Check the IBM support website for
806f050c-2002xxxx Limit Reached for logging limit has an applicable retain tip or firmware
806f050c-2003xxxx DIMM n Status. (n = been reached. update that applies to this memory
806f050c-2004xxxx DIMM number) error.
806f050c-2005xxxx
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
806f050c-2006xxxx
indicated by the error LEDs on the
806f050c-2007xxxx
system board or the event logs) to a
806f050c-2008xxxx
different memory channel or
806f050c-2009xxxx
microprocessor (see “Installing a
806f050c-200axxxx
memory module” on page 34 for
806f050c-200bxxxx
memory population).
806f050c-200cxxxx
3. If the error still occurs on the same
DIMM, replace the affected DIMM.
4. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
5. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

160 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f050c-2581xxxx Memory Logging Error The memory 1. Check the IBM support website for
Limit Reached for logging limit has an applicable retain tip or firmware
One of the DIMMs. been reached. update that applies to this memory
error.
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
indicated by the error LEDs on the
system board or the event logs) to a
different memory channel or
microprocessor (see “Replacing a
memory module” on page 313 for
memory population).
3. If the error still occurs on the same
DIMM, replace the affected DIMM.
4. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
5. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Replacing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 349).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 161

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f050c-2581xxxx Memory Logging Error The memory 1. Check the IBM support website for
Limit Reached for logging limit has an applicable retain tip or firmware
All DIMMs. been reached. update that applies to this memory
error.
2. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
indicated by the error LEDs on the
system board or the event logs) to a
different memory channel or
microprocessor (see “Installing a
memory module” on page 34 for
memory population).
3. If the error still occurs on the same
DIMM, replace the affected DIMM.
4. (Trained technician only) If the
problem occurs on the same DIMM
connector, check the DIMM
connector. If the connector contains
any foreign material or is damaged,
replace the system board (see
“Removing the system board” on
page 354 and “Replacing the system
board” on page 359).
5. (Trained technician only) Remove
the affected microprocessor and
check the microprocessor socket
pins for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the system
board (see “Removing the system
board” on page 354 and “Replacing
the system board” on page 359).
6. (Trained technician only) Replace
the affected microprocessor (see
“Removing a microprocessor and
heat sink” on page 347 and
“Installing an additional
microprocessor and heat sink” on
page 50).
806f070c-2001xxxx Memory DIMM Error A memory DIMM Make sure that DIMMs are installed in
806f070c-2002xxxx Configuration Error configuration error the correct sequence and have the same
806f070c-2003xxxx for DIMM n Status. has occurred. size, type, speed, and technology.
806f070c-2004xxxx (n = DIMM number)
806f070c-2005xxxx
806f070c-2006xxxx
806f070c-2007xxxx
806f070c-2008xxxx
806f070c-2009xxxx
806f070c-200axxxx
806f070c-200bxxxx
806f070c-200cxxxx

162 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f070c-2581xxxx Memory DIMM Error A memory DIMM Make sure that DIMMs are installed in
Configuration Error configuration error the correct sequence and have the same
for One of the has occurred. size, type, speed, and technology.
DIMMs.
806f070c-2581xxxx Memory DIMM Error A memory DIMM Make sure that DIMMs are installed in
Configuration Error configuration error the correct sequence and have the same
for All DIMMs. has occurred. size, type, speed, and technology.
806f090c-2001xxxx Memory DIMM for Warning A memory DIMM 1. Reseat the DIMM, and then restart
806f090c-2002xxxx DIMM n Status has has been throttled. the server.
806f090c-2003xxxx been automatically
2. Replace DIMM n.
806f090c-2004xxxx throttled. (n = DIMM
806f090c-2005xxxx number) (n = DIMM number)
806f090c-2006xxxx
806f090c-2007xxxx
806f090c-2008xxxx
806f090c-2009xxxx
806f090c-200axxxx
806f090c-200bxxxx
806f090c-200cxxxx
806f0a0c-2001xxxx An Error An 1. Make sure that the fans are
806f0a0c-2002xxxx Over-Temperature over-temperature operating, that there are no
806f0a0c-2003xxxx condition has been condition has obstructions to the airflow, that the
806f0a0c-2004xxxx detected on the occurred for air baffles are in place and correctly
806f0a0c-2005xxxx DIMM n Status. (n = DIMM n. (n = installed, and that the server cover
806f0a0c-2006xxxx DIMM number) DIMM number) is installed and completely closed.
806f0a0c-2007xxxx
2. Make sure that ambient temperature
806f0a0c-2008xxxx
is within the specifications.
806f0a0c-2009xxxx
806f0a0c-200axxxx 3. If a fan has failed, complete the
806f0a0c-200bxxxx action for a fan failure.
806f0a0c-200cxxxx 4. Replace DIMM n.
(n = DIMM number)
800b010c-2581xxxx Backup Memory Error Redundancy has 1. Check the system-event log for
redundancy lost has been lost. DIMM failure events (uncorrectable
asserted. or PFA) and correct the failures.
2. Re-enable mirroring in the Setup
utility.
800b030c-2581xxxx Backup Memory Warning There is no 1. Check the system-event log for
sufficient resources redundancy. The DIMM failure events (uncorrectable
from redundancy state has been or PFA) and correct the failures.
degraded has transitioned from
2. Re-enable mirroring in the Setup
asserted. redundancy to
utility.
sufficient resources.
800b050c-2581xxxx Backup Memory Error There is no 1. Check the system-event log for
insufficient resources redundancy and DIMM failure events (uncorrectable
has asserted. insufficient to or PFA) and correct the failures.
continue operation.
2. Re-enable mirroring in the Setup
utility.
Recovery messages

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 163

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
816f000d-0400xxxx The Drive n Status Error A drive has been 1. Reseat hard disk drive n.(n = hard
816f000d-0401xxxx has been removed removed. disk drive number). Wait 1 minute
816f000d-0402xxxx from unit. (n = hard or more before reinstalling the
816f000d-0403xxxx disk drive number) drive.
816f000d-0404xxxx
2. Replace the hard disk drive.
816f000d-0405xxxx
816f000d-0406xxxx 3. Make sure that the disk firmware
816f000d-0407xxxx and RAID controller firmware is at
the latest level.
4. Check the SAS cable.
806f010d-0400xxxx The Drive n Status Error A drive has been 1. Run the hard disk drive diagnostic
806f010d-0401xxxx has been disabled disabled because of test on drive n.
806f010d-0402xxxx due to a detected a fault.
2. Reseat the following components:
806f010d-0403xxxx fault. (n = hard disk
806f010d-0404xxxx drive number) a. Hard disk drive (wait 1 minute
806f010d-0405xxxx or more before reinstalling the
806f010d-0406xxxx drive).
806f010d-0407xxxx b. Cable from the system board to
the backplane
3. Replace the following components
one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system board to
the backplane
c. Hard disk drive backplane
(n = hard disk drive number)
806f020d-0400xxxx The Drive n Status Error A predictive failure 1. Replace the hard drive n.
806f020d-0401xxxx has a predictive has been detected
806f020d-0402xxxx failure. (n = hard for drive n. (n = (n = hard disk drive number)
806f020d-0403xxxx disk drive number) hard disk drive
806f020d-0404xxxx number)
806f020d-0405xxxx
806f020d-0406xxxx
806f020d-0407xxxx
806f050d-0400xxxx Array %1 is in Error An array is in a 1. Make sure that the RAID adapter
806f050d-0401xxxx critical condition.(%1 critical state. firmware and hard disk drive
806f050d-0402xxxx = (Sensor = Drive n firmware is at the latest level.
806f050d-0403xxxx CIM_ComputerSystem. Status) (n = hard
2. Make sure that the SAS cable is
806f050d-0404xxxx ElementName) disk drive number)
connected correctly.
806f050d-0405xxxx
806f050d-0406xxxx 3. Replace the SAS cable.
806f050d-0407xxxx 4. Replace the RAID adapter.
5. Replace the hard disk drive that is
indicated by a lit status LED.

164 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f060d-0400xxxx Array %1 has failed. Error An array is in a 1. Make sure that the RAID adapter
806f060d-0401xxxx (%1 = failed state. (Sensor firmware and hard disk drive
806f060d-0402xxxx CIM_ComputerSystem. = Drive n Status) firmware is at the latest level.
806f060d-0403xxxx ElementName) (n = hard disk
2. Make sure that the SAS cable is
806f060d-0404xxxx drive number)
connected correctly.
806f060d-0405xxxx
806f060d-0406xxxx 3. Replace the SAS cable.
806f060d-0407xxxx 4. Replace the RAID adapter.
5. Replace the hard disk drive that is
indicated by a lit status LED.
806f070d-0400xxxx The Drive n Status Info The Drive n has No action; information only.
806f070d-0401xxxx rebuilt has been in rebuilt in progress.
806f070d-0402xxxx progress. (n = hard (n = hard disk
806f070d-0403xxxx disk drive number) drive number)
806f070d-0404xxxx
806f070d-0405xxxx
806f070d-0406xxxx
806f070d-0407xxxx
PCI messages
806f0021-3001xxxx PCI fault has been Error A PCI fault has 1. Check the PCI LED. See more
detected for PCI n. been detected. information about the PCI LED in
(n = PCI slot “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
number) page 109.
2. Reseat the affected adapters and
riser card.
3. Update the server firmware (UEFI
and IMM) and adapter firmware.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the riser cards.
6. (Trained technicians only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 165

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0021-2582xxxx PCI fault has been Error A PCI fault has 1. Check the PCI LED. See more
detected for One of been detected. information about the PCI LED in
PCI Error. “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
page 109.
2. Reseat the affected adapters and
riser cards.
3. Update the server firmware (UEFI
and IMM) and adapter firmware.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the riser cards.
6. (Trained technicians only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
806f0021-2582xxxx PCI fault has been Error A PCI fault has 1. Check the PCI LED. See more
detected for All PCI been detected. information about the PCI LED in
Error. “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
page 109.
2. Reseat the affected adapters and
riser cards.
3. Update the server firmware (UEFI
and IMM) and adapter firmware.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Replace the adapters.
5. Replace the riser cards.
6. (Trained technicians only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
806f0023-2101xxxx Watchdog Timer Info This message is for No action; information only.
expired for IPMI the use case when
Watchdog. an implementation
has detected a
Watchdog Timer
Expired.

166 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0113-0301xxxx A bus timeout has Error This message is for 1. Reseat the microprocessor, and then
occurred on system the use case when restart the server.
CPU 1 PECI. an implementation
2. Replace microprocessor n.
has detected a Bus
Timeout. (n = microprocessor number)
806f0113-0302xxxx A bus timeout has Error This message is for 1. Reseat the microprocessor, and then
occurred on system the use case when restart the server.
CPU 2 PECI an implementation
2. Replace microprocessor n.
has detected a Bus
Timeout. (n = microprocessor number)
806f0413-2582xxxx A PCI PERR has Error A PCI PERR has 1. Check the PCI LED. See more
occurred on system occurred. (Sensor = information about the PCI LED in
%1.(%1 = PCIs) “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
CIM_ComputerSystem. page 109.
ElementName)
2. Reseat the affected adapters and
riser cards.
3. Update the server firmware (UEFI
and IMM) and adapter firmware.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Replace the adapters.
5. Replace the riser cards.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 167

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0513-2582xxxx A PCI SERR has Error A PCI SERR has 1. Check the PCI LED. See more
occurred on system occurred. (Sensor = information about the PCI LED in
%1.(%1 = PCIs) “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
CIM_ComputerSystem. page 109.
ElementName)
2. Reseat the affected adapters and
riser card.
3. Update the server firmware (UEFI
and IMM) and adapter firmware.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Make sure that the adapter is
supported. For a list of supported
optional devices, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/
info/x86servers/serverproven/
compat/us/.
5. Replace the adapters.
6. Replace the riser cards.
806f0813-2582xxxx An Uncorrectable Error A bus 1. Check the system-event log.
Bus Error has uncorrectable error
2. Check the PCI LED. See more
occurred on system has occurred.
information about the PCI LED in
%1.(%1 = (Sensor = Critical
“Light path diagnostics LEDs” on
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)
Int PCI)
page 109.
3. Remove the adapter from the
indicated PCI slot.
4. Check for a server firmware update.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
806f0125-0B01xxxx The entity of PCI Info The entity of PCI No action; information only.
806f0125-0B02xxxx riser has been riser n has been
detected absent for detected absent. (n
PCI n. (n = PCI slot = PCI slot number)
number)
General messages

168 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
80030006-2101xxxx Sensor Sig Verify Fail Info An implementation No action; information only.
has deasserted. has detected a
sensor has
deasserted.
80030012-2301xxxx Sensor OS RealTime Info Sensor OS No action; information only.
Mod has deasserted. RealTime Mod has
deasserted.
80050108-0a01xxxx Sensor has indicated Info This message is for No action; information only.
80050108-0a02xxxx limit exceeded. the use case when
an implementation
has detected a
Sensor limit was
exceeded.
80070114-2201xxxx Sensor TPM Lock / Warning An implementation 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
TPM Phy Pres Set has detected a UEFI diagnostic code for this event
has transitioned from sensor transitioned can be found in the logged IMM
normal to to non-critical from message text. Please refer to the
non-critical state. normal. UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
diagnostic code" section of the Info
Center for the appropriate user
response.
80070202-0701xxxx Sensor Planar Fault Error A sensor has 1. Check the system-event log.
has transitioned to changed to Critical
2. Check for an error LED on the
critical from a less state from a less
system board.
severe state. severe state.
3. Replace any failing device.
4. Check for a server firmware update.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board (see “Removing
the system board” on page 354 and
“Replacing the system board” on
page 359).
8007020f-2201xxxx Sensor TXT ACM Error A sensor has 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
module has transitioned to UEFI diagnostic code for this event
transitioned to critical from less can be found in the logged IMM
critical from a less severe. message text. Please refer to the
severe state. UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
diagnostic code" section of the Info
Center for the appropriate user
response.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 169

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
8007020f-2582xxxx Sensor No PCI I/O Error A sensor has 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
has transitioned to transitioned to UEFI diagnostic code for this event
critical from a less critical from less can be found in the logged IMM
severe state. severe. message text. Please refer to the
UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
diagnostic code" section of the Info
Center for the appropriate user
response.
80070614-2201xxxx Sensor TPM Phy Error A sensor has 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
Pres Set has transitioned to UEFI diagnostic code for this event
transitioned to non-recoverable. can be found in the logged IMM
non-recoverable. message text. Please refer to the
UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
diagnostic code" section of the Info
Center for the appropriate user
response.
806f011b-0701xxxx The Front USB Error The system had Reseat the front USB cable on the
connector has detected an system board.
encountered a internal connection
configuration error. error.
806f011b-0701xxxx The Front Video Error The system had Reseat the front video cable on the
connector has detected an system board.
encountered a internal connection
configuration error. error.
806f0123-2101xxxx Reboot of system Info This message is for No action; information only.
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when
initiated by an implementation
[WatchdogElementName]. has detected a
Reboot by a
Watchdog
occurred.
806f0125-0c01xxxx Front panel entity Info A front panel No action; information only.
has been detected entity has been
Absent. detected absent.
806f0013-1701xxxx A front panel NMI Error An operator 1. Check the device driver.
has occurred on information panel
2. Reinstall the device driver.
system %1. (%1 = NMI/diagnostic
CIM_ComputerSystem. interrupt has 3. Update all device drivers to the
ElementName) occurred. latest level.
4. Update the firmware (UEFI and
IMM) (see “Updating the firmware”
on page 71).
806f0313-1701xxxx A software NMI has Error A software NMI 1. Check the device driver.
occurred on system has occurred.
2. Reinstall the device driver.
%1. (%1 =
CIM_ComputerSystem. 3. Update all device drivers to the
ElementName) latest level.
4. Update the firmware (UEFI and
IMM) (see “Updating the firmware”
on page 71).

170 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f0823-2101xxxx Watchdog Timer Info This message is for No action; information only.
interrupt occurred the use case when
for an implementation
[WatchdogElementName]. has detected a
Watchdog Timer
interrupt occurred.
806f0a13-0301xxxx A Fatal Bus Error Error A bus fatal error 1. Reseat the microprocessor, and then
has occurred on has been detected. restart the server.
system CPU 1 PECI.
2. Replace microprocessor n.
(n = microprocessor number)
806f0a13-0302xxxx A Fatal Bus Error Error A bus fatal error 1. Reseat the microprocessor, and then
has occurred on has been detected. restart the server.
system CPU 2 PECI.
2. Replace microprocessor n.
(n = microprocessor number)
81030012-2301xxxx OS RealTime Mod Info OS RealTime Mod No action; information only.
state has deasserted. state has
deasserted.
80070219-0701xxxx Sensor Sys Board Error A sensor has 1. Check the system-event log.
Fault has changed to Critical
2. Check for an error LED on the
transitioned to state from a less
system board.
critical. severe state.
3. Replace any failing device.
4. Check for a server firmware update.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
806f0312-2201xxxx Entry to aux log has Info Entry to aux log No action; information only.
asserted. has been detected.
80080128-2101xxxx Low security jumper Info The low security No action; information only.
presence has jumper has been
asserted. detected.
8008010f-2101xxxx Physical presence Info The physical No action; information only.
jumper presence has presence jumper
asserted. has been detected.
81030006-2101xxxx Sig verify fail has Info The sig verify fail No action; information only.
deasserted. has deasserted.
806f0028-2101xxxx TPM command fail Warning The TPM sensor 1. Turn off the server and disconnect it
has asserted. access has been from power.
degraded or
2.
unavailable.
Firmware and software messages

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 171

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f000f-220103xx The System Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
encountered an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
firmware error - has detected that message text. Please refer to the
unrecoverable boot System Firmware UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
device failure. Error diagnostic code" section of the Info
Unrecoverable boot Center for the appropriate user
device failure has response.
occurred.
806f000f-220104xx The System Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
has encountered a an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
motherboard failure. has detected that a message text. Please refer to the
fatal motherboard UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
failure in the diagnostic code" section of the Info
system. Center for the appropriate user
response.
806f000f-220107xx The System Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
encountered an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
firmware error - has detected that message text. Please refer to the
unrecoverable System Firmware UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
keyboard failure. Error diagnostic code" section of the Info
Unrecoverable Center for the appropriate user
Keyboard failure response.
has occurred.
806f000f-22010axx The System Error This message is for 1. This is a UEFI detected event. The
[ComputerSystemElementName] the use case when UEFI diagnostic code for this event
encountered an implementation can be found in the logged IMM
firmware error - no has detected that message text. Please refer to the
video device System Firmware UEFI diagnostic code in the "UEFI
detected. Error No video diagnostic code" section of the Info
device detected has Center for the appropriate user
occurred. response.

172 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f000f-22010bxx Firmware BIOS Error Firmware BIOS 1. Make sure the server meets the
(ROM) corruption (ROM) corruption minimum configuration to start
was detected on was detected
(see “Power-supply LEDs” on page
system during POST.
114).
[ComputerSystemElementName] (Sensor = ABR
during POST. Status) 2. Recover the server firmware from
the backup page:
a. Restart the server.
b. At the prompt, press F3 to
recover the firmware.
3. Update the server firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Remove components one at a time,
restarting the server each time, to
see if the problem goes away.
5. If the problem remains, (trained
technician) replace the system
board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 173

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f000f-2201ffff The System Error The System ABR 1. Make sure the server meets the
[ComputerSystemElementName] Status / Firmware minimum configuration to start
encountered a POST Error encountered
(see “Power-supply LEDs” on page
Error. a POST Error.
114).
2. Recover the server firmware from
the backup page:
a. Restart the server.
b. At the prompt, press F3 to
recover the firmware.
3. Update the server firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Remove components one at a time,
restarting the server each time, to
see if the problem goes away.
5. If the problem remains, (trained
technician) replace the system
board.
806f000f-2201xxxx The System %1 Error The System 1. Make sure the server meets the
encountered a POST encountered a minimum configuration to start
Error.(%1 = firmware error.
(see “Power-supply LEDs” on page
CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor =
114).
ElementName) Firmware Error)
2. Update the server firmware on the
primary page.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.

174 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
806f010f-2201xxxx The System %1 Error The System 1. Make sure the server meets the
encountered a POST encountered a minimum configuration to start
Hang. (%1 = firmware hang.
(see “Power-supply LEDs” on page
CIM_ComputerSystem. (Sensor =
114).
ElementName) Firmware Error)
2. Update the server firmware on the
primary page.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
3. (Trained technician only) Replace
the system board.
806f052b-2201xxxx IMM2 FW Failover Error Invalid or 1. Make sure the server meets the
has been detected. unsupported minimum configuration to start
firmware or
(see “Power-supply LEDs” on page
software was
114).
detected.
2. Recover the server firmware from
the backup page:
a. Restart the server.
b. At the prompt, press F3 to
recover the firmware.
3. Update the server firmware to the
latest level (see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71).
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4. Remove components one at a time,
restarting the server each time, to
see if the problem goes away.
5. If the problem remains, (trained
technician) replace the system
board.
Web interface messages
40000001-00000000 IMM Network Info An IMM network No action; information only.
Initialization has completed
Complete. initialization.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 175

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000002-00000000 Certificate Authority Error A problem has 1. Make sure that the certificate that
[arg1] has detected a occurred with the you are importing is correct and
[arg2] Certificate SSL Server, SSL correctly generated.
Error. Client, or SSL
2. Try importing the certificate again.
Trusted CA
certificate that has
been imported into
the IMM. The
imported certificate
must contain a
public key that
corresponds to the
key pair that was
previously
generated by the
Generate a New
Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
40000003-00000000 Ethernet Data Rate Info The specified user No action; information only.
modified from [arg1] has changed the
to [arg2] by user Ethernet data rate
[arg3]. of the Integrated
Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.
40000004-00000000 Ethernet Duplex Info The specified user No action; information only.
setting modified has changed the
from [arg1] to [arg2] Ethernet duplex
by user [arg3]. setting of the
Integrated
Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.
40000005-00000000 Ethernet MTU Info The specified user No action; information only.
setting modified has changed the
from [arg1] to [arg2] Ethernet maximum
by user [arg3]. transmission unit
(MTU) setting of
the Integrated
Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.

176 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000006-00000000 Ethernet locally Info The specified user No action; information only.
administered MAC has changed the
address modified Ethernet locally
from [arg1] to [arg2] administered MAC
by user [arg3]. address of the
Integrated
Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.
40000007-00000000 Ethernet interface Info A specified user No action; information only.
[arg1] by user [arg2]. has enabled or
disabled the
Ethernet interface.
40000008-00000000 Hostname set to Info A specified user No action; information only.
[arg1] by user [arg2]. has modified the
host name of the
IMM.
40000009-00000000 IP address of Info The specified user No action; information only.
network interface has changed the IP
modified from [arg1] address of the
to [arg2] by user Integrated
[arg3]. Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.
4000000a-00000000 IP subnet mask of Info The specified user No action; information only.
network interface has changed the
modified from [arg1] subnet mask of the
to [arg2] by user Integrated
[arg3]. Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.
4000000b-00000000 IP address of default Info The specified user No action; information only.
gateway modified has changed the
from [arg1] to [arg2] gateway address of
by user [arg3]. the Integrated
Management
Module external
network interface
to the specified
value.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 177

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000000c-00000000 OS Watchdog Info This message is for No action; information only.
response [arg1] by the use case where
[arg2]. an OS Watchdog
has been enabled
or disabled by a
user.
4000000d-00000000 DHCP[%1] failure, Info A DHCP server Complete the following steps until the
no IP address has failed to assign problem is solved:
assigned.(%1 = IP an IP address to 1. Make sure that the Chassis
address, the IMM. Management Module network cable
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) is connected.
2. Make sure that there is a DHCP
server on the network that can
assign an IP address to the IMM.
4000000e-00000000 Remote Login Info The specified user No action; information only.
Successful. Login ID: has logged in to
[arg1] from [arg2] at the Integrated
IP address [arg3]. Management
Module.
4000000f-00000000 Attempting to %1 Info A user has used No action; information only.
server %2 by user the IMM to
%3.(%1 = Power Up, perform a power
Power Down, Power function on the
Cycle, or Reset; %2 = server.
IBM_ComputerSystem.ElementName;
%3 = user ID)
40000010-00000000 Security: Userid: '%1' Error A user has Complete the following steps until the
had %2 login failures exceeded the problem is solved:
from WEB client at maximum number 1. Make sure that the correct login ID
IP address %3.(%1 = of unsuccessful and password are being used.
user ID; %2 = login attempts
2. Have the system administrator reset
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailuresfrom a web
the login ID or password.
(currently set to 5 in browser and has
the firmware); %3 = been prevented
IP address, from logging in for
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) the lockout period.
40000011-00000000 Security: Login ID: Error A user has Complete the following steps until the
'%1' had %2 login exceeded the problem is solved:
failures from CLI at maximum number 1. Make sure that the correct login ID
%3.(%1 = user ID; of unsuccessful and password are being used.
%2 = login attempts
2. Have the system administrator reset
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailuresfrom the
the login ID or password.
(currently set to 5 in command-line
the firmware); %3 = interface and has
IP address, been prevented
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) from logging in for
the lockout period.

178 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000012-00000000 Remote access Error A user has 1. Make sure that the correct login ID
attempt failed. attempted to log in and password are being used.
Invalid userid or from a web
2. Have the system administrator reset
password received. browser by using
the login ID or password.
Userid is '%1' from an invalid login ID
WEB browser at IP or password.
address %2.(%1 =
user ID; %2 = IP
address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
40000013-00000000 Remote access Error A user has 1. Make sure that the correct login ID
attempt failed. attempted to log in and password are being used.
Invalid userid or from a Telnet
2. Have the system administrator reset
password received. session by using an
the login ID or password.
Userid is '%1' from invalid login ID or
TELNET client at IP password.
address %2.(%1 =
user ID; %2 = IP
address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
40000014-00000000 The [arg1] on system Info The specified user No action; information only.
[arg2] cleared by has deleted system
user [arg3]. log events or audit
log events.
40000015-00000000 IMM reset was Info The Integrated No action; information only.
initiated by user Management
%1.(%1 = user ID) Module has been
reset. The logs
provide additional
details.
40000016-00000000 ENET[0] Info The DHCP server No action; information only.
DHCP-HSTN=%1, has assigned an
DN=%2, IP@=%3, IMM IP address
SN=%4, GW@=%5, and configuration.
DNS1@=%6.(%1 =
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.Hostname;
%2 =
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.DomainName;
%3 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.IPv4Address;
%4 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.SubnetMask;
%5 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 =
IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 179

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000017-00000000 ENET[0] Info An IMM IP No action; information only.
IP-Cfg:HstName=%1, address and
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, configuration have
GW@=%4.(%1 = been assigned
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.Hostname;
using client data.
%2 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.IPv4Address;
%3 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.SubnetMask;
%4 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.DefaultGatewayAddress)
40000018-00000000 LAN: Ethernet[0] Info The IMM Ethernet No action; information only.
interface is no longer interface has been
active. disabled.
40000019-00000000 LAN: Ethernet[0] Info The IMM Ethernet No action; information only.
interface is now interface has been
active. enabled.
4000001a-00000000 DHCP setting Info The specified user No action; information only.
changed to [arg1] by has changed the
user [arg2]. DHCP setting of
the Integrated
Management
Module external
network interface.
4000001b-00000000 Management Info The specified user No action; information only.
Controller [arg1]: has restored the
Configuration Integrated
restored from a file Management
by user [arg2]. Module (IMM)
configuration from
a previously saved
configuration file.
Some configuration
settings might
require that the
IMM be restarted
before they take
effect.

180 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000001c-00000000 Watchdog %1 Screen Error An If there was no operating-system error,
Capture operating-system complete the following steps until the
Occurred.(%1 = OS error has occurred, problem is solved:
Watchdog or Loader and the screen 1. Reconfigure the watchdog timer to a
Watchdog) capture was higher value.
successful.
2. Make sure that the IMM Ethernet
over USB interface is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or cdc_ether
device driver for the operating
system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the installed
operating system.
If there was an operating-system error,
check the integrity of the installed
operating system.
4000001d-00000000 Watchdog %1 Failed Error An Complete the following steps until the
to Capture operating-system problem is solved:
Screen.(%1 = OS error has occurred, 1. Reconfigure the watchdog timer to a
Watchdog or Loader and the screen higher value.
Watchdog) capture failed.
2. Make sure that the IMM Ethernet
over USB interface is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or cdc_ether
device driver for the operating
system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the installed
operating system.
6. Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster solutions
require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the
device is part of a cluster solution,
verify that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster solution
before you update the code.
4000001e-00000000 Running the backup Error The IMM was Update the IMM firmware.
IMM main unable to run the Important: Some cluster solutions
application. primary IMM require specific code levels or
image and has coordinated code updates. If the device
resorted to running is part of a cluster solution, verify that
the backup image. the latest level of code is supported for
the cluster solution before you update
the code.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 181

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000001f-00000000 Please ensure that Error The server does Update the IMM firmware to a version
the IMM is flashed not support the that the server supports.
with the correct installed IMM Important: Some cluster solutions
firmware. The IMM firmware version. require specific code levels or
is unable to match coordinated code updates. If the device
its firmware to the is part of a cluster solution, verify that
server. the latest level of code is supported for
the cluster solution before you update
the code.
4000002a-00000000 [arg1] Firmware Error This message is for No action; information only.
mismatch internal to the use case where
system [arg2]. Please a specific type of
attempt to flash the firmware mismatch
[arg3] firmware. has been detected.
4000002b-00000000 Domain name set to Info Domain name set No action; information only.
[arg1]. by user.
4000002c-00000000 Domain Source Info Domain source No action; information only.
changed to [arg1] by changed by user.
user [arg2].
4000002d-00000000 DDNS setting Info DDNS setting No action; information only.
changed to [arg1] by changed by user.
user [arg2].
4000002e-00000000 DDNS registration Info DDNS registration No action; information only.
successful. The and values.
domain name is
[arg1].
4000002f-00000000 IPv6 enabled by user Info IPv6 protocol is No action; information only.
[arg1]. enabled by user.
40000020-00000000 IMM reset was Info The IMM has been No action; information only.
caused by restoring reset because a
default values. user has restored
the configuration
to its default
settings.
40000021-00000000 IMM clock has been Info The IMM clock has No action; information only.
set from NTP server been set to the date
%1.(%1 = and time that is
IBM_NTPService.ElementName) provided by the
Network Time
Protocol server.

182 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000022-00000000 SSL data in the IMM Error There is a problem 1. Make sure that the certificate that
configuration data is with the certificate you are importing is correct.
invalid. Clearing that has been
2. Try to import the certificate again.
configuration data imported into the
region and disabling IMM. The
SSL+H25. imported certificate
must contain a
public key that
corresponds to the
key pair that was
previously
generated through
the Generate a
New Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
40000023-00000000 Flash of %1 from %2 Info A user has No action; information only.
succeeded for user successfully
%3.(%1 = updated one of the
CIM_ManagedElement.ElementName;
following firmware
%2 = Web or components:
LegacyCLI; %3 = v IMM main
user ID) application
v IMM boot ROM
v Server firmware
(UEFI)
v Diagnostics
v System power
backplane
v Remote
expansion
enclosure power
backplane
v Integrated
service processor
v Remote
expansion
enclosure
processor
40000024-00000000 Flash of %1 from %2 Info An attempt to Try to update the firmware again.
failed for user update a firmware
%3.(%1 = component from
the interface and
CIM_ManagedElement.ElementName;
%2 = Web or IP address has
LegacyCLI; %3 = failed.
user ID)

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 183

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000025-00000000 The Chassis Event Info The IMM event log To avoid losing older log entries, save
Log (CEL) on system is 75% full. When the log as a text file and clear the log.
%1 is 75% full.(%1 = the log is full,
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)
older log entries
are replaced by
newer ones.
40000026-00000000 The Chassis Event Info The IMM event log To avoid losing older log entries, save
Log (CEL) on system is full. When the the log as a text file and clear the log.
%1 is 100% full.(%1 log is full, older
= log entries are
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)
replaced by newer
ones.
40000027-00000000 %1 Platform Error A Platform 1. Reconfigure the watchdog timer to a
Watchdog Timer Watchdog Timer higher value.
expired for %2.(%1 = Expired event has
2. Make sure that the IMM Ethernet
OS Watchdog or occurred.
over USB interface is enabled.
Loader Watchdog;
%2 = OS Watchdog 3. Reinstall the RNDIS or cdc_ether
or Loader Watchdog) device driver for the operating
system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the installed
operating system.
40000028-00000000 IMM Test Alert Info A user has No action; information only.
Generated by %1.(%1 generated a test
= user ID) alert from the
IMM.
40000029-00000000 Security: Userid: '%1' Error A user has 1. Make sure that the correct login ID
had %2 login failures exceeded the and password are being used.
from an SSH client maximum number
2. Have the system administrator reset
at IP address %3.(%1 of unsuccessful
the login ID or password.
= user ID; %2 = login attempts
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailuresfrom SSH and has
(currently set to 5 in been prevented
the firmware); %3 = from logging in for
IP address, the lockout period.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
40000030-00000000 IPv6 disabled by Info IPv6 protocol is No action; information only.
user [arg1]. disabled by user.
40000031-00000000 IPv6 static IP Info IPv6 static address No action; information only.
configuration assignment method
enabled by user is enabled by user.
[arg1].
40000032-00000000 IPv6 DHCP enabled Info IPv6 DHCP No action; information only.
by user [arg1]. assignment method
is enabled by user.
40000033-00000000 IPv6 stateless Info IPv6 stateless No action; information only.
auto-configuration auto-assignment
enabled by user method is enabled
[arg1]. by user.

184 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000034-00000000 IPv6 static IP Info IPv6 static No action; information only.
configuration assignment method
disabled by user is disabled by user.
[arg1].
40000035-00000000 IPv6 DHCP disabled Info IPv6 DHCP No action; information only.
by user [arg1]. assignment method
is disabled by user.
40000036-00000000 IPv6 stateless Info IPv6 stateless No action; information only.
auto-configuration auto-assignment
disabled by user method is disabled
[arg1]. by user.
40000037-00000000 ENET[[arg1]] Info IPv6 Link Local No action; information only.
IPv6- address is active.
LinkLocal:HstName=[arg2],
IP@=[arg3]
,Pref=[arg4].
40000038-00000000 ENET[[arg1]] Info IPv6 Static address No action; information only.
IPv6- is active.
Static:HstName=[arg2],
IP@=[arg3],Pref=[arg4],
GW@=[arg5].
40000039-00000000 ENET[[arg1]] Info IPv6 No action; information only.
DHCPv6- DHCP-assigned
HSTN=[arg2], address is active.
DN=[arg3],
IP@=[arg4],
Pref=[arg5].
4000003a-00000000 IPv6 static address of Info A user modifies No action; information only.
network interface the IPv6 static
modified from [arg1] address of a
to [arg2] by user Management
[arg3]. Controller.
4000003b-00000000 DHCPv6 failure, no Warning S DHCP6 server No action; information only.
IP address assigned. fails to assign an
IP address to a
Management
Controller.
4000003c-00000000 Platform Watchdog Error An implementation No action; information only.
Timer expired for has detected an OS
[arg1]. Loader Watchdog
Timer Expired.
4000003d-00000000 Telnet port number Info A user has No action; information only.
changed from [arg1] modified the telnet
to [arg2] by user port number.
[arg3].
4000003e-00000000 SSH port number Info A user has No action; information only.
changed from [arg1] modified the SSH
to [arg2] by user port number.
[arg3].

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 185

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000003f-00000000 Web-HTTP port Info A user has No action; information only.
number changed modified the Web
from [arg1] to [arg2] HTTP port
by user [arg3]. number.
40000040-00000000 Web-HTTPS port Info A user has No action; information only.
number changed modified the Web
from [arg1] to [arg2] HTTPS port
by user [arg3]. number.
40000041-00000000 CIM/XML HTTP Info A user has No action; information only.
port number modified the CIM
changed from [arg1] HTTP port
to [arg2] by user number.
[arg3].
40000042-00000000 CIM/XML HTTPS Info A user has No action; information only.
port number modified the CIM
changed from [arg1] HTTPS port
to [arg2] by user number.
[arg3].
40000043-00000000 SNMP Agent port Info A user has No action; information only.
number changed modified the
from [arg1] to [arg2] SNMP Agent port
by user [arg3]. number.
40000044-00000000 SNMP Traps port Info A user has No action; information only.
number changed modified the
from [arg1] to [arg2] SNMP Traps port
by user [arg3]. number.
40000045-00000000 Syslog port number Info A user has No action; information only.
changed from [arg1] modified the
to [arg2] by user Syslog receiver
[arg3]. port number.
40000046-00000000 Remote Presence Info A user has No action; information only.
port number modified the
changed from [arg1] Remote Presence
to [arg2] by user port number.
[arg3].
40000047-00000000 LED [arg1] state Info A user has No action; information only.
changed to [arg2] by modified the state
[arg3]. of an LED.
40000048-00000000 Inventory data Info Something has No action; information only.
changed for device caused the physical
[arg1], new device inventory to
data hash=[arg2], change.
new master data
hash=[arg3].
40000049-00000000 SNMP [arg1] enabled Info A user enabled No action; information only.
by user [arg2]. SNMPv1 or
SNMPv3 or Traps.

186 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000004a-00000000 SNMP [arg1] Info A user disabled No action; information only.
disabled by user SNMPv1 or
[arg2] . SNMPv3 or Traps.
4000004b-00000000 SNMPv1 [arg1] set Info A user changed the No action; information only.
by user [arg2]: SNMP community
Name=[arg3], string.
AccessType=[arg4],
Address=[arg5].
4000004c-00000000 LDAP Server Info A user changed the No action; information only.
configuration set by LDAP server
user [arg1]: configuration.
SelectionMethod=[arg2],
DomainName=[arg3],
Server1=[arg4],
Server2=[arg5],
Server3=[arg6],
Server4=[arg7].
4000004d-00000000 LDAP set by user Info A user configured No action; information only.
[arg1]: an LDAP
RootDN=[arg2], Miscellaneous
UIDSearchAttribute=[arg3], setting.
BindingMethod=[arg4],
EnhancedRBS=[arg5],
TargetName=[arg6],
GroupFilter=[arg7],
GroupAttribute=[arg8],
LoginAttribute=[arg9].
4000004e-00000000 Serial Redirection set Info A user configured No action; information only.
by user [arg1]: the Serial Port
Mode=[arg2], mode.
BaudRate=[arg3],
StopBits=[arg4],
Parity=[arg5],
SessionTerminateSequence=[arg6].
4000004f-00000000 Date and Time set by Info A user configured No action; information only.
user [arg1]: the Date and Time
Date=[arg2], settings.
Time-[arg3], DST
Auto-adjust=[arg4],
Timezone=[arg5].
40000050-00000000 Server General Info A user configured No action; information only.
Settings set by user the Location
[arg1]: Name=[arg2], setting.
Contact=[arg3],
Location=[arg4],
Room=[arg5],
RackID=[arg6], Rack
U-position=[arg7].
40000051-00000000 Server Power Off Info A user configured No action; information only.
Delay set to [arg1] the Server Power
by user [arg2]. Off Delay.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 187

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000052-00000000 Server [arg1] Info A user configured No action; information only.
scheduled for [arg2] a Server Power
at [arg3] by user action at a specific
[arg4]. time.
40000053-00000000 Server [arg1] Info A user configured No action; information only.
scheduled for every a recurring Server
[arg2] at [arg3] by Power Action.
user [arg4].
40000054-00000000 Server [arg1] [arg2] Info A user cleared a No action; information only.
cleared by user Server Power
[arg3]. Action.
40000055-00000000 Synchronize time Info A user configured No action; information only.
setting by user the Date and Time
[arg1]: Mode=[arg2], synchronize
NTPServerHost=[arg3]:[arg4],NTPUpdateFrequency=[arg5].
settings
40000056-00000000 SMTP Server set by Info A user configured No action; information only.
user [arg1] to the SMTP server.
[arg2]:[arg3].
40000057-00000000 Telnet [arg1] by user Info A user enables or No action; information only.
[arg2]. disables Telnet
services.
40000058-00000000 DNS servers set by Info A user configures No action; information only.
user [arg1]: the DNS servers.
UseAdditionalServers=[arg2],
PreferredDNStype=[arg3],
IPv4Server1=[arg4],
IPv4Server2=[arg5],
IPv4Server3=[arg6],
IPv6Server1=[arg7],
IPv6Server2=[arg8],
IPv6Server3=[arg9].
40000059-00000000 LAN over USB Info A user configured No action; information only.
[arg1] by user [arg2]. USB-LAN.
4000005a-00000000 LAN over USB Port Info A user configured No action; information only.
Forwarding set by USB-LAN port
user [arg1]: forwarding.
ExternalPort=[arg2],
USB-LAN
port=[arg3].
4000005b-00000000 Secure Web services Info A user enables or No action; information only.
(HTTPS) [arg1] by disables Secure
user [arg2]. web services.
4000005c-00000000 Secure Info A user enables or No action; information only.
CIM/XML(HTTPS) disables Secure
[arg1] by user [arg2]. CIM/XML
services.
4000005d-00000000 Secure LDAP [arg1] Info A user enables or No action; information only.
by user [arg2]. disables Secure
LDAP services.

188 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000005e-00000000 SSH [arg1] by user Info A user enables or No action; information only.
[arg2]. disables SSH
services.
4000005f-00000000 Server timeouts set Info A user configures No action; information only.
by user [arg1]: Server Timeouts.
EnableOSWatchdog=[arg2],
OSWatchdogTimout=[arg3],
EnableLoaderWatchdog=[arg4],
LoaderTimeout=[arg5].
40000060-00000000 License key for Info A user installs No action; information only.
[arg1] added by user License Key.
[arg2].
40000061-00000000 License key for Info A user removes a No action; information only.
[arg1] removed by License Key.
user [arg2].
40000062-00000000 Global Login Info A user changes the No action; information only.
General Settings set Global Login
by user [arg1]: General Settings.
AuthenticationMethod=[arg2],
LockoutPeriod=[arg3],
SessionTimeout=[arg4].
40000063-00000000 Global Login Info A user changes the No action; information only.
Account Security set Global Login
by user [arg1]: Account Security
PasswordRequired=[arg2], Settings to Legacy.
PasswordExpirationPeriod=[arg3],
MinimumPasswordReuseCycle=[arg4],
MinimumPasswordLength=[arg5],
MinimumPasswordChangeInterval=[arg6],
MaxmumLoginFailures=[arg7],
LockoutAfterMaxFailures=[arg8],
MinimumDifferentCharacters=[arg9],
DefaultIDExpired=[arg10],
ChangePasswordFirstAccess=[arg11].
40000064-00000000 User [arg1] created. Info A user account was No action; information only.
created.
40000065-00000000 User [arg1] removed. Info A user account was No action; information only.
deleted.
40000066-00000000 User [arg1] modified. Info A user account was No action; information only.
changed.
40000067-00000000 User [arg1] role set Info A user account role No action; information only.
to [arg2]. assigned.
40000068-00000000 User [arg1] custom Info User account No action; information only.
privileges set: [arg2]. priveleges
assigned.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 189

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000069-00000000 User [arg1] for Info User account No action; information only.
SNMPv3 set: SNMPv3 settings
AuthenticationProtocol=[arg2], changed.
PrivacyProtocol=[arg3],
AccessType=[arg4],
HostforTraps=[arg5].
4000006a-00000000 SSH Client key Info User locally No action; information only.
added for user defined an SSH
[arg1]. Client key.
4000006b-00000000 SSH Client key Info User imported an No action; information only.
imported for user SSH Client key.
[arg1] from [arg2].
4000006c-00000000 SSH Client key Info User removed an No action; information only.
removed from user SSH Client key.
[arg1].
4000006d-00000000 Management Info A user saves a No action; information only.
Controller [arg1]: Management
Configuration saved Controller
to a file by user configuration to a
[arg2]. file.
4000006e-00000000 Alert Configuration Info A user changes the No action; information only.
Global Event Global Event
Notification set by Notification
user [arg1]: settings.
RetryLimit=[arg2],
RetryInterval=[arg3],
EntryInterval=[arg4].
4000006f-00000000 Alert Recipient Info A user adds or No action; information only.
Number [arg1] updates an Alert
updated: Recipient.
Name=[arg2],
DeliveryMethod=[arg3],
Address=[arg4],
IncludeLog=[arg5],
Enabled=[arg6],
EnabledAlerts=[arg7],
AllowedFilters=[arg8].
40000070-00000000 SNMP Traps enabled Info A user enabled the No action; information only.
by user [arg1]: SNMP Traps
EnabledAlerts=[arg2], configuration.
AllowedFilters=[arg3].
40000071-00000000 The power cap value Info Power Cap values No action; information only.
changed from [arg1] changed by user.
watts to [arg2] watts
by user [arg3].
40000072-00000000 The minimum power Info Minimum Power No action; information only.
cap value changed Cap value
from [arg1] watts to changed.
[arg2] watts.

190 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000073-00000000 The maximum Info Maximum Power No action; information only.
power cap value Cap value changed
changed from [arg1]
watts to [arg2] watts.
40000074-00000000 The soft minimum Info Soft Minimum No action; information only.
power cap value Power Cap value
changed from [arg1] changed.
watts to [arg2] watts.
40000075-00000000 The measured power Warning Power exceeded No action; information only.
value exceeded the cap.
power cap value.
40000076-00000000 The new minimum Warning Minimum Power No action; information only.
power cap value Cap exceeds Power
exceeded the power Cap.
cap value.
40000077-00000000 Power capping was Info Power capping No action; information only.
activated by user activated by user.
[arg1].
40000078-00000000 Power capping was Info Power capping No action; information only.
deactivated by user deactivated by
[arg1]. user.
40000079-00000000 Static Power Savings Info Static Power No action; information only.
mode has been Savings mode
turned on by user turned on by user.
[arg1].
4000007a-00000000 Static Power Savings Info Static Power No action; information only.
mode has been Savings mode
turned off by user turned off by user.
[arg1].
4000007b-00000000 Dynamic Power Info Dynamic Power No action; information only.
Savings mode has Savings mode
been turned on by turned on by user.
user [arg1].
4000007c-00000000 Dynamic Power Info Dynamic Power No action; information only.
Savings mode has Savings mode
been turned off by turned off by user.
user [arg1].
4000007d-00000000 Power cap and Info Power cap and No action; information only.
external throttling external throttling
occurred. occurred.
4000007e-00000000 External throttling Info External throttling No action; information only.
occurred. occurred.
4000007f-00000000 Power cap throttling Info Power cap No action; information only.
occurred. throttling occurred.
40000080-00000000 Remote Control Info Remote Control No action; information only.
session started by session started
user [arg1] in [arg2]
mode.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 191

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
40000081-00000000 PXE boot requested Info PXE boot No action; information only.
by user [arg1]. requested.
40000082-00000000 The measured power Info Power exceeded No action; information only.
value has returned cap recovered.
below the power cap
value.
40000083-00000000 The new minimum Info Minimum Power No action; information only.
power cap value has Cap exceeds Power
returned below the Cap recovered
power cap value.
40000084-00000000 IMM firmware Info A mismatch of No action; information only.
mismatch between IMM firmware has
nodes [arg1] and been detected
[arg2]. Please between nodes.
attempt to flash the
IMM firmware to the
same level on all
nodes.
40000085-00000000 FPGA firmware Error A mismatch of No action; information only.
mismatch between FPGA firmware
nodes [arg1] and has been detected
[arg2]. Please between nodes.
attempt to flash the
FPGA firmware to
the same level on all
nodes.
40000086-00000000 Test Call Home Info Test Call Home No action; information only.
Generated by user generated by user.
[arg1].
40000087-00000000 Manual Call Home Info Manual Call Home No action; information only.
by user [arg1]: by user.
[arg2].
40000088-00000000 Management Info This message is for No action; information only.
Controller [arg1]: the use case where
Configuration a user restores a
restoration from a Management
file by user [arg2] Controller
completed. configuration from
a file and it
completes.
40000089-00000000 Management Info This message is for No action; information only.
Controller [arg1]: the use case where
Configuration a user restores a
restoration from a Management
file by user [arg2] Controller
failed to complete. configuration from
a file and the
restoration fails to
complete.

192 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 13. IMM2 error messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
4000008a-00000000 Management Info This message is for No action; information only.
Controller [arg1]: the use case where
Configuration a user restores a
restoration from a Management
file by user [arg2] Controller
failed to start. configuration from
a file and the
restoration fails to
start.
4000008b-00000000 One or more of the Info This message is for No action; information only.
Storage Management the use case where
IP addresses has an IP address for
changed. the Storage
Management has
changed.

DSA messages
As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages are displayed on the screen
and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text message indicates that a problem
has been detected and provides the action you should take as a result of the text
message.

The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might
generate and suggested actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the
suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the column.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 193

Table 14. DSA messages

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-801-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted Internal program 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

194 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress Aborted System resource 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test availability error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For the latest level of
firmware, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1
MIGR-4JTS2T and select your system to
display a matrix of available firmware.
For more information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Make sure that the system firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For the latest level of
firmware, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1
MIGR-4JTS2T and select your system to
display a matrix of available firmware.
For more information, see “Updating the
firmware” on page 71.
9. Run the test again.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 195

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-901-xxx CPU CPU Stress Failed Test failure. 1. Turn off and restart the system if
Test necessary to recover from a hung state.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

196 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-801-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: the from the power source. You must
IMM returned disconnect the system from ac power to
an incorrect reset the IMM2.
response length.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 197

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-802-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: the test from the power source. You must
cannot be disconnect the system from ac power to
completed for an reset the IMM2.
unknown
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
reason.
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

198 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-803-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: the from the power source. You must
node is busy; try disconnect the system from ac power to
later. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 199

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-804-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: invalid from the power source. You must
command. disconnect the system from ac power to
reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

200 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-805-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: invalid from the power source. You must
command for disconnect the system from ac power to
the given LUN. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 201

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-806-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: timeout from the power source. You must
while processing disconnect the system from ac power to
the command. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

202 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-807-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: out of from the power source. You must
space. disconnect the system from ac power to
reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 203

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-808-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: from the power source. You must
reservation disconnect the system from ac power to
canceled or reset the IMM2.
invalid
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
reservation ID.
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

204 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-809-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: request from the power source. You must
data was disconnect the system from ac power to
truncated. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 205

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-810-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: request from the power source. You must
data length is disconnect the system from ac power to
invalid. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

206 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-811-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: request from the power source. You must
data field length disconnect the system from ac power to
limit is reset the IMM2.
exceeded.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 207

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-812-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C Test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: a from the power source. You must
parameter is out disconnect the system from ac power to
of range. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

208 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-813-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: cannot from the power source. You must
return the disconnect the system from ac power to
number of reset the IMM2.
requested data
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
bytes.
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 209

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-814-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: from the power source. You must
requested sensor, disconnect the system from ac power to
data, or record is reset the IMM2.
not present.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

210 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-815-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: invalid from the power source. You must
data field in the disconnect the system from ac power to
request. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 211

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-816-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: the from the power source. You must
command is disconnect the system from ac power to
illegal for the reset the IMM2.
specified sensor
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
or record type.
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

212 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-817-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: a from the power source. You must
command disconnect the system from ac power to
response could reset the IMM2.
not be provided.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 213

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-818-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: cannot from the power source. You must
execute a disconnect the system from ac power to
duplicated reset the IMM2.
request.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

214 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-819-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: a from the power source. You must
command disconnect the system from ac power to
response could reset the IMM2.
not be provided;
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the SDR
the power source and turn on the system.
repository is in
update mode. 3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 215

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-820-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: a from the power source. You must
command disconnect the system from ac power to
response could reset the IMM2.
not be provided;
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the device is in
the power source and turn on the system.
firmware update
mode. 3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM2
firmware are at the latest level.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

216 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-821-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: a from the power source. You must
command disconnect the system from ac power to
response could reset the IMM2.
not be provided;
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
IMM
the power source and turn on the system.
initialization is
in progress. 3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 217

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-822-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: the from the power source. You must
destination is disconnect the system from ac power to
unavailable. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

218 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-823-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test aborted: cannot from the power source. You must
execute the disconnect the system from ac power to
command; reset the IMM2.
insufficient
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
privilege level.
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 219

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2 2
166-824-xxx IMM IMM I C Aborted IMM I C test 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test canceled: cannot from the power source. You must
execute the disconnect the system from ac power to
command. reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

220 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2
166-901-xxx IMM IMM I C Failed IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test failure in RTMM from the power source. You must
bus (BUS 0). disconnect the system from ac power to
reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-OPTN.
166-904-xxx IMM IMM I2C Failed IMM indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test failure in from the power source. You must
PCA9545 (I2C disconnect the system from ac power to
I/O Expander) reset the IMM2.
bus (BUS 3).
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-OPTN.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 221

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2
166-905-xxx IMM IMM I C Failed IMM Indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test failure in the from the power source. You must
PSU 1 bus (BUS disconnect the system from ac power to
4). reset the IMM2.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-OPTN.
166-907-xxx IMM IMM I2C Failed IMM Indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test failure in the from the power source. You must
LM75 (Thermal disconnect the system from ac power to
Sensor) bus reset the IMM2.
(BUS 6).
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-OPTN.

222 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
2
166-908-xxx IMM IMM I C Failed IMM Indicates 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test failure in the from the power source. You must
PCA9539 (I2C disconnect the system from ac power to
I/O Expander) reset the IMM2.
bus (BUS 7).
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to
the power source and turn on the system.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the IMM2 firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-OPTN.
201-801-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test the system UEFI
2. Run the test again.
programmed the
memory 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
controller with the latest level. The installed firmware
an invalid CBAR level is shown in the DSA event log in the
address Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 223

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-802-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test the end address
2. Run the test again.
in the E820
function is less 3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in
than 16 MB. the Setup utility.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-803-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test could not enable
2. Run the test again.
the processor
cache. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

224 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-804-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test the memory
2. Run the test again.
controller buffer
request failed. 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-805-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test the memory
2. Run the test again.
controller
display/ alter 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
write operation the latest level. The installed firmware
was not level is shown in the DSA event log in the
completed. Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 225

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-806-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test the memory
2. Run the test again.
controller fast
scrub operation 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
was not the latest level. The installed firmware
completed. level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-807-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test the memory
2. Run the test again.
controller buffer
free request 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
failed. the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

226 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-808-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test memory
2. Run the test again.
controller
display/ alter 3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
buffer execute the latest level. The installed firmware
error. level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-809-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test canceled 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test program error:
2. Run the test again.
operation
running fast 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
scrub. latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 227

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-810-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Test stopped: 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Test unknown error
2. Run the test again.
code xxx
received in 3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
COMMONEXIT latest level. For the latest level of DSA
procedure. code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

228 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-901-xxx Memory Memory Failed Test failure: 1. Turn off the system and disconnect it
Test single-bit error, from the power source.
failing DIMM z.
2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn
on the system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility
(see “Using the Setup utility” on page
75).
9. Run the test again.
10. Replace the failing DIMM.
11. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility
see “Using the Setup utility” on page
75).
12. Run the test again.
13. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 229

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-801-xxx Memory Memory Aborted Internal program 1. Turn off and restart the system.
Stress Test error.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in the
Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
4. Run the test again.
5. Turn off and restart the system if
necessary to recover from a hung state.
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify
the specific failing DIMM.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-802-xxx Memory Memory Failed General error: 1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by
Stress Test memory size is checking the Available System Memory in
insufficient to the Resource Utilization section of the
run the test. DSA event log. If necessary, enable all
memory in the Setup utility (see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71).
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Run the standard memory test to validate
all memory.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

230 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-901-xxx Memory Memory Failed Test failure. 1. Run the standard memory test to validate
Stress Test all memory.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it
from power.
4. Reseat the DIMMs.
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn
on the system.
6. Run the test again.
7. Run the standard memory test to validate
all memory.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 231

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-801-xxx Optical v Verify Aborted Unable to 1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
Drive Media communicate latest level. For the latest level of DSA
Installed with the device code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
driver. support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
v Read/
Write DSA.
Test 2. Run the test again.
v Self-Test 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for
loose or broken connections or damage
Messages to the cable. Replace the cable if it is
and actions damaged.
apply to all
4. Run the test again.
three tests.
5. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to http://
www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the system firmware is at
the latest level. The installed firmware
level is shown in the DSA event log in
the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

232 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-802-xxx Optical v Verify Aborted The media tray 1. Close the media tray and wait 15
Drive Media is open. seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive
Write and wait for 15 seconds for the media to
Test be recognized.
v Self-Test 4. Run the test again.
Messages 5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for
and actions loose or broken connections or damage
apply to all to the cable. Replace the cable if it is
three tests. damaged.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
latest level. For the latest level of DSA
code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
8. Run the test again.
9. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to http://
www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
10. Run the test again.
11. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
12. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-803-xxx Optical v Verify Failed The disc might 1. Wait for the system activity to stop.
Drive Media be in use by the
2. Run the test again
Installed system.
3. Turn off and restart the system.
v Read/
4. Run the test again.
Write
Test 5. Replace the DVD drive.
v Self-Test 6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
Messages at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
and actions support/supportsite.wss/
apply to all docdisplay?brandind=5000008
three tests. &lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 233

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-901-xxx Optical v Verify Aborted Drive media is 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the DVD drive or
Drive Media not detected. try a new media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for
Write loose or broken connections or damage to
Test the cable. Replace the cable if it is
v Self-Test damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting
apply to all information, go to http://www.ibm.com/
three tests. support/docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-
41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-902-xxx Optical v Verify Failed Read 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a
Drive Media miscompare. new media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for
Write loose or broken connections or damage to
Test the cable. Replace the cable if it is
v Self-Test damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting
apply to all information, go to http://www.ibm.com/
three tests. support/docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-
41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

234 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-903-xxx Optical v Verify Aborted Could not access 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a
Drive Media the drive. new media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for
Write loose or broken connections or damage
Test to the cable. Replace the cable if it is
v Self-Test damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the
apply to all latest level. For the latest level of DSA
three tests. code, go to http://www.ibm.com/
support/docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-
DSA.
6. Run the test again.
7. For additional troubleshooting
information, go to http://
www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting
information at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 235

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-904-xxx Optical v Verify Failed A read error 1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a
Drive Media occurred. new media, and wait for 15 seconds.
Installed 2. Run the test again.
v Read/ 3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for
Write loose or broken connections or damage to
Test the cable. Replace the cable if it is
v Self-Test damaged.
4. Run the test again.
Messages
and actions 5. For additional troubleshooting
apply to all information, go to http://www.ibm.com/
three tests. support/docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-
41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-901-xxx Ethernet Test Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device Control is at the latest level. The installed
Registers firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

236 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-901-xxx Ethernet Test MII Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device Registers is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-902-xxx Ethernet Test Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device EEPROM is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 237

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-903-xxx Ethernet Test Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device Internal is at the latest level. The installed
Memory firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the
PCI Hardware section of the DSA event
log. If the Ethernet device is sharing
interrupts, if possible, use the Setup
utility see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 75) to assign a unique interrupt to
the device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

238 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-904-xxx Ethernet Test Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device Interrupt is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the
PCI Hardware section of the DSA event
log. If the Ethernet device is sharing
interrupts, if possible, use the Setup
utility see “Using the Setup utility” on
page 75) to assign a unique interrupt to
the device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 239

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-905-xxx Ethernet Test Loop Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device back at is at the latest level. The installed
MAC firmware level is shown in the DSA event
Layer log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-906-xxx Ethernet Test Loop Failed 1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and
Device back at make sure that the cable type and
Physical connection are correct.
Layer
2. Make sure that the component firmware
is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
3. Run the test again.
4. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

240 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 14. DSA messages (continued)

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
v Go to the IBM support web site at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for technical information,
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-907-xxx Ethernet Test LEDs Failed 1. Make sure that the component firmware
Device is at the latest level. The installed
firmware level is shown in the DSA event
log in the Firmware/VPD section for this
component. For more information, see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,
replace the adapter. Check the PCI
Information and Network Settings
information in the DSA event log to
determine the physical location of the
failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web
site for more troubleshooting information
at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.

Troubleshooting by symptom
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms.

If you cannot find a solution to the problem in these tables, see “DSA messages”
on page 193 for information about testing the server and “Running the DSA
Preboot diagnostic programs” on page 120 for additional information about
running DSA Preboot program that is stored in integrated USB memory on the
server. For additional information to help you solve problems, see “Start here” on
page 99.

If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is
not working, complete the following steps before you use the troubleshooting
tables:
1. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel; if it is lit, check
the light path diagnostics LEDs (see “Light path diagnostics” on page 106).
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.
3. Run IBM Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to determine whether the server is
running correctly (for information about using DSA, see “DSA messages” on
page 193.
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 241

CD/DVD drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive 1. Make sure that:
is not recognized.
v The SATA connector to which the CD or DVD drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The correct device driver is installed for the CD or DVD drive.
2. Run the CD or DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. CD or DVD drive
b. CD or DVD drive cable
4. Replace the components listed in step 3 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
A CD or DVD is not working 1. Clean the CD or DVD.
correctly.
2. Replace the CD or DVD with new CD or DVD media.
3. Run the CD or DVD drive diagnostic programs (see “DSA messages” on page
193).
4. Reseat the CD or DVD drive (see “Removing a CD/DVD drive” on page 305
and “Installing an optional CD/DVD drive” on page 306).
5. Replace the CD or DVD drive.
The CD or DVD drive tray is 1. Make sure that the server is turned on.
not working.
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
3. Reseat the CD or DVD drive (see “Removing a CD/DVD drive” on page 305
and “Installing an optional CD/DVD drive” on page 306).
4. Replace the CD or DVD drive.

242 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Hypervisor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
If an optional embedded 1. Make sure that the optional embedded hypervisor flash device is selected on
hypervisor flash device is not the boot manager (<F12> Select Boot Device) at startup.
listed in the expected boot
2. Make sure that the embedded hypervisor flash device is seated in the
order, does not appear in the
connector correctly (see “Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device”
list of boot devices, or a similar
on page 318 and “Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on
problem has occurred.
page 319).
3. See the documentation that comes with the optional embedded hypervisor
flash device for setup and configuration information.
4. Make sure that other software works on the server.

General problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check whether a component is
a consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
A cover latch is broken, an LED If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
is not working, or a similar trained service technician (see Chapter 6, “Removing and replacing components,”
problem has occurred. on page 273 to determine whether the part is a consumable, structural, or FRU
component).
The server cover was removed Replace the server cover and restart the server.
while running and the server
shut off.
The server is hung while the 1. See hl1AA_t_nx_boot_failure for more information.
screen is on. Cannot start the
2. See “Recovering the server firmware” on page 261 for more information.
Setup utility by pressing F1.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 243

Hard disk drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
Not all drives are recognized by Remove the drive that is indicated by DSA (see “Removing hot-swap drives” on
the DSA hard disk drive page 302 or “Removing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive” on page 304); then,
diagnostic test. run the hard disk drive diagnostic test again (see “DSA messages” on page 193). If
the remaining drives are recognized, replace the drive that you removed with a
new one.
The server stops responding Remove the drive that is indicated by DSA (see “Removing hot-swap drives” on
during the hard disk drive page 302 or “Removing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive” on page 304); then,
diagnostic test. run the hard disk drive diagnostic test again (see “DSA messages” on page 193). If
the remaining drives are recognized, replace the drive that you removed with a
new one.
A hard disk drive has failed, Replace the failed hard disk drive.
and the associated yellow hard
disk drive status LED is lit.

244 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
A newly installed hard disk 1. Observe the associated yellow hard disk drive status LED. If the LED is lit, it
drive is not recognized. indicates a drive fault.
2. If the LED is lit, remove the drive from the bay, wait 45 seconds, and reinsert
the drive, making sure that the drive assembly connects to the hard disk drive
backplane.
3. Observe the associated green hard disk drive activity LED and the yellow
status LED:
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the yellow status LED is not lit, the
drive is recognized by the controller and is working correctly. Run the DSA
hard disk drive test to determine whether the drive is detected.
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the yellow status LED is flashing
slowly, the drive is recognized by the controller and is rebuilding.
v If neither LED is lit or flashing, check the hard disk drive backplane (go to
step “Hard disk drive problems” on page 244).
v If the green activity LED is flashing and the yellow status LED is lit, replace
the drive. If the activity of the LEDs remains the same, go to step “Hard
disk drive problems” on page 244. If the activity of the LEDs changes, return
to step 1.
4. Make sure that the hard disk drive backplane is correctly seated. When it is
correctly seated, the drive assemblies correctly connect to the backplane
without bowing or causing movement of the backplane.
5. Reseat the backplane power cable and repeat steps 1 through 3.
6. Reseat the backplane signal cable and repeat steps 1 through 3.
7. Suspect the backplane signal cable or the backplane:
a. Replace the affected backplane signal cable.
b. Replace the affected backplane.
8. Run the DSA tests for the SAS/SATA adapter and hard disk drives (see
“Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs” on page 120).
v If the adapter passes the test but the drives are not recognized, replace the
backplane signal cable and run the tests again.
v Replace the backplane.
v If the adapter fails the test, disconnect the backplane signal cable from the
adapter and run the tests again.
v If the adapter fails the test, replace the adapter.
9. See “Problem determination tips” on page 260.
Multiple hard disk drives fail. Make sure that the hard disk drive, SAS/SATA RAID adapter, and server device
drivers and firmware are at the latest level.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
Multiple hard disk drives are 1. Review the storage subsystem logs for indications of problems within the
offline. storage subsystem, such as backplane or cable problems.
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 260.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 245

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
A replacement hard disk drive 1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is recognized by the adapter (the green
does not rebuild. hard disk drive activity LED is flashing).
2. Review the SAS/SATA RAID adapter documentation to determine the correct
configuration parameters and settings.
A green hard disk drive activity 1. If the green hard disk drive activity LED does not flash when the drive is in
LED does not accurately use, run the DSA disk drive test (see “Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic
represent the actual state of the programs” on page 120.
associated drive.
2. Use one of the following procedures:
v If the drive passes the test, replace the backplane.
v If the drive fails the test, replace the drive.
A yellow hard disk drive status 1. If the yellow hard disk drive LED and the RAID adapter software do not
LED does not accurately indicate the same status for the drive, complete the following steps:
represent the actual state of the
a. Turn off the server.
associated drive.
b. Reseat the SAS/SATA adapter.
c. Reseat the backplane signal cable and backplane power cable.
d. Reseat the hard disk drive.
e. Turn on the server and observe the activity of the hard disk drive LEDs.
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 260.

Intermittent problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
A problem occurs only 1. Make sure that:
occasionally and is difficult to v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and
diagnose. attached devices.
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and
shut down.
2. Check the event logs (see “Event logs” on page 115).
3. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 259.

246 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The server resets (restarts) 1. If the reset occurs during POST and the POST watchdog timer is enabled (click
occasionally. System Settings --> Integrated Management Module --> POST Watchdog
Timer in the Setup utility to see the POST watchdog setting), make sure that
sufficient time is allowed in the watchdog timeout value (POST Watchdog
Timer). If the server continues to reset during POST, see “POST error codes”
on page 122 and “DSA messages” on page 193.
2. If the reset occurs after the operating system starts, disable any automatic
server restart (ASR) utilities, such as the IBM Automatic Server Restart IPMI
Application for Windows, or any ASR devices that are be installed.
Note: ASR utilities operate as operating-system utilities and are related to the
IPMI device driver. If the reset continues to occur after the operating system
starts, the operating system might have a problem; see “Software problems” on
page 257.
3. If neither condition applies, check the event logs (see “Event logs” on page
115).

Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
All or some keys on the 1. Make sure that:
keyboard do not work. v The keyboard cable is securely connected.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
2. If you are using a USB keyboard, run the Setup utility and enable keyboardless
operation.
3. See http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/
us/ for information about keyboard compatibility.
4. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Keyboard
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 247

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The mouse or pointing device 1. See http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/
does not work. us/ for information about mouse compatibility.
2. Make sure that:
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.
v If you are using a pointing device, the keyboard and mouse or
pointing-device cables are not reversed.
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
v The mouse option is enabled in the Setup utility.
3. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it
directly to the server.
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Mouse or pointing device
b. (Trained service technician only) System board

248 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Memory problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The amount of system memory Note: If you change memory, you must update the memory configuration in the
that is displayed is less than the Setup utility.
amount of installed physical 1. Make sure that:
memory.
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel, on the memory
tray, or on the MAX5 memory expansion module.
v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.
v The memory modules are seated correctly (see “Removing a memory
module” on page 312 and “Replacing a memory module” on page 313).
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration in the
Setup utility.
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem, or a memory bank
might have been manually disabled.
2. Check the POST event log:
v If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If a DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST, run the Setup utility and
enable the DIMM.
3. Run memory diagnostics (see “Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs”
on page 120).
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the
minimum memory configuration ( see “Installing a memory module” on page
34 for information about DIMM rules and population sequence).
5. Reseat the DIMM.
6. Restart the server.
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a 1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.
branch are identified as failing.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those that are identified and
replace it with an identical pair of known good DIMMs; then, restart the
server. Repeat as necessary. If the failures continue after all identified pairs are
replaced, go to step 4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to their original connectors,
restarting the server after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace each DIMM in
the failed pair with an identical known good DIMM, restarting the server after
each DIMM. Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat step 3 until you have tested all
removed DIMMs.
4. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those identified; then, restart the
server. Repeat as necessary.
5. (Trained technician only) Replace the system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 249

Microprocessor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The server goes directly to the 1. Correct any errors that are indicated by the light path diagnostics LEDs (see
POST Event Viewer when it is “Light path diagnostics LEDs” on page 109).
turned on.
2. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the
microprocessors match in speed, type, and cache size. To view the
microprocessor information, run the Setup utility and select System
Information → System Summary → Processor.
3. (Trained technician only) Make sure that microprocessor 1 is seated correctly.
4. (Trained technician only) Remove microprocessor 2 and restart the server.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained technician only) Microprocessor
b. (Trained technician only) System board

Monitor and video problems

Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor. If you cannot diagnose the problem, call for
service.

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
Testing the monitor. 1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is
being tested on a different server.
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,
the problem might be a video device driver.
4. (Trained technician only) Replace the system board.

250 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The screen is blank. 1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate
it as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the
correct connector on the rear of the server.
2. Make sure that:
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power
problems” on page 254.
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.
4. Make sure that damaged server firmware is not affecting the video; see
“Updating the firmware” on page 71.
5. Observe the checkpoint LEDs on the system board; if the codes are changing,
go to step 6.
6. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. Video adapter (if one is installed)
c. (Trained technician only) System board.
7. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 259.
The monitor works when you 1. Make sure that:
turn on the server, but the
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than
screen goes blank when you
the capability of the monitor.
start some application
programs. v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.
2. Run video diagnostics (see “Running the DSA Preboot diagnostic programs”
on page 120).
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving
undetermined problems” on page 259.
v (Trained technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics, replace the
system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 251

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The monitor has screen jitter, or 1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider
the screen image is wavy, the location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
unreadable, rolling, or transformers, appliances, fluorescents, and other monitors) can cause screen
distorted. jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,
turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on
the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Reseat the monitor cable.
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
a. Monitor cable
b. Video adapter (if one is installed)
c. Monitor
d. (Trained technician only) System board.
Wrong characters appear on the 1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware to the latest
screen. level (see “Updating the firmware” on page 71) with the correct language.
2. Reseat the monitor cable.
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time:
a. Monitor cable
b. Video adapter (if one is installed)
c. Monitor
d. (Trained technician only) System board.

252 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Network connection problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
Log in failed by using LDAP 1. Make sure the license key is valid.
account with SSL enabled.
2. Generate a new license key and log in again.

Optional-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
An IBM optional device that 1. Make sure that:
was just installed does not v The device is designed for the server (see http://www.ibm.com/systems/
work. info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the
device is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.
3. Replace the device that you just installed.
An IBM optional device that 1. Make sure that all of the cable connections for the device are secure.
worked previously does not
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the
work now.
device.
3. If the failing device is a SCSI device, make sure that:
v The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.
v The last device in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI device is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
device before you turn on the server.
4. Reseat the failing device.
5. Replace the failing device.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 253

Power problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The power-control button does 1. Make sure that the top cover is closed and latched correctly.
not work, and the reset button
2. Make sure that the top cover/power cut-off switch cable is seated correctly.
does work (the server does not
start). 3. Make sure that the power-control button on the server is working correctly:
Note: The power-control button a. Disconnect the server power cords.
will not function until b. Reconnect the power cords.
approximately 1 to 3 minutes
after the server has been c. Reseat the operator information panel cables, and then repeat steps 3a and
connected to ac power. 3b.
v If the server starts, reseat the operator information panel. If the problem
remains, replace the operator information panel.
4. Make sure that the reset button is working correctly:
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
b. Reconnect the power cords.
c. Reseat the operator information panel cable, and then repeat steps 3a and
3b.
v If the server starts, replace the operator information panel.
v If the server does not start, go to step 5.
5. Make sure that:
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working
electrical outlet.
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.
v The DIMMs are fully seated.
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.
v The microprocessors are installed in the correct sequence.
6. Reseat the following components:
a. DIMMs
b. Power supplies
7. Replace the components listed in step 6 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time.
8. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power
supply supports.
9. See “Power-supply LEDs” on page 114.
10. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 259.
The server does not start. 1. Check the power LED on the system board. See “System-board LEDs” on page
28 for the LED location.
2. Reseat the power supply.
3. Replace the power supply.
The server does not start.
(Continued)

254 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The server does not turn off. 1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI
operating system, complete the following steps:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button and hold it down
for 5 seconds.
c. Restart the server.
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,
disconnect the ac power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the ac power
cord and restart the server.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system board.
The server unexpectedly shuts See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 259.
down, and the LEDs on the
operator information panel are
not lit.

Serial-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The number of serial ports that 1. Make sure that:
are identified by the operating v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup utility and none of the
system is less than the number serial ports is disabled.
of installed serial ports. v The serial-port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.
3. Replace the serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work. 1. Make sure that:
v The device is compatible with the server.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct connector (see “Connecting the
cables” on page 68).
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,
restarting the server each time.
4. (Trained technician only) Replace the system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 255

ServerGuide problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
The ServerGuide Setup and 1. Make sure that the server supports the ServerGuide program and has a
Installation CD will not start. startable (bootable) CD or DVD drive. See the readme file that is part of the
ISO image at http://www-947.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=TOOL-CENTER.
2. Make sure that you burned the CD or DVD from an image (do not burn the
CD or DVD ISO file as a data disk)
3. Make sure that you burn the CD or DVD as disk at once (not track at once).
4. If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure that the
CD or DVD drive is first in the startup sequence.
5. If more than one CD or DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive
is set as the primary drive. Start the CD from the primary drive.
The MegaRAID Storage 1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is connected correctly.
Manager program cannot view
2. Make sure that the SAS/SATA hard disk drive cables are securely connected.
all installed drives, or the
operating system cannot be
installed.
The operating-system Make more space available on the hard disk.
installation program
continuously loops.
The ServerGuide program will Make sure that the operating-system CD is supported by the ServerGuide
not start the operating-system program. For a list of supported operating-system versions, go to
CD. http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/serverguide/sub.html, click IBM
Service and Support Site, click the link for your ServerGuide version, and scroll
down to the list of supported Microsoft Windows operating systems.
The operating system cannot be Make sure that the server supports the operating system. If it does, either no
installed; the option is not logical drive is defined (SCSI RAID servers), or the ServerGuide System Partition
available. is not present. Run the ServerGuide program and make sure that setup is
complete.

256 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Software problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
You suspect a software 1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
problem. v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a
memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the server.
v Other software works on the server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you received any error messages when using the software, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
3. Contact the software vendor.

Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems

v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is
solved.
v See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to check if a component is a
consumable, structural, or FRU part.
v If an action step is preceded by “(Trained technician only),” that step must be performed only by a trained
technician.
Symptom Action
A USB device does not work. 1. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.
2. Make sure that the USB configuration options are set correctly in the Setup
utility (see “Using the Setup utility” on page 75 for more information).
3. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and
connect it directly to the server.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 257

Video problems
See “Monitor and video problems” on page 250.

Solving power problems

Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will
cause the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
3. If the system-error LED on the system board is lit, complete the following
steps:
a. Check the IMM2 event log. To access the web interface, see “Logging on to
the Web interface” on page 87.
b. If a log indicates that there is a power rail failure, find the location of the
failed power rail on the system board.
c. Disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal and external devices
(see “Internal cable routing” on page 276). Leave the power-supply cords
connected.
d. Remove each component that is associated with the failed power
component, one at a time, restarting the server each time, until the cause of
the failure is identified.
e. Replace the identified component.
4. Reconnect all power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated.

If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, see “Power-supply
LEDs” on page 114 to replace the components in the minimum configuration one
at a time until the problem is isolated.

Solving Ethernet controller problems

The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which
operating system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for
information about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller
device-driver readme file.

Try the following procedures:

v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server are
installed and that they are at the latest level.
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is attached
but the problem remains, try a different cable.
– If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an X
port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.

258 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or
cable or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity is off, make sure that the hub and network are
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.

If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible
causes of the error.

Solving undetermined problems

If Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) did not diagnose the failure or if the server is
inoperative, use the information in this section.

If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or

intermittent), see “Power problems” on page 254.

Corrupted data in CMOS memory or corrupted UEFI firmware can cause

undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the CMOS jumper to clear
the CMOS memory and override the power-on password; see “System-board
jumpers” on page 27. If you suspect that the UEFI firmware is corrupted, see
“Recovering the server firmware” on page 261.

If the power supplies are working correctly, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Make sure that the server cover is closed and latched correctly.
3. Make sure that the server top cover/power cut-off switch cable is connected
correctly.
4. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.
5. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.
v Any external devices.
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).
v Printer, mouse, and non-IBM devices.
v Each adapter.
v Hard disk drives.
v Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 2 GB DIMM
in slot 1 when one microprocessor is installed in the server.
6. Turn on the server.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 259

If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the riser
card.

If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.

Problem determination tips

Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that can encounter,
use the following information to assist you in problem determination.

The model number and serial number are located on the ID label on the front of
the server as shown in the following illustration.

Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

v Machine type and model

v Microprocessor or hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptom
– Does the server fail the Dynamic System Analysis diagnostic tests?
– What occurs? When? Where?
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?
– Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v UEFI firmware level
v IMM firmware level
v Operating-system software

You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each
other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following
factors are exactly the same in all the servers:
v Machine type and model
v UEFI firmware level
v IMM firmware level
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level

260 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Setup utility settings
v Operating-system control-file setup

See “Getting help and technical assistance,” on page 367 for information about
calling IBM for service.

Recovering the server firmware

Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

If the server firmware has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during
an update, you can recover the server firmware in either of two ways:
v In-band method: Recover server firmware, using either the boot block jumper
(Automated Boot Recovery) and a server Firmware Update Package Service
Pack.
v Out-of-band method: Use the IMM Web interface to update the firmware, using
the latest server firmware update package.

Note: You can obtain a server update package from one of the following sources:
v Download the server firmware update from the World Wide Web.
v Contact your IBM service representative.

To download the server firmware update package from the World Wide Web, go to
http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/.

The flash memory of the server consists of a primary bank and a backup bank. You
must maintain a bootable IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware) image
in the backup bank. If the server firmware in the primary bank becomes corrupted,
you can either manually boot the backup bank with the boot block jumper, or in
the case of image corruption, this will occur automatically with the Automated
Boot Recovery function.

In-band manual recovery method

To recover the server firmware and restore the server operation to the primary
bank, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect all power cords and external cables.
2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing the server top cover” on page 362
for more information.
3. Locate the UEFI boot recovery jumper (J2) on the system board.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 261

4. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI
recovery mode.
5. Reinstall the server cover; then, reconnect all power cords.
6. Restart the server. The power-on self-test (POST) starts.
7. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the IBM Flash
UEFI Update package that you downloaded.
8. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the
firmware update package readme file.
9. Copy the downloaded firmware update package into a directory.
10. From a command line, type filename-s, where filename is the name of the
executable file that you downloaded with the firmware update package.
11. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables, and
then remove the server cover.
12. Move the UEFI boot recovery jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and
2).
13. Reinstall the server cover, and then reconnect all the power cables.
14. Restart the server.

In-band automated boot recovery method

Note: Use this method if the BOARD LED on the light path diagnostics panel is lit
and there is a log entry or Booting Backup Image is displayed on the firmware
splash screen; otherwise, use the in-band manual recovery method.
1. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware
update package that you downloaded.
2. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the
firmware update package readme file.
3. Restart the server.
4. At the firmware splash screen, press F3 when prompted to restore to the
primary bank. The server boots from the primary bank.

Out-of-band method: See the IMM documentation.

262 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

For more information about UEFI-compliant firmware, go to http://www-
947.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-
5083207&brandind=5000008.

Automated boot recovery (ABR)

While the server is starting, if the integrated management module detects problems
with the server firmware in the primary bank, the server automatically switches to
the backup firmware bank and gives you the opportunity to recover the firmware
in the primary bank. For instructions for recovering the UEFI firmware, see
“Recovering the server firmware” on page 261. After you have recovered the
firmware in the primary bank, complete the following steps:
1. Restart the server.
2. When the prompt press F3 to restore to primary is displayed, press F3 to
recover the primary bank. Pressing F3 will restart the server.

Nx boot failure
Configuration changes, such as added devices or adapter firmware updates, and
firmware or application code problems can cause the server to fail POST (the
power-on self-test). If this occurs, the server responds in either of the following
ways:
v The server restarts automatically and attempts POST again.
v The server hangs, and you must manually restart the server for the server to
attempt POST again.

After a specified number of consecutive attempts (automatic or manual), the Nx

boot failure feature causes the server to revert to the default UEFI configuration
and start the Setup utility so that you can make the necessary corrections to the
configuration and restart the server. If the server is unable to successfully complete
POST with the default configuration, there might be a problem with the system
board.

To specify the number of consecutive restart attempts that will trigger the Nx boot
failure feature, perform the following steps:
1. In the Setup utility, click System Settings > Recovery > POST Attempts >
POST Attempts Limit.
2. The available options are 3, 6, 9, and 255 (disable Nx boot failure). Select your
option.

Chapter 4. Troubleshooting 263

264 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160
The following replaceable components are available for the IBM System x3530 M4
Type 7160 server, except as specified otherwise in “Replaceable server
components.” For an updated parts listing, go to http://www.ibm.com/
supportportal/.

Replaceable server components

Replaceable components consist of consumable parts, structural parts, and field
replaceable units (FRUs):
v Consumables: Purchase and replacement of consumables (components, such as
batteries and printer cartridges, that have depleting life) is your responsibility. If
IBM acquires or installs a consumable component at your request, you will be
charged for the service.
v Structural parts: Purchase and replacement of structural parts (components, such
as chassis assembly, top cover, and bezel) is your responsibility. If IBM acquires
or installs a structural component at your request, you will be charged for the
service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged
for the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.

For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document that comes with the server. For more
information about getting service and assistance, see “Getting help and technical
assistance,” on page 367.

The following illustration shows the major components in the server. The
illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 265

The following table lists the part numbers for the server components.

266 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 15. Parts listing, Type 7160
CRU part CRU part
Index Description number (Tier 1) number (Tier 2)
3 PCI Express 3.0 riser card assembly, x16 full-height, half-length 00D4427
3 PCI Express 3.0 riser card assembly, x8 two-slot 00D4428
5 PCI Express 3.0 riser card assembly, x4 00D4426
6 Power supply, 460 Watt, fixed 69Y5751
7 Power supply, 675 Watt HE, ac 39Y7218
7 Power supply, 460 Watt 39Y7229
8 Heat sink assembly (all models) 94Y7813
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2470 2.3 GHz, 20 MB, 95 W (dual 90Y4736
quad core)
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2450 2.1 GHz, 20 MB, 95 W (dual 90Y4738
quad core)
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2440 2.4 GHz 15 MB, 95 W (six core) 90Y4739
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2430 2.2 GHz, 15 MB, 95 W (six core) 90Y4740
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2420 1.9 GHz, 15 MB, 95 W (six core) 90Y4742
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2407 2.2 GHz, 10 MB, 80 W (quad 90Y4743
core)
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2403 1.8 GHz, 10 MB, 80 W (quad 90Y4744
core)
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-1403 2.6 GHz, 5 MB, 80 W (dual core) 90Y4745
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-1407 2.8 GHz, 5 MB, 80 W (dual core) 90Y4746
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2450L 1.8 GHz, 20 MB, 70 W (dual 90Y4747
quad core)
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-2430L 2.0 GHz, 15 MB, 60 W (six core) 90Y4748
9 Microprocessor, Intel Xeon E5-1410 2.8 GHz, 10 MB, 80 W (quad 00D9038
core)
10 System board 00D8633
12 Power paddle card 69Y5755
15 DVD-ROM drive 44W3254
15 DVD-RW drive 44W3256
16 Operator information panel 90Y5821
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch SATA, simple-swap, 500 GB 7.2K 6 Gbps 81Y9787
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap, 500 GB 7.2K 81Y9803
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap, 1TB 7.2K 81Y9807
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap, 2TB 7.2K 81Y9811
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap, 3TB 7.2K 81Y9815
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap, 1TB 90Y8568
20 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap, 3TB 90Y8578
21 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch SATA, hot-swap, 1TB 7.2K 81Y9791
21 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch SATA, hot-swap, 7.2K 6 Gbps 81Y9795
21 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch SATA, hot-swap, 3TB 7.2K 81Y9799
23 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch hot-swap, 300 GB, 15 K 81Y9671

Chapter 5. Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 267

Table 15. Parts listing, Type 7160 (continued)
CRU part CRU part
Index Description number (Tier 1) number (Tier 2)
23 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch hot-swap, 300 GB, 10 K 90Y8878
24 3.5-inch hot-swap backplane bracket assembly 00D4425
25 3.5-inch simple-swap bracket 00D4434
26 Sprint backplane 94Y7587
28 Fan cage assembly (all models) 00D2567
29 Memory, 8 GB dual-rank 1.35 V, DDR3, 1333MHz, RDIMM 49Y1415
29 Memory, 4 GB dual-rank 1.35 V, DDR3, 1333MHz, UDIMM 49Y1422
29 Memory, 2 GB single-rank 1.35 V, DDR3, 1333MHz, RDIMM 49Y1423
29 Memory, 4 GB single-rank 1.35 V, DDR3, 1333MHz, RDIMM 49Y1424
29 Memory, 4 GB dual-rank 1.35 V, DDR3, 1333MHz, RDIMM 49Y1425
29 Memory, 4 GB single-rank 1.5 V, DDR3, 1600MHz, RDIMM 49Y1561
29 Memory, 16 GB dual-rank 1.35 V, DDR3, 1333MHz, RDIMM 49Y1565
29 Memory, 8 GB dual-rank 1.5 V, DDR3, 1600MHz, RDIMM 90Y3111
Battery, 3.0 volt 33F8354
Cable, DD module 94Y5951
Cable, iPass mini SAS 00D2597
Cable, iPass mini SAS 94Y5954
Cable, optical disk drive, combo. slim 81Y7318
Cable, 3.5-inch hot-swap power 81Y7308
Cable, 2.5-inch simple-swap power 81Y7312
Cable, 2.5-inch power 81Y7316
Cable, 3.5-inch signal 81Y7306
Cable, 2.5-inch signal 81Y7314
Cable, USB board 94Y5952
Cable, 3.5-inch VGA 94Y6368
Cable, 2.5-inch VGA 94Y5953
Cord, 4 - 4.3 M line 39M5076
Cord, 1.5 M line 39M5375
Cord, 4.3 M line 39M5378
Cord, PDU jumper 30M5392
Label, chassis 00D4431
Label, GBM 00D4430
ServeRAID M1115 SAS/SATA adapter 81Y4449
ServeRAID M5120 81Y4479
ServeRAID M5100 series 512 MB cache (RAID 5 upgrade) 81Y4485
ServeRAID H1110 SAS/SATA adapter 81Y4494
ServeRAID M5100 series 1GB flash (RAID 5 upgrade) 81Y4580
ServeRAID M5110 90Y4449
USB cage assembly 00D4449

268 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Table 15. Parts listing, Type 7160 (continued)
CRU part CRU part
Index Description number (Tier 1) number (Tier 2)
Dual-port 10 GbE adapter 81Y9993
6 Gb perform op 90Y4356
Broadcom NetExtreme qp 90Y9355
Broadcom NetExtreme dp 90Y9373
Emulex 10 GbE 95Y3766

Consumable parts
Consumable parts are not covered by the IBM Statement of Limited Warranty. The
following consumable parts are available for purchase from the retail store.
Table 16. Consumable parts, Type 7160
Index Description Part number
11 ServeRAID M5110 series battery kit 81Y4491

To order a consumable part, complete the following steps:

Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM website. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com.
2. From the Products menu, select Upgrades, accessories & parts.
3. Click Obtain maintenance parts; then, follow the instructions to order the part
from the retail store.

If you need help with your order, call the toll-free number that is listed on the
retail parts page, or contact your local IBM representative for assistance.

Structural parts
Structural parts are not covered by the IBM Statement of Limited Warranty.
Table 17. Structural parts, Type 7160
Index Description Part number
1 Top cover 00D4437
2 Power supply unit cage, redundant 00D4444
2 Power supply unit cage, fixed 00D4445
4 Filler, power supply 1U 49Y4821
13 Chassis assembly (3.5-inch, without front bezel) 00D4433
13 Chassis assembly (2.5-inch, without front bezel) 00D4440
14 Filler, optical drive 00D4436
17 Front bezel, 3.5-inch 00D4447
18 Front bezel, 2.5-inch 00D4448
19 Filler, 3.5-inch simple-swap 69Y5368
19 Filler, 3.5-inch hot-swap 69Y5364
22 Filler, blank EMC 44T2248

Chapter 5. Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 269

Table 17. Structural parts, Type 7160 (continued)
Index Description Part number
27 Air baffle 00D4439
240 VA safety cover 00D4435
EIA kit 00D4438
Filler, DIMM 81Y4297
Miscellaneous parts kit 00D4446
Static rail kit 94Y6790

To order a structural part, Go to http://www.ibm.com.

If you need help with your order, call the toll-free number that is listed on the
retail parts page, or contact your local IBM representative for assistance.

Power cords
For your safety, a power cord with a grounded attachment plug is provided to use
with this product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and plug
with a properly grounded outlet.

power cords

Power cords for this product that are used in the United States and Canada are
listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA).

For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.

Power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.

Power cord part

number Used in these countries and regions
39M5206 China
39M5102 Australia, Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea

270 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5123 Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia,
Austria, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia,
Cameroon, Cape Verde, Central African Republic, Chad,
Comoros, Congo (Democratic Republic of), Congo (Republic of),
Cote D'Ivoire (Ivory Coast), Croatia (Republic of), Czech
Republic, Dahomey, Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea,
Estonia, Ethiopia, Finland, France, French Guyana, French
Polynesia, Germany, Greece, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea Bissau,
Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Laos
(People's Democratic Republic of), Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Macedonia (former Yugoslav Republic of),
Madagascar, Mali, Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte,
Moldova (Republic of), Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Reunion, Romania, Russian Federation,
Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Saudi Arabia, Senegal, Serbia,
Slovakia, Slovenia (Republic of), Somalia, Spain, Suriname,
Sweden, Syrian Arab Republic, Tajikistan, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia,
Turkey, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, Upper Volta, Uzbekistan,
Vanuatu, Vietnam, Wallis and Futuna, Yugoslavia (Federal
Republic of), Zaire
39M5130 Denmark
39M5144 Bangladesh, Lesotho, Macao, Maldives, Namibia, Nepal, Pakistan,
Samoa, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Swaziland, Uganda
39M5151 Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Channel
Islands, China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia,
Ghana, Grenada, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar (Burma), Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent
and the Grenadines, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Sudan,
Tanzania (United Republic of), Trinidad and Tobago, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe
39M5158 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
39M5165 Chile, Italy, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
39M5172 Israel
39M5095
220 - 240 V

Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,

Bermuda, Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Micronesia (Federal States of), Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, Venezuela

Chapter 5. Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160 271

Power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5076
110 - 120 V

Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,

Bermuda, Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Micronesia (Federal States of), Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, Venezuela
39M5219 Korea (Democratic People's Republic of), Korea (Republic of)
39M5199 Japan
39M5226 India
39M5240 Brazil

272 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components
Replaceable components consist of consumable parts, structural parts, and field
replaceable units (FRUs):
v Consumables: Purchase and replacement of consumables (components, such as
batteries and printer cartridges, that have depleting life) is your responsibility. If
IBM acquires or installs a consumable component at your request, you will be
charged for the service.
v Structural parts: Purchase and replacement of structural parts (components, such
as chassis assembly, top cover, and bezel) is your responsibility. If IBM acquires
or installs a structural component at your request, you will be charged for the
service.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained
technicians, unless they are classified as customer replaceable units (CRUs):
– Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be
charged for the installation.
– Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.

See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to
determine whether a component is a consumable, structural, or FRU that must be
replaced only by a trained service technician.

For information about the terms of the warranty, see the Warranty Information
document that comes with the server.

For more information about getting service and assistance, see “Getting help and
technical assistance,” on page 367.

Installation guidelines
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the system to halt, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when removing or installing a hot-swap
devices.

Before you install optional devices, read the following information:

v Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and the guidelines in
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32. This information will help you
work safely.
v Make sure that the devices that you are installing are supported.
v Make sure that the devices that you are installing are supported. For a list of
supported optional devices for the server, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/
info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v When you install your new server, take the opportunity to download and apply
the most recent firmware updates. This step will help to ensure that any known
issues are addressed and that your server is ready to function at maximum

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 273

levels of performance. To download firmware updates for your server, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated
code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level
of code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
For additional information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying
firmware, see the ToolsCenter for System x and BladeCenter at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
v Before you install optional hardware, make sure that the server is working
correctly. Start the server, and make sure that the operating system starts, if an
operating system is installed, or that a 19990305 error code is displayed,
indicating that an operating system was not found but the server is otherwise
working correctly. If the server is not working correctly, see “Running the DSA
Preboot diagnostic programs” on page 120 for information about how to run
diagnostics.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have
to lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:
– Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.
– Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
– Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy
object.
– To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing
up with your leg muscles.
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.
v To view the error LEDs on the system board and internal components, leave the
server connected to power.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices.
However, you must turn off the server before you perform any steps that
involve removing or installing adapter cables and you must disconnect the
power source from the server before you perform any steps that involve
removing or installing a riser card.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points
on hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a
specific hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have
to perform before you remove or install the component.
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires.

274 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

System reliability guidelines
To help ensure proper system cooling and system reliability, make sure that the
following requirements are met:
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.
v If the server has redundant power, each of the power-supply bays has a power
supply installed in it.
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2.0 in.) of open space around the
front and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.
v You have replaced a failed fan within 48 hours.
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 2 minutes of removal.
v You do not operate the server without the air baffles installed. Operating the
server without the air baffles might cause the microprocessor to overheat.

Handling static-sensitive devices

Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices. To
avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until
you are ready to install them.

To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the

following precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains
static electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server
without setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it
back into its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server
cover or on a metal surface.
v Take additional care when handling devices during cold weather. Heating
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 275

Returning a device or component
If you are instructed to return a device or component, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Internal cable routing

This section provides information about routing the cables when you install some
components in the server.

For more information about the requirements for cables and connecting devices,
see the documentation that comes with these devices.

Attention: Failing to install or remove the cable with care may damage the
connectors on the system board. Any damage to the connectors may require
replacing the system board.

General
The following illustrations show the cabling information for the optional optical
drive with different power supply models:

276 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Attention: Failing to disconnect the optical drive cable from the system board
properly may damage the connector on the system board. Any damage to the
connector may require replacing the system board.

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the power interposer
card assembly for fixed and redundant power supply models respectively:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 277

278 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
The following illustration shows the cabling information for installing the RAID
battery remotely in the server:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 279

2.5-inch hard disk drive cable connection
4-drive-capable model:

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the model of
4x2.5-inch hot-swap drive bays:

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the configuration cable
in the server:

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the power cable in the
server:

The redundant power model:

280 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The fixed power model:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 281

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the hardware RAID
cable in the server:

282 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the software RAID
cable in the server:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 283

8-drive-capable model:

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the two 4x2.5-inch
hot-swap drives model:

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the configuration cable
in the server:

284 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the power cable in the
server:

The redundant power model:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 285

The fixed power model:

286 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the hardware RAID
cable in the server:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 287

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the software RAID
cable in the server:

288 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

3.5-inch hard disk drive cable connection
3.5-inch hot-swap model:

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the 4x3.5-inch
hot-swap SATA/SAS drive backplane assembly:

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the configuration cable
in the server:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 289

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the power cable in the
server:

The redundant power model:

290 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The fixed power model:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 291

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the hardware RAID
cable in the server:

292 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the software RAID
cable in the server:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 293

3.5-inch simple-swap model:

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the 4x3.5-inch
simple-swap SATA drive backplate assembly:

The following illustrations show the cabling information for the power cable in the
server:

The redundant power model:

294 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The fixed power model:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 295

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the hardware RAID
cable in the server:

296 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

The following illustration shows the cabling information for the software RAID
cable in the server:

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 297

Removing and replacing components
Replaceable components consist of consumable parts, structural parts, and field
replaceable units (FRUs):
v Consumables: Purchase and replacement of consumables (components, such as
batteries and printer cartridges, that have depleting life) is your responsibility. If
IBM acquires or installs a consumable component at your request, you will be
charged for the service.
v Structural parts: Purchase and replacement of structural parts (components, such
as chassis assembly, top cover, and bezel) is your responsibility. If IBM acquires
or installs a structural component at your request, you will be charged for the
service.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained
technicians, unless they are classified as customer replaceable units (CRUs):
– Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be
charged for the installation.
– Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.

See Chapter 5, “Parts listing, IBM System x3530 M4 Type 7160,” on page 265 to
determine whether a component is a consumable, structural, or FRU that must be
replaced only by a trained service technician.

For information about the terms of the warranty, see the Warranty Information
document that comes with the server.
298 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
For more information about getting service and assistance, see “Getting help and
technical assistance,” on page 367.

Removing and replacing Tier 1 CRUs

Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at
your request, you will be charged for the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing an adapter
To remove an adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Remove the PCI riser-card assembly (see “Removing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 328).
5. Disconnect any cables from the adapter.
6. Removing an adapter from PCI riser-card assembly 1:
Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and pull the
adapter from the PCI riser-card assembly.

7. Removing a RAID adapter from PCI riser-card assembly 2:

a. Pull the release pin to unlock the release latch.
b. Rotate the retention latch to the open position.
c. Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and pull the
adapter from the PCI riser-card assembly.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 299

8. Place the adapter on a flat, static-protective surface.
9. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing an adapter
Notes:
v The instructions in this section apply to any supported adapter (for example,
video graphics adapters or network adapters).
v See “Installing an adapter” on page 46 for additional notes and information that
you must consider when you install an adapter in the server.
v Do not set the maximum digital video adapter resolution above 1600 x 1200 at
75 Hz for an LCD monitor. This is the highest resolution that is supported for
any add-on video adapter that you install in the server.
v Any high-definition video-out connector or stereo connector on any add-on
video adapter is not supported

To replace an adapter, complete the following steps:

Attention: When you install an adapter, make sure that the adapter is correctly
seated in the PCI riser-card assembly and that the PCI riser-card assembly is
securely seated in the riser-card connector on the system board before you turn on
the server. An incorrectly seated adapter might cause damage to the system board,
the PCI riser-card assembly, or the adapter.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Follow the cabling instructions, if any come with the adapter. Route the
adapter cables before you install the adapter.
3. Installing an adapter in PCI riser-card assembly 1:
Insert the adapter into the PCI riser-card assembly, aligning the edge
connector on the adapter with the connector on the PCI riser-card assembly.
Press the edge of the connector firmly into the PCI riser-card assembly. Make
sure that the adapter snaps into the riser-card assembly securely.

300 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

4. Installing a ServeRAID adapter in PCI riser-card assembly 2:
a. Insert the adapter into the riser-card assembly, aligning the edge connector
on the adapter with the connector on the riser-card assembly. Press the
edge of the connector firmly into the riser-card assembly. Make sure that
the adapter snaps into the riser-card assembly securely.
b. Rotate the retention latch to the close position. Make sure the retention
latch engages the adapter securely; then, push in the release pin to lock the
retention latch in place.

5. Install the PCI riser-card assembly in the server (see “Replacing a PCI
riser-card assembly” on page 329).
6. Perform any configuration tasks that are required for the adapter.
7. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
8. Install the server in the rack cabinet (see the Rack Installation Instructions that
come with the server for instructions).
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 301

Removing hot-swap drives
Attention:
v To avoid damage to the drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in
place and fully closed whenever you install or remove a drive.
v To make sure that there is adequate system cooling, do not operate the server for
more than 2 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each bay.

To remove a hot-swap drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Press the release latch (orange) to unlock the drive handle.
3. Grasp the handle and pull the drive assembly out of the drive bay.
4. If you are instructed to return the drive assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing hot-swap drives

Note: If you install only one drive, you must install it in drive bay 0.

To install a hot-swap SAS or SATA drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
3. Installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap drive:

a. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay.

b. Make sure that the drive-tray handle is in the open (unlocked) position.
c. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.
d. Gently push the drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive stops.
e. Rotate the drive-tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
302 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
f. Skip to step 5.
4. Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap drive:

a. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay.

b. Make sure that the drive-tray handle is in the open (unlocked) position.
c. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.
d. Gently push the drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive stops.
e. Rotate the drive-tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
5. Check the drive status LED to verify that the drive is operating correctly. If the
yellow drive status LED for a drive is lit continuously, that drive is faulty and
must be replaced. If the green drive activity LED is flashing, the drive is being
accessed.

Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID

adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install drives.
See the ServeRAID adapter documentation for additional information about
RAID operation and complete instructions for using the ServeRAID adapter.
6. If you are installing additional hot-swap drives, do so now.
7. Restart the server. Confirm that it starts correctly and recognizes the newly
installed devices, and make sure that no error LEDs are lit.
8. Complete the additional steps in “Instructions for IBM Business Partners” on
page 24.

For information on the supported combination of drive backplane configurations,

see Supported SAS/SATA drive backplane configurations.

IDs for hot-swap drives:

The hot-swap-drive ID that is assigned to each drive is printed on the front of the
server. The following illustrations show the location of the IDs of the drives. The
ID numbers and the drive bay numbers are the same.

The following illustration shows the drive bay IDs on a 3.5-inch drive server
model.

The following illustration shows the drive bay IDs on a 2.5-inch drive server
model.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 303

Removing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive
To remove a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the filler panel from the front of the server.
4. Press the release latch and pull the drive out of the bay.

5. If you are instructed to return the drive, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive

Note: You must turn off the server before installing simple-swap drives in the
server.

To install a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA drive, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package
and place it on a static-protective surface.
3. Gently push the drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive clicks into
place.

304 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

4. Reinstall the filler panel that you removed
5. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a CD/DVD drive

To remove a CD/DVD drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Locate the blue release tab on the rear of the drive bay; then, while you press
the tab, push the CD/DVD drive toward the front of the server.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 305

5. Remove the CD/DVD drive out of the bay and slide the drive-retention clip
from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use when you install the
replacement drive.

6. If you are instructed to return the CD/DVD drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Installing an optional CD/DVD drive

To install an optional CD/DVD drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Locate the blue release tab on the rear of the drive bay; then, while you press
the tab, push the CD/DVD filler toward the front of the server.

306 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

5. Pull the CD/DVD drive filler out of the front of the server.
6. Remove the retention clip from the side of the drive filler.

Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following
safety precaution.
Statement 3

CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices,
or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 307

DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.

Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

7. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new optical drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the optical drive from the
package and place it on a static-protective surface.
8. Attach the drive retention clip that you removed from the previous drive to
the side of the new drive.

9. Align the drive in the drive bay and slide the drive into the CD/DVD drive
bay until the drive clicks into place.
10. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
11. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

308 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Removing the CD/DVD cable
To remove the CD/DVD cable, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 365).
5. Remove the CD/DVD drive (see “Removing a CD/DVD drive” on page 305).
6. From the front of the server, grasp the cable connector latch and pull it up
toward the rear of the server; then, slide the cable connector to the unlock
position.

7. Remove the cable from the optical drive cage connector.

8. Disconnect the other end of the CD/DVD cable from the connector on the
system board.
9. Disengage the cable clips and remove the CD/DVD cable from the server.
10. If you are instructed to return the CD/DVD cable, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied
to you.

Replacing the CD/DVD cable

To install the CD/DVD cable, complete the following cable:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the cable connector with the connector on the rear of the optical drive
cage and press the cable connector into the optical drive cage connector.
3. From the front of the server, grasp the cable connector latch and pull it up
toward the rear of the server; then, slide the cable connector to the lock
position.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 309

4. Connect the other end of the CD/DVD drive cable to the connector on the
system board. Secure the cable with the cable clips on the chassis.
5. Reinstall the CD/DVD drive (see “Installing an optional CD/DVD drive” on
page 306).
6. Install the air baffle (see Replacing the DIMM air baffle).
7. Replace the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
8. Install the server in the rack cabinet (see the Rack Installation Instructions that
come with the server for instructions).
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a fan
Attention: To ensure proper server operation, replace a failed fan within 30
seconds.

To remove a fan, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Reconnect the power cord; then, turn on the server.
Attention: Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30
minutes) with the top cover removed might damage server components.
5. Determine which fan to replace by checking the LEDs on the system board
(see “System-board LEDs” on page 28); a lit LED indicates the fan to replace.
6. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cord again.
7. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 365).
8. Disconnect the fan power cable from the connector on the system board.
9. Grasp the top of the fan with your index finger and thumb and lift the fan out
of the server.

310 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Attention: To ensure proper operation, replace a failed hot-swap fan within
30 seconds.
10. If you are instructed to return the fan, follow all of the packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing a fan
The server comes standard with four speed-controlled cooling fans. You must
install the fifth and sixth fan when you install the second microprocessor.

Attention: To ensure proper operation, replace a failed fan within 30 seconds.

To install or replace a fan, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new fan to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the new fan from the
package.
4. Orient the fan so that the air-flow arrow points to the rear of the server.

5. Lower the fan into the fan slot in the server and ensure that is it seated
correctly.
6. Connect the fan power cable to the connector on the system board.
7. Install the air baffle (see Replacing the DIMM air baffle).

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 311

8. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a memory module

To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 33).
5. Carefully open the retaining clips on each end of the DIMM connector and
remove the DIMM.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.

6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

312 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Replacing a memory module
Notes:
v See “Installing a memory module” on page 34 for notes and information that
you must consider when you install DIMMs.
v Confirm that the server supports the DIMM that you are installing, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.

The following illustration shows the location of the DIMM connectors on the
system board.

To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
5. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, open and close the clips gently.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 313

6. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.
7. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with
the slots at the ends of the DIMM connector (see “System-board optional
device connectors” on page 29 for the locations of the DIMM connectors).
8. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure
on both ends of the DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the
locked position when the DIMM is firmly seated in the connector.

Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM
has not been correctly inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM,
and then reinsert it.
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Install the air baffle (see Replacing the DIMM air baffle).
11. Replace the cover (see Replacing the server top cover).
12. Install the server in the rack cabinet (see the Rack Installation Instructions that
come with the server for instructions).
13. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
14. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing an IBM ServeRAID Controller

To remove an IBM ServeRAID adapter, complete the following steps:

Note: When the ServeRAID adapter is removed, software RAID will not be
supported. This system does not support downgrade software RAID function from
hardware RAID configuration.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Remove PCI riser-card assembly 2 (see “Removing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 328).
5. Disconnect the cables to the ServeRAID adapter.
6. Pull the release pin to unlock the retention latch; then rotate the retention latch
to the open position.
7. Carefully grasp the ServeRAID adapter by the edge and pull it out of the PCI
riser-card assembly.

314 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

8. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing an optional IBM ServeRAID Controller

You can purchase an optional IBM ServeRAID SAS/SATA controller that provides
additional RAID feature support. For configuration information, see the ServeRAID
documentation at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.

Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.

Notes:
v You must install a ServeRAID adapter on PCI riser-card assembly 2.
v When you install an IBM ServeRAID adapter that has a RAID adapter battery in
the server, you must install the battery remotely in the remote battery tray (see
“Installing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the server” on page 60).

To install an IBM ServeRAID adapter, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new ServeRAID adapter
to any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then, grasp the adapter
by the top edge or upper corners of the adapter and remove it from the
package.
3. Align the ServeRAID adapter so that the keys align correctly with the
connector on the PCI riser-card assembly.
4. Insert the ServeRAID adapter into the connector on the riser-card until it is
firmly seated.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the server or the
adapter.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 315

5. Rotate the retention latch to the closed position, making sure the retention
latch engages the ServeRAID adapter. Then, push in the release pin to lock the
retention latch in place.
6. Reconnect cables to the adapter. Be sure to route the signal cables as shown in
the following illustration. Secure the cables with any cable clips on the system
board so that they do not get in the way or get damaged.
7. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assembly (see “Replacing a PCI riser-card
assembly” on page 66).
8. Replace the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
9. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
10. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a remotely installed RAID adapter battery

To remove the RAID adapter battery from the RAID battery tray, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Remove PCI riser-card assembly 2 (see “Removing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 328).
5. From the top of safety cover, press the release tab to open the retention clip
that holds the battery in place.

316 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

6. Lift the battery from the RAID battery tray.
7. Disconnect the remote battery cable from the remote battery cable connector to
the ServeRAID adapter.

If you are instructed to return the RAID adapter battery, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing a RAID adapter battery remotely in the server

When you install any ServeRAID adapter in the server that come with a RAID
adapter battery, the battery must be installed remotely to prevent the battery from
overheating. The battery must be installed only in the RAID battery tray on top of
the power safety cover.

To install the RAID adapter battery in the RAID battery tray, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Install the battery in the RAID battery tray:

a. Orient the battery as shown in the following illustration; then, lower the
battery into the RAID battery tray. If the battery comes with a battery
carrier, ensure that battery carrier posts align with the rings on the battery
mounting slot so that the battery carrier is secure in the slot.

Note: The positioning of the remote battery depends on the type of remote
battery that you install.
b. Rotate the retention clip to the close position and press down on the
retention clip until it snaps in place to hold the battery in place.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 317

3. Connect the remote battery cable to the remote battery cable connector to the
ServeRAID adapter. Route the remote battery cable in the server as shown in
the following illustration.
Attention: Make sure that the cable is not pinched and does not cover any
connectors or obstruct any components on the system board.
4. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assembly (see “Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 66).
5. Replace the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
6. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device

To remove a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Remove PCI riser-card assembly 1 (see “Removing a PCI riser-card assembly”
on page 328).
5. Locate the USB embedded hypervisor flash device connector on the system
board.

6. Slide the lockbar on the flash device connector to the unlocked position and
pull the USB flash device out of the connector.

318 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

7. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device

To install a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the USB flash device with the connector on the system board and push it
into the connector until it is firmly seated.
3. Slide the lockbar toward the riser-card assembly to the locked position until it
is seated firmly.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 319

4. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
5. Install PCI riser-card assembly 1 (see “Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly” on
page 329).
6. Install the air baffle (see Replacing the DIMM air baffle).
7. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
8. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
9. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing a hot-swap power supply

When you remove or install a hot-swap power supply, observe the following
precautions.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

320 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Statement 8

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

To remove a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. If only one power supply is installed, turn off the server and peripheral devices
and disconnect all power cords.
3. If the server is in a rack, at the back of the server, pull back the cable
management arm to gain access to the rear of the server and the power supply.
4. Press and hold the orange release tab to the left. Grasp the handle and pull the
power supply out of the server.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 321

5. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing a hot-swap power supply

The following notes describe the type of power supply that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a power supply:
v To confirm that the server supports the power supply that you are installing, see
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Before you install an additional power supply or replace a power supply with
one of a different wattage, you may use the IBM Power Configurator utility to
determine current system power consumption. For more information and to
download the utility, go to http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/
resources/powerconfig.html.
v The server comes standard with one of the following power supplies that
connects to power supply bay 1. The input voltage is 100-127 V ac or 200-240 V
ac auto-sensing.
– 460-watt non-hot-swap power supply
– 460-watt hot-swap power supply
– 675-watt high-efficiency, hot-swap power supply

Note: You cannot mix 110 V ac and 220 V ac, or 460-watt and 675-watt power
supplies in the server, it is not supported.
v Power supply 1 is the default/primary power supply. If power supply 1 fails,
you must replace the power supply with the same wattage immediately.
v The server supports a maximum of two hot-swap power supplies. These power
supplies are designed for parallel operation. In the event of a power-supply
failure, the redundant power supply continues to power the system.
v The server can run fully configured with one power supply. For redundancy
support, you must install the second hot-swap power supply.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

Statement 8

322 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components. If you suspect a with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap power supply to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply
from the package and place it on a static-protective surface.
3. If you are installing a hot-swap power supply into an empty bay, remove the
power-supply filler panel from the power-supply bay.

4. Grasp the handle on the rear of the power supply and slide the power supply
forward into the power-supply bay until it clicks. Make sure that the power
supply connects firmly into the power-supply connector.
5. Route the power cord through the cable retainer clip so that it does not
accidentally become disconnected
6. Connect the power cord for the new power supply to the power-cord connector
on the power supply.
7. Connect the other end of the power cord to a properly grounded electrical
outlet.
8. Make sure that the ac power LED and the dc power LED on the power supply
are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. The two green
LEDs are to the right of the power-cord connector.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 323

Removing the fixed power supply
Note: You must turn off the server before removing or replacing the fixed power
supply.

When you remove or install a power supply, observe the following precautions.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

Statement 8

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

To remove the fixed power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).

324 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

4. Disconnect the power-supply cables from the connectors on the system board
and internal devices; then, disengage the cables from any cable clips.

Note: Note the routing of all power-supply cables; you will route the
power-supply cables the same way when you install the power supply.
5. Remove the screw that holds the power supply to the rear of the chassis; then,
slide the power supply slightly toward the front of the server and lift to
remove it from the server.

6. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing the fixed power supply

Note: You must turn off the server before removing or replacing the fixed power
supply.

Statement 5

CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from
the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 325

Statement 8

CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.

Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components. If you suspect a with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.

To install a fixed power supply, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the power supply to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply from
the package and place it on a static-protective surface.
3. Orient the power supply as shown in the following illustration and align the
retention tabs on the side of the power supply with the slots on the chassis.
4. Install the rear bracket.

326 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

5. Lower the power supply and slide the retention tabs into the slots. Make sure
all retention tabs are engaged in the slots.

6. Install the screw to secure the power supply in the chassis.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 327

7. Connect the power cables to the power supply.
8. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
9. Route the power cord through the cable retainer clip so that it does not
accidentally become disconnected.
10. Connect the power cord for the new power supply to the power-cord
connector on the power supply.
11. Connect the other end of the power cord to a properly grounded electrical
outlet.
12. Make sure that the ac power LED and the dc power LED on the power
supply are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly.

Removing a PCI riser-card assembly

To remove a PCI riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. If an adapter is installed in the PCI riser-card assembly, disconnect any cables
that are connected to the adapter.
5. Grasp the front and rear of the PCI riser-card assembly at the blue touch-points
and lift it out of the PCI riser connector on the system board.

328 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

6. Remove the adapter, if necessary, from the PCI riser-card assembly (see
“Removing an adapter” on page 299).
7. Set the adapter and PCI riser-card assembly aside.
8. If you are instructed to return the PCI riser-card assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly

To replace a PCI riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Install the adapter in the new PCI riser-card assembly (see “Replacing an
adapter” on page 300).
3. Set any jumpers or switches on the adapter as directed by the adapter
manufacturer.
4. Align the PCI riser-card assembly with the PCI riser connector on the system
board; then, press down firmly until the PCI riser-card assembly is seated
correctly in the connector on the system board.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 329

5. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
6. Reconnect the external cables; then, reconnect the power cords and turn on the
peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the operator information panel assembly

To remove the operator information panel, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Disconnect the cable from the back of the operator information panel assembly.
5. Push the blue points on the rear of the operator information panel to the front
of the server.

330 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

6. From the front of the server, carefully pull the assembly out of the server.
7. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow
all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that
are supplied to you.

Replacing the operator information panel assembly

To install the operator information panel, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. From the front of the server, slide the operator information panel into the
server until it stops.

3. Connect the signal cable to the rear of the operator information panel; then,
connect the other end of the signal cable to the connectors on the system board.
Route the signal cable as shown in the following illustration. Secure the cable
with any cable clips on the chassis.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 331

4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 365).
5. Inside the server, connect the cable to the rear of the operator information panel
assembly.
6. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Replacing the air baffle” on page 66).
7. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
8. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
9. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the system battery

The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing
the battery:
v IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery
must be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery,
you must adhere to the following instructions.

Note: In the U. S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
v If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a
battery with heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be
disposed of with normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge
by the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of
in a proper manner.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-IBM-SERV within the United States,
and 1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your support center or business partner.

332 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset
the system date and time.
Statement 2

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

To remove the system-board battery, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 333

2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Remove PCI riser-card assembly 1 from the server. (see “Removing a PCI
riser-card assembly” on page 328).
5. Remove the system-board battery:
a. Use one finger to push the battery horizontally out of its housing.

b. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.
6. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. See the
IBM Environmental Notices and User's Guide on the IBM Documentation CD for
more information.

Replacing the system battery

The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing
the system-board battery in the server.
v When replacing the system-board battery, you must replace it with a lithium
battery of the same type from the same manufacturer.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-426-7378 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and Canada,
call your IBM marketing representative or authorized reseller.
v After you replace the system-board battery, you must reconfigure the server and
reset the system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.

Statement 2

CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a
module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type
made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if
not properly used, handled, or disposed of.

Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
v Repair or disassemble

Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

334 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

To install the replacement system-board battery, complete the following steps:

1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
replacement battery.
2. Insert the new battery:
a. Position the battery so that the positive (+) symbol is facing you.

b. Place the battery into its socket, and press the battery press the battery
toward the housing until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip
holds the battery securely.
3. Install PCI riser-card assembly 1 (see “Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly” on
page 329).
4. Install the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
5. Reconnect the external cables; then, reconnect the power cords and turn on the
peripheral devices and the server.

Note: You must wait approximately 1 to 3 minutes after you connect the server
to a power source before the power-control button becomes active.
6. Start the Setup utility and reset the configuration.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 335

v Set the system date and time.
v Set the power-on password.
v Reconfigure the server.
See “Using the Setup utility” on page 75 for details.

Removing the front USB connector board

To remove the front USB connector board, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Disconnect the USB cable from the connector on the rear of the USB assembly.
5. (For 2.5-inch hard disk drive models) Press the release tab and push the USB
assembly toward the rear of the server.

6. (For 3.5-inch hard disk drive models) Press the release tab and push the USB
assembly toward the front of the server.

7. Remove the two screws from the USB assembly and rotate the front USB
connector board out of the USB assembly.

336 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

8. If you are instructed to return the front USB connector board, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Replacing the front USB connector board

To replace the front USB connector board, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Orient the USB connector board as shown in the illustration; then, align the
screw holes on the USB connector board with the screw holes on the USB
assembly.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 337

3. Install the screws to secure the USB connector board to the USB assembly.
4. From the front of the server, slide the USB assembly into the USB slot until it
clicks into place.

5. Connect one end of the USB cable to the connector on the USB connector
board; then, connect the other end of the USB cable to the connector on the
system board. Route the USB cable as shown in the following illustration.
6. Align the front video connector (if available) with the slot on the server and
install the two screws to secure it to the server.
7. Connect the video/USB cable to the connector on the system board.
8. Secure the USB cable with any cable clips in the server.
9. Replace the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).

338 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Removing the front video connector
To remove the front video connector, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. On a 3.5-inch server model, remove the front bezel (see “Removing the bezel”
on page 364).
5. Loosen the screws that secure the video connector to the front of the chassis.

6. Disconnect the video cable from the connector on the system board and
disengage the video cable from any cable clips on the chassis.
7. Remove the video connector and cable from the server.

8. If you are instructed to return the video connector, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 339

Replacing the front video connector
To replace the front video connector board, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the video connector with the slot on the server and install the two screws
to secure it to the server.

Note: Refer to the illustrations below for 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch hard disk drive
bays models respectively. Depending on your server model, align the video
connector from inside or outside the server.

340 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

3. Connect the video cable to the connector on the system board. Route the cable
as shown in the following illustration. Secure the cable with any cable clips on
the chassis.
4. Reinstall the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
5. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
6. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the power interposer card assembly

To remove the power interposer card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 365).
5. If a ServeRAID adapter is installed in PCI riser-card assembly 2, remove PCI
riser-card assembly 2 (see “Removing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 328).
6. Remove the redundant power supply slightly out of the server to disconnect it
from the power interposer card.
7. Disconnect all power cables from the connectors on the system board.
Disengage the power cables from any cable clips.
8. If a RAID adapter battery is installed on the safety cover, disconnect the
power cable from the ServeRAID adapter.
9. Loosen the screws and remove the safety cover from the top of the power
interposer card.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 341

10. Remove the screws that secure the power interposer card to the chassis.
11. Disconnect the power cable from the power interposer card; then, remove the
power interposer card out of the server.

12. If you are instructed to return the power interposer card, follow all of the
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.

Replacing the power interposer card assembly

To install the power interposer card assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Reconnect the power cable to the power interposer card.
3. Align the screw holes on the power interposer card with the screw holes on
the chassis; then, install the screws to secure the power interposer card to the
chassis.

342 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

4. Orient the safety cover as shown in the above illustration and align the screws
with the screw holes on the power interposer card. Tighten the screws to
secure the safety cover on the power interposer card.
5. Reconnect the power cables to the connectors on the system board and secure
the power cables with any cable clips on the chassis.
6. Reconnect the power cable from the RAID battery on the safety cover to the
ServeRAID adapter, if you have removed it.
7. Reinstall PCI riser-card assembly 2, if you removed it (see “Replacing a PCI
riser-card assembly” on page 66).
8. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Replacing the air baffle” on page 66).
9. Reinstall the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
10. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
11. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 343

Removing the hot-swap drive backplane
To remove the 2.5-inch hot-swap drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Pull the drives and filler panels out of the server slightly to disengage them
from the drive backplane.
5. Disconnect the configuration, power, and SAS signal cables from the backplane.

Note: You can also choose to disconnect the cables after removing the
backplane, if that is easier for you.
6. Lift the backplane up slightly and pull it out the server.

7. If you are instructed to return the drive backplane, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing the hot-swap drive backplane

To install the replacement hot-swap drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the sides of the drive backplane with the guide rails and lower the drive
backplane into the server.

Note: You can reconnect the cables to the drive backplane before installing the
backplane onto the cage or you can connect the cables after you install the
backplane, if that is easier for you.

344 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

3. Reconnect the configuration, power, and SAS signal cables to the connectors on
the backplane. Route the cables as shown in the following illustration.
4. Reinstall the drives and filler panels.
5. Reinstall the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
6. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the simple-swap SATA drive backplate assembly

To remove the simple-swap SATA drive backplate assembly, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Pull the drive and filler panels out of the server slightly to disengage them
from the backplate assembly.
5. Disconnect the cables. Note the routing
a. Disconnect the signal cable from the connector on the system board.
b. Disconnect the power cable from the power supply or the power interposer
card.
6. Pull the retention latch on top of the drive backplane cage and lift the
backplate assembly up slightly and pull it out; then, rotate it backward out of
the tabs at the bottom of the drive cage and remove the backplate assembly
from the server.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 345

7. If you are instructed to return the backplate assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.

Replacing the simple-swap SATA drive backplate assembly

To install the replacement simple-swap SATA drive and backplate assembly,
complete the following steps:

Note: The simple-swap SATA drive and backplate assembly must be installed in
the backplane slot closest to the information panel and the SATA drive must be
installed in the drive-bay closest to the information panel. The backplate assembly
cable connects to the CD/DVD-ROM drive connector on the system board.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the tabs on the bottom of the drive backplate with the backplate slots on
the bottom of the backplane cage.

346 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

3. Insert the drive backplate tabs into the slots on the bottom of the backplate
cage and push down the retention latch on top of the drive cage; then, rotate
the drive backplate assembly forward until the backplate is latched.
4. Reinstall the drive and filler panel and plastic drive-bay spacer.
5. Install the cover (see Replacing the server top cover).
6. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs

You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or request IBM to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for your server.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.

Removing a microprocessor and heat sink

Attention:
v Be extremely careful, the pins on the socket are fragile. Any damage to the pins
may require replacing the system board.
v Do not allow the thermal grease on the microprocessor and heat sink to come in
contact with anything.
v Removing the heat sink from the microprocessor destroys the even distribution
of the thermal grease and requires replacing the thermal grease.
v Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by the
edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil from your
skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and the socket.
v Use the microprocessor installation tool that came with the new microprocessor
to remove and install the microprocessor. Failure to use the microprocessor tool
may cause damage to the pins on the socket. Any damage to the pins may
require replacing the system board.

To remove a microprocessor and heat sink, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Disconnect any cables that impede access to the heat sink and microprocessor.
5. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 365).
6. If you are removing microprocessor 1, remove the memory module from
DIMM connector 5. If you are removing microprocessor 2, remove the
memory module from DIMM connector 12. See “Removing a memory
module” on page 312 for instructions.
7. Loosen the screws on the heat sink with a screwdriver, alternating among the
screws until they are loose. If possible, each screw should be rotated two full
rotations at a time.
8. Gently pull the heat sink off the microprocessor. Lift the heat sink out of the
server. If the heat sink sticks to the microprocessor, slightly twist the heat sink
back and forth to break the seal. After removal, place the heat sink on its side
on a clean, flat surface.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 347

Note: Removing the heat sink from the microprocessor destroys the even
distribution of the thermal grease and requires replacing the thermal grease.

9. Release the microprocessor retention latch by pressing down on the end,

moving it to the side, and releasing it to the open (up) position.
10. Open the microprocessor bracket frame by lifting up the tab on the top edge.
Keep the bracket frame in the open position.

11. Align the holes on the microprocessor installation tool with the screws on the
microprocessor bracket, then place the microprocessor installation tool down
over the microprocessor ▌1▐. Twist the handle clockwise ▌2▐ to attach the tool
to the microprocessor.

Note: You can pick up or release the microprocessor by twisting the

microprocessor installation tool handle.

12. Carefully lift the microprocessor straight up and out of the socket, and place it
on a static-protective surface. Remove the microprocessor from the installation
tool by twisting the handle counterclockwise.
Attention: Do not touch the pins on the socket. The pins are fragile. Any
damage to the pins may require replacing the system board.

348 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

13. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied
to you. Do not return the microprocessor installation tool.

Replacing a microprocessor and heat sink

Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid
damage from static electricity. For details about handling these devices, see
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32.

Notes:
v If your server comes with one Intel Pentium 1400 series microprocessor, the
second microprocessor socket is not used. The server supports only one Intel
Pentium microprocessor. If you plan to install two Intel Xeon microprocessors in
the server, you must first remove the Intel Pentium microprocessor that came
with the server.
v See “Installing an additional microprocessor and heat sink” on page 50 for notes
and other information that you must consider when you install a
microprocessor.
v Be extremely careful, the pins on the socket are fragile. Any damage to the pins
may require replacing the system board.
v Use the microprocessor installation tool that came with the new microprocessor
to remove the microprocessor from the server. Failure to use the microprocessor
tool may cause damage to the pins on the socket. Any damage to the pins may
require replacing the system board.

To install an additional microprocessor and heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Remove the socket cover from the microprocessor socket, if it is installed.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 349

3. If the microprocessor is preinstalled in the installation tool, release the sides of
the cover and remove the cover from the installation tool; then, continue to
step 5.
4. Install the microprocessor in the microprocessor installation tool:
a. Remove the static-protective bag, and the foam surrounding the bag, from
the box.
b. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new microprocessor
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the
microprocessor from the package.
Attention:
v Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil
from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and
the socket.
v Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor
during installation or removal can damage the contacts.
v Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the
socket.
v Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented and aligned and
positioned in the socket before you try to close the lever.
c. If there is a plastic protective cover on the bottom of the microprocessor,

carefully remove it.

d. Twist the handle of the microprocessor installation tool counterclockwise
so that it is in the open position.
e. Align the triangle alignment mark on the microprocessor with the triangle
alignment mark on the microprocessor installation tool, then place the
microprocessor on the bottom of the tool so that the tool can grasp the
microprocessor correctly onto the bottom of the installation tool.

350 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

f. Align the holes on the microprocessor installation tool with the screws on
the microprocessor bracket, then place the microprocessor installation tool
down over the microprocessor ▌1▐. Twist the handle clockwise ▌2▐ to attach
the tool to the microprocessor.

g. Twist the handle of the installation tool clockwise to secure the

microprocessor in the tool.

Note: You can pick up or release the microprocessor by twisting the

microprocessor installation tool handle clockwise.
5. Install the microprocessor:
a. Align the holes on the microprocessor installation tool with the screws on
the microprocessor bracket, then place the microprocessor installation tool
down over the microprocessor ▌1▐. Twist the handle clockwise ▌2▐ to
attach the tool to the microprocessor.

Note: The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.

b. Twist the handle on the microprocessor tool counterclockwise to insert the

microprocessor into the socket.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 351

Attention:
v Do not press the microprocessor into the socket.
v Do not touch exposed pins of the microprocessor socket. The pins on the
socket are fragile. Any damage to the pins may require replacing the
system board.
v Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented and aligned correctly in
the socket before you try to close the microprocessor retainer.
v Do not touch the thermal material on the bottom of the heat sink or on
top of the microprocessor. Touching the thermal material will
contaminate it and destroys its even distribution. If the thermal material
on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes contaminated, you must
replace the thermal grease.
c. Take off the microprocessor installation tool from the microprocessor
socket and close the microprocessor bracket frame.
d. Carefully close the microprocessor release lever to the closed position to
secure the microprocessor in the socket.
6. Install the heat sink that comes with the microprocessor:
Attention:
v Do not set down the heat sink after you remove the plastic cover.
v Do not touch the thermal material on the bottom of the heat sink. Touching
the thermal material will contaminate it. If the thermal material on the
microprocessor or heat sink becomes contaminated, contact your service
technician.
a. Remove the plastic protective cover from the bottom of the heat sink.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat
sink after you remove the plastic cover. Touching the thermal grease will
contaminate it. See Thermal grease for more information.
b. Align the screws on the heat sink with the screw holes on the system
board; then, place the heat sink on the microprocessor with the
thermal-grease side down.

352 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

c. Press firmly on the captive screws and tighten them with a screwdriver.
The follow illustration shows the sequence in tightening the screws, which
is also shown on top of the heat sink. Begin with the screw labeled as "1",
then "2", "3" and finally "4". If possible, each screw should be rotated two
full rotations at a time. Repeat until the screws are tight. Do not
overtighten the screws by using excessive force. If you are using a torque
wrench, tighten the screws to 8.5 Newton-meters (Nm) to 13 Nm (6.3
foot-pounds to 9.6 foot-pounds).

7. If you installed the second microprocessor, install the two fans on Fan
connector 4 and Fan connector 6 of the system board respectively (see
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly).
8. Reinstall the memory module that you have removed (see “Replacing a
memory module” on page 313).
9. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Replacing the air baffle” on page 66).
10. Reconnect any cables that you have disconnected from the adapters or system
board.

Thermal grease:
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.

When you are installing the heat sink on the same microprocessor that is was
removed from, make sure that the following requirements are met:
v The thermal grease on the heat sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.
v Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the
heat sink and microprocessor.

Note:
v Read the Safety information on page Safety.
v Read the “Installation guidelines” on page 30.
v Read “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 32.

To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and

heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 353

3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.

Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.

4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.

5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL

each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge of the microprocessor; this is to ensure
uniform distribution of the grease.

Note: If the grease is properly applied, approximately half of the grease will
remain in the syringe.
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing an
additional microprocessor and heat sink” on page 50.

Removing the system board

Note:
1. Before you replace the system board, make sure that you backup any features
on demand (FoD) keys that were enabled. Remember to re-enable the features
on demand (FoD) keys after installing the new system board. For more
information on Features on Demand (FoD), including instructions for
automating the activation and installation of the activation key by using IBM
ToolsCenter or IBM Systems Director, see the IBM Features on Demand User's
Guide at https://www-304.ibm.com/systems/x/fod/index.wss under the Help
section.
2. When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with
the latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette or CD
image. Make sure that you have the latest firmware or a copy of the
pre-existing firmware before you proceed.

Before you remove the system board from the server, take the following steps to
save data, firmware, and configuration data:
v Record all system configuration information, such as IMM IP addresses, vital
product data, and the machine type, model number, serial number, Universally
Unique Identifier, and asset tag of the server.

354 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

v Using the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU), save the system configuration to
external media.
v Save the system-event log to external media.

Note: When you replace the system board, you must either update the server
with the latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer
provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you have the latest firmware
or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed.

To remove the system board, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. Remove the server cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 362).
4. Remove the air baffle (see “Removing the air baffle” on page 365).
5. Remove all PCI riser-card assemblies with the adapters in them (see
“Removing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 328).
6. Disconnect all cables from the system board. Make a list of each cable as you
disconnect it; you can then use this as a checklist when you install the new
system board.
Attention: Disengage all latches, release tabs or locks on cable connectors
when you disconnect all cables from the system board. Refer to“Internal cable
routing” on page 276). for more information. Failing to release them before
removing the cables will damage the cable sockets on the system board. The
cable sockets on the system board are fragile. Any damage to the cable sockets
may require replacing the system board.
7. Remove the DIMMs from the system board and set them aside on a
static-protective surface for reinstallation (see “Removing a memory module”
on page 312).

Note: Make a note of the location of each DIMM as you remove it, so that
you can later reinstall it in the same connector.
8. Remove all heat sinks and microprocessors, and set them aside on a
static-protective surface for reinstallation (see “Removing a microprocessor
and heat sink” on page 347).

Note:
a. Be sure to keep the heat sink and microprocessor from each
microprocessor socket of the old system board together so that you can
install them on the new system board together. For example, when you
remove the heat sink and microprocessor from microprocessor socket 1 of
the old system board , install them both on the same socket on the new
system board.
b. Use an alcohol wipe to remove any thermal grease from the tabs on the
microprocessor bracket frame on the old system board.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 355

c. Always use microprocessor installation tool to remove a microprocessor.
Failing to use microprocessor installation tool may damage the
microprocessor sockets on the system board. Any damage to the
microprocessor sockets may require replacing the system board.
9. Remove the socket covers from the microprocessor sockets on the new system
board and place them on the microprocessor sockets of the old system board
that you are removing.

10. Loosen the nine screws that secure the system board to the chassis.

356 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

11. Slightly lift the system board at the side that is near the CPU1_PWR to create
a small angle of elevation between the system board and chassis.

12. Gently push the external input/output connectors toward to the fan cage as
much as possible.

13. Grasp the system board on both the cable clip near the microprocessor 2 and
PCI riser card connector 1. Then, slightly lift the system board to create a
small angle of elevation by leaning the edge against the partition of the power
supply between the system board and chassis.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 357

14. Carefully lift up the system board by placing both hands diagonally and
remove it from the chassis. Be careful to avoid damage any surrounding
components or bend the pin inside the microprocessor socket.

15. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied
to you.
Attention: Make sure to place the socket covers for the microprocessor
sockets on the system board before you return the old system board.

358 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Replacing the system board
Note:
1. Before you replace the system board, make sure that you backup any features
on demand (FoD) keys that were enabled. Remember to re-enable the features
on demand (FoD) keys after installing the new system board. For more
information on Features on Demand (FoD), including instructions for
automating the activation and installation of the activation key by using IBM
ToolsCenter or IBM Systems Director, see the IBM Features on Demand User's
Guide at https://www-304.ibm.com/systems/x/fod/index.wss under the Help
section.
2. When you reassemble the components in the server, be sure to route all cables
carefully so that they are not exposed to excessive pressure and so that they do
not get pinched when you reinstall the system board. In addition, make sure
the cables are inserted into the relevant cable clips.
3. When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with
the latest firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer
provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you have the latest
firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed. See
“Updating the firmware” on page 71, “Updating the Universal Unique
Identifier (UUID)” on page 92, and “Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page
95 for more information.

Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of
code is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code

To install the system board, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Slide the system board into the chassis with a small angle toward to the hard
disk bays. Make sure the system board is seated into the chassis flat and the
no standoff is blocking the system board.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 359

3. Push the edge of the external input/output connectors of the system board
away from the hard disk bays.

4. Make sure the eight standoffs are aligned with the corresponding captive
screw holes on the system board.

360 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

5. Align the screw holes on the system board with the screw holes on the chassis
and install the screws to secure the system board to the chassis.

6. Reconnect the cables that you disconnected earlier to the system board.
7. Reinstall the DIMMs onto the system board (see “Replacing a memory
module” on page 313).
8. Reinstall the microprocessors and heat sinks (see “Replacing a microprocessor
and heat sink” on page 349).
9. Install the socket covers that you removed from the microprocessor sockets on
the new system board and place them on the microprocessor sockets of the
old system board, if you have not done so.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 361

10. Reconnect the SAS signal cables and remote RAID battery cable to the
ServeRAID adapter, if you removed them earlier.
11. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assemblies with the adapters, if any were installed
(see “Replacing a PCI riser-card assembly” on page 66).
12. Reinstall the air baffle (see “Replacing the air baffle” on page 66).
13. Reinstall the cover (see “Replacing the server top cover” on page 67).
14. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
15. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Important: Perform the following updates:

v Either update the server with the latest RAID firmware or restore the
pre-existing firmware from a diskette or CD image.
v Update the UUID (see “Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on
page 92).
v Update the DMI/SMBIOS (see “Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 95).
v If you purchased a Feature on Demand, make sure that you reactivate the
feature using the instructions in the Feature on Demand documentation.

Removing and replacing consumable and structural parts

Replacement of consumable parts and structural parts is your responsibility. If IBM
installs a consumable part or structural part at your request, you will be charged
for the installation.

The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from the hardware.

Removing the server top cover

Attention: If you release the cover latch and remove the cover while the server is
running, the server will lose power and turn off automatically. After you reinstall
the cover, you can power-on the server again.

To remove the server top cover, complete the following steps:

1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. If the server has been installed in a rack, press the two release latches on the
front of the server and remove the server out of the rack enclosure.
Attention: Two or more people are required to remove the system from a rack
cabinet.
4. Loosen the two thumbscrews that secure the cover to the rear of the server.
5. Press on the two blue grip points and slide the cover toward the rear; then, lift
the cover off the server and set it aside.

362 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

6. If you are instructed to return the cover, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing the server top cover

To replace the server cover, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that all cables, adapters, and other components are installed and
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts inside the server.
Also, make sure that all internal cables are correctly routed.
2. Align the cover over the server (toward the rear of the server) until the cover
edges slip into position over the chassis.
Important: Before you slide the cover forward, make sure that all the tabs on
the cover engage the chassis correctly. If all the tabs do not engage the chassis
correctly, it will be hard to remove the cover later.

3. Slightly slide the cover toward the front of the server until the inset tabs start
to engage on the server; then, tighten the thumbscrews to secure the cover to
the chassis.
4. Install the server into the rack enclosure and push the server into the rack until
it clicks into place.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 363

Removing the bezel
To remove the bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables as necessary to replace the device.
3. If the server has been installed in a rack, press the two release latches on the
front of the server and remove the server out of the rack enclosure.
Attention: Two or more people are required to remove the system from a rack
cabinet.
4. Remove the drives and filler panels from the drive bays (see “Removing
hot-swap drives” on page 302 or “Removing a 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA
drive” on page 304).
5. Remove the EIA quick latch first; then, remove the screws from the bezel.

6. Pull the top of the bezel out slightly; then, rotate it downward until the tabs on
the bottom of the bezel disengages from the chassis and set it aside.
7. If you are instructed to return the front bezel, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing the bezel

To install the bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the tabs on the bottom of the bezel into the holes on the chassis.
2. Rotate the bezel upward to the server and reinstall the bezel screws. Then,
install the EIA quick latch.

364 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

3. Install the server into the rack enclosure and push the server into the rack until
it clicks into place.
4. Reinstall the hard disk drives and drive bay filler panels into the drive bays.
5. Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.
6. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.

Removing the air baffle

To remove the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Turn off the server (see “Turning off the server” on page 21) and all attached
peripheral devices. Disconnect all power cords; then, disconnect all external
cables from the server.
3. Remove the top cover (see “Removing the server top cover” on page 33).
4. Lift the air baffle from the server and set it aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the air baffle before you
turn on the server. Operating the server with the air baffle removed might
damage server components.

Chapter 6. Removing and replacing components 365

5. If you are instructed to return the air baffle, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.

Replacing the air baffle

To install the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page Safety and “Installation
guidelines” on page 30.
2. Align the tabs on the sides of the air baffle with the slots on the fan cage and
lower the air baffle into the server.

Note: Make sure that no cable is pinched.

366 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Appendix. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. Use this information to obtain additional information about IBM and
IBM products, determine what to do if you experience a problem with your IBM
system or optional device, and determine whom to call for service, if it is
necessary.

Use this information to obtain additional information about IBM and IBM
products, determine what to do if you experience a problem with your IBM system
or optional device, and determine whom to call for service, if it is necessary.

Before you call

Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself.

If you believe that you require IBM to perform warranty service on your IBM
product, the IBM service technicians will be able to assist you more efficiently if
you prepare before you call.
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Check for updated firmware and operating-system device drivers for your IBM
product. The IBM Warranty terms and conditions state that you, the owner of
the IBM product, are responsible for maintaining and updating all software and
firmware for the product (unless it is covered by an additional maintenance
contract). Your IBM service technician will request that you upgrade your
software and firmware if the problem has a documented solution within a
software upgrade.
v If you have installed new hardware or software in your environment, check
http://www.ibm.com/systems/info/x86servers/serverproven/compat/us/ to
make sure that the hardware and software is supported by your IBM product.
v Go to http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ to check for information to help
you solve the problem.
v Gather the following information to provide to IBM Support. This data will help
IBM Support quickly provide a solution to your problem and ensure that you
receive the level of service for which you might have contracted.
– Hardware and Software Maintenance agreement contract numbers, if
applicable
– Machine type number (IBM 4-digit machine identifier)
– Model number
– Serial number
– Current system UEFI and firmware levels
– Other pertinent information such as error messages and logs
v Go to http://www.ibm.com/support/entry/portal/Open_service_request/ to
submit an Electronic Service Request. Submitting an Electronic Service Request
will start the process of determining a solution to your problem by making the

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 367

pertinent information available to IBM service quickly and efficiently. IBM
service technicians can start working on your solution as soon as you have
completed and submitted an Electronic Service Request.

You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
documentation that is provided with your IBM product. The documentation that
comes with IBM systems also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform.
Most systems, operating systems, and programs come with documentation that
contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages and error
codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation for the operating
system or program.

Using the documentation

Information about your IBM system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files,
and help files.

See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for instructions

for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or the
diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/ .

You can find the most up-to-date information for System x products at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/ .

Getting help and information from the World Wide Web

On the World Wide Web, up-to-date information about IBM systems, optional
devices, services, and support is available at http://www.ibm.com/supportportal/
.

You can find the most up-to-date product information for System x products at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/ .

How to send DSA data to IBM

Use the IBM Enhanced Customer Data Repository to send diagnostic data to IBM.

Before you send diagnostic data to IBM, read http://www.ibm.com/de/support/

ecurep/send_http.html .

You can use any of the following methods to send diagnostic data to IBM:
v Standard upload: http://www.ibm.com/de/support/ecurep/send_http.html
v Standard upload with the system serial number: http://www.ecurep.ibm.com/
app/upload_hw/
v Secure upload: http://www.ibm.com/de/support/ecurep/
send_http.html#secure
v Secure upload with the system serial number: https://www.ecurep.ibm.com/
app/upload

368 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Creating a personalized support web page
You can create a personalized support web page by identifying IBM products that
are of interest to you.

To create a personalized support web page, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/

mynotifications/ . From this personalized page, you can subscribe to weekly email
notifications about new technical documents, search for information and
downloads, and access various administrative services.

Software service and support

Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with your IBM products.

For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/ or see http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for
support telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).

Hardware service and support

You can receive hardware service through your IBM reseller or IBM Services.

To locate a reseller authorized by IBM to provide warranty service, go to

http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/ and click Find Business Partners on the
right side of the page. For IBM support telephone numbers, see
http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ . In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).

In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

IBM Taiwan product service

Use this information to contact IBM Taiwan product service.

IBM Taiwan product service contact information:

IBM Taiwan Corporation

3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Telephone: 0800-016-888

Appendix. Getting help and technical assistance 369

370 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS

PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.

Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided for

convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
websites. The materials at those websites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product, and use of those websites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 371

Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both. If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first
occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol (® or ™), these symbols
indicate U.S. registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this
information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or common
law trademarks in other countries.

A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the web at “Copyright and

trademark information” at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml .

Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe

Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc., in

the United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.

Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc., in
the United States, other countries, or both.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other

countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of

others.

Important notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.

CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.

When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1,048,576 bytes, and GB stands for
1,073,741,824 bytes.

When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands

for 1,000,000 bytes, and GB stands for 1,000,000,000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.

Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the
largest currently supported drives that are available from IBM.

372 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an
optional memory module.

Each solid-state memory cell has an intrinsic, finite number of write cycles that the
cell can incur. Therefore, a solid-state device has a maximum number of write
cycles that it can be subjected to, expressed as “total bytes written” (TBW). A
device that has exceeded this limit might fail to respond to system-generated
commands or might be incapable of being written to. IBM is not responsible for
replacement of a device that has exceeded its maximum guaranteed number of
program/erase cycles, as documented in the Official Published Specifications for
the device.

IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and

services that are ServerProven®, including but not limited to the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered
and warranted solely by third parties.

IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.

Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.

Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not
include user manuals or all program functionality.

Particulate contamination
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive
gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as
humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the device that is described in this
document.

Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate levels or

concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the device to
malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for
particulates and gases that are intended to avoid such damage. The limits must not
be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous other factors, such as
temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates
or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of
specific limits that are set forth in this document, you must implement practices
that maintain particulate and gas levels that are consistent with the protection of
human health and safety. If IBM determines that the levels of particulates or gases
in your environment have caused damage to the device, IBM may condition
provision of repair or replacement of devices or parts on implementation of
appropriate remedial measures to mitigate such environmental contamination.
Implementation of such remedial measures is a customer responsibility.

Notices 373
Table 18. Limits for particulates and gases
Contaminant Limits
Particulate v The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric
dust spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.21.
v Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or
greater, using high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet
MIL-STD-282.
v The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination
must be more than 60%2.
v The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc
whiskers.
Gaseous v Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19853
v Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 Å in 30 days
1 ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

2 The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity

at which the dust absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.

3 ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control

systems: Airborne contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina, U.S.A.

Documentation format
The publications for this product are in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)
and should be compliant with accessibility standards. If you experience difficulties
when you use the PDF files and want to request a web-based format or accessible
PDF document for a publication, direct your mail to the following address:
Information Development
IBM Corporation
205/A015
3039 E. Cornwallis Road
P.O. Box 12195
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709-2195
U.S.A.

In the request, be sure to include the publication part number and title.

When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any
obligation to you.

374 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Electronic emission notices

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
might cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

European Union EMC Directive conformance statement

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

Attention: This is an EN 55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment this

product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to
take adequate measures.

Responsible manufacturer:

International Business Machines Corp.

New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
914-499-1900

Notices 375
European Community contact:

IBM Deutschland GmbH

Technical Regulations, Department M372
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Telephone: +49 7032 15-2941
Email: [email protected]

Germany Class A statement

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie
zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie

2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022
Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu

installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

“Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür
aufzukommen.”

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die

elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
von Geräten (EMVG)”. Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die

elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der
EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:

International Business Machines Corp.

New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
914-499-1900

Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:

IBM Deutschland GmbH

Technical Regulations, Abteilung M372

376 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Telephone: 0049 (0) 7032 15-2941
Email: [email protected]

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse
A.

Japan VCCI Class A statement

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council
for Interference (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio
interference may occur, in which case the user may be required to take corrective
actions.

Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA) statement

Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)

Confirmed Harmonics Guidelines (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase)

Korea Communications Commission (KCC) statement

This is electromagnetic wave compatibility equipment for business (Type A). Sellers
and users need to pay attention to it. This is for any areas other than home.

Notices 377
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A statement

People's Republic of China Class A electronic emission

statement

Taiwan Class A compliance statement

378 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Index
A blue-screen capture feature
overview 10, 73, 86
configuring (continued)
with ServerGuide 75
ABR, automatic boot failure blue-screen feature 86 configuring the server 72
recovery 263 boot manager program configuring your server 71
ac good LED 114 using 82 connecting
ac power LED 19 Business Partners instructions 23, 24 the cables 68
accessible documentation 374 button, presence detection 16 connecting drive cables 276
acoustical noise emissions 7 connector
Active Energy Manager plug-in 8 Ethernet and system-management 20
adapter
installing 47 C power supply 19
serial 20
PCI Express bus 299 cables
USB 15, 20
PCI-X bus 299 connecting 68
video
remote battery cables, power and signal
front 15
installing 60, 317 connecting to internal drives 276
rear 20
removing 316 cabling
connectors
replacing 299 the 4x2.5-inch hot-swap drive
for options on the system board 29
adapter, installation 46 backplane 280, 284
on the rear of the server 18
adapter, replacing 300 the hot-swap SATA drive backplane
rear 18
adapter, ServeRAID assembly 289
connectors, external system board 26
installing 49 the optical drive 276
connectors, internal system board 26
removing 314 the power interposer card
consumable and structural parts
adapter, ServeRAID SAS/SATA assembly 277
removing and replacing 362
installing 315 the simple-swap SATA drive backplate
consumable parts 269
adapters supported 46 assembly 294
contamination, particulate and
administrator password 80 call home feature
gaseous 7, 373
air baffle Service Advisor 121
controllers
removing 33 call home tools 121
Ethernet 87
replacing 66, 366 caution statements 5
controls and LEDs
air baffler CD drive
on the light path diagnostics
removing 365 installing 309
panel 16, 107
applying current firmware problems 242
on the operator information panel 15
using best practices 23 removing 309
controls, LEDs, and power 14
assertion event, system-event log 115 replacing 305
cooling 10
assistance, getting 367 CD-RW/DVD
cover
attention notices 5 drive activity LED 14
removing 362
Australia Class A statement 375 eject button 14
cover, removing 33
automatic boot failure recovery CD/DVD
cover, server
(ABR) 263 replacing 306
replacing 67, 363
availability, server 12 channels, memory
creating
associated with the DIMM
software RAID 89
connectors 35
creating a personalized support web
B checkout procedure 102
performing 103
page 369
backplane assembly, hot-swap SAS/SATA CRUs, replacing
China Class A electronic emission
removing 345 adapter 299
statement 378
backplane, hot-swap SAS/SATA CD or DVD drive 305
Class A electronic emission notice 375
removing 344 DIMMs 312
collecting data 99
replacing 344 memory 312
completing
backup firmware system battery 332
the options installation 65
starting 82 custom support web page 369
components
battery, replacing 334 customer replaceable units (CRUs),
on the server 25, 265
battery, system server 265
configuration
installing 334 ServerGuide Setup and Installation
replacing 332 CD 71
bays 6 Setup utility 71 D
best practices configuration cable, danger statements 5
use to apply current firmware and routing 280, 284, 289 data collection 99
device-driver updates 23 configuration, server dc good LED 114
bezel updating 69 dc power LED 19
removing 364 configuring deassertion event, system-event log 115
blue screen capture features 10, 73 UEFI compatible devices 72 device drivers 83

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2012 379

devices DVD drive (continued) event logs, methods for viewing 117
installing 23 problems 242 expansion bays 6
devices, static-sensitive removing 309 external, system board connectors 26
handling 32, 275 replacing 305
diagnostic Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot
error codes 193
on-board programs, starting 119
diagnostics program 8 F
fan
test log, viewing 121
replacing 310
text message format 120
tools, overview 104
E fans 10
electrical input 7 FCC Class A notice 375
diagnostic event log 116
electronic emission Class A notice 375 features 6
diagnostics program
Electronic emission notices 375 ServerGuide 74
DSA Preboot 8
embedded hypervisor features, remote presence and
DIMM connectors
using 84 blue-screen 10, 73
associated with each
environment 7 field replaceable units (FRUs),
microprocessor 35
error codes and messages 122 server 265
DIMM connectors on
diagnostic 193 finding
each memory channel 35
IMM2 140 updated documentation 4
DIMM population sequence 36, 37
messages, diagnostic 118 firmware updates 1
DIMMs
POST 122 firmware updates best practices 23
installation sequence for independent
error logs firmware, server
mode 36
clearing 118 updating 51
installing 34
viewing 116 firmware, server, recovering 261
order of installation for non-mirroring
error symptoms firmware, updating 71
mode 36
CD drive, DVD drive 242 front USB connector board
removing 312
general 243 removing 336
replacing 313
hard disk drive 244 replacing 337, 340
display problems 250
hypervisor flash device 243 front video connector
documentation
intermittent 246 removing 339
Documentation Browser 3
keyboard, non-USB 247 front video connector \
Documentation CD 3
memory 249 removing 339
using 368
microprocessor 250 front view
documentation format 374
monitor 250 LED location 14
documentation, updated
mouse, non-USB 247 front view of the server 14
finding 4
network 253
drive
optional devices 253
hot-swap SAS/SATA
removing 302
pointing device, non-USB 247
power 254
G
drive backplane assembly, 4x2.5-inch gaseous contamination 7, 373
serial port 255
hot-swap Germany Class A statement 376
ServerGuide 256
installing 63 getting help 368
software 257
drive backplane, 4x2.5-inch hot-swap grease, thermal 55, 353
USB port 257
cabling 280, 284 guidelines
errors
drive, 3.5-inch simple-swap 41 for options installation 30, 273
format, diagnostic code 120
drive, CD/DVD for system reliability 32, 275
power supply LEDs 114
installing 309
Ethernet 10
removing 309
controller
drive, hot-swap 40, 302
removing 302
troubleshooting 258 H
link status LED 20 handling static-sensitive devices 32, 275
SAS/SATA IDs 41, 303
Ethernet activity hard disk drive
drives
LED 16, 20 problems 244
connecting power and signal
Ethernet and system-management hard disk drive activity LED 14
cables 276
connector 20 hard disk drive status LED 14
installing 39
Ethernet support 9 hardware RAID cable,
drives, SAS/SATA
European Union EMC Directive routing 282, 287, 292, 296
hot-swap 40, 302
conformance statement 375 hardware service and support telephone
drives, SATA
event log, DSA 116 numbers 369
simple-swap 41
event log, IMM2 116 heat output 7
DSA
event log, POST 115 heat sink
program, overview 118
event log, system 115 installing 50, 53
DSA event log 116
event log, viewing through the web replacing 349
DSA messages 193
interface 116 help
DSA Portable 104, 119
event logs 115 getting 367
DSA Preboot 8, 105, 119
viewing through the Setup help, sending diagnostic data to
DSA, sending data to IBM 368
utility 116 IBM 368
DVD drive
viewing without restarting the help, World Wide Web 368
installing 309
server 116

380 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

hot-swap drive installing (continued) LED (continued)
SAS/SATA IDs 41, 303 the 4x2.5-inch hot-swap drive power-supply error 20
hot-swap drive backplane assembly, backplane assembly 63 system locator 16
4x2.5-inch hot-swap the air baffle 66, 366 system log 16
installing 63 the CD/DVD cable 309 system-error 16
hot-swap drive, SAS/SATA the heat sink 50, 54, 352 LED errors
removing 302 the hot-swap SAS/SATA power supply 114
hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane backplane 344 LEDs
installing 344 the IBM ServeRAID controller 49 on the system board 28
removing 344 the simple-swap SATA drive and light path diagnostics 10, 106
hot-swap SAS/SATA drive backplate assembly 346 LEDs 109
installing 40, 302 the system board 359 light path diagnostics LEDs 109
how to send DSA data to IBM 24 installing drives 39 light path diagnostics panel
Human Interface Infrastructure installing options 23 controls and LEDs 16, 107
configuration utility program 89 installing, DIMMs 34 location 15
humidity 7 instructions for IBM Business local area network (LAN) 9
hypervisor Partners 23, 24 log, event, viewing through the web
removing 318 integrated baseboard management interface 116
hypervisor flash device controller 22 logs, event 115
installing 59 integrated functions 6 LSI Configuration Utility program 89
problems 243 integrated management module
hypervisor flash devicer overview 8
installing 319 integrated management module II
error messages 140
M
management, system 8
intermittent problems 246
memory
I internal connectors 26
internal LEDs 26
removing 312
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program replacing 313
internal, system board connectors 26
overview 91 specifications 6
IP address
IBM Electronic Service Agent 121 memory installation sequence
obtaining for the IMM 86
IBM Systems Director 8 for independent mode 36
IPMItool 116
systems management tool 13, 91 memory module
IBM Taiwan product service 369 installing 34
IBM, next generation technology 8 memory problems 249
IDs for SAS/SATA hot-swap drives 41, J memory support 10
303 Japan Electronics and Information memory-mirroring mode 37
IMM IP address Technology Industries Association description 37
obtaining 86 statement 377 memory-mirroring mode DIMM
IMM2 Japan VCCI Class A statement 377 population sequence
error messages 140 Japan Voluntary Control Council for on the server 37
IMM2 event log 116 Interference Class A statement 377 menu choices
important notices 5, 372 JEITA statement 377 for the Setup utility 76
independent mode DIMM population jumper messages
sequence UEFI boot recovery 261 diagnostic 118
on the server 36 jumpers 26 messages, DSA 193
Industry Canada Class A emission on the system board 27 messages, error
compliance statement 375 jumpers, on the system board 27 POST 122
information center 368 methods, for viewing event logs 117
installation guidelines 30, 273 microprocessor 10
installation, options
completing 65
K and thermal grease 55, 353
associated with each DIMM 35
keyboard problems 247
installing installing 50, 51
Korea Communications Commission
a fan 310 problems 250
statement 377
a heat sink 53 replacing 349
a hot-swap power supply 56 specifications 6
a microprocessor 50, 51 model and serial number
a PCI riser-card assembly 45 L location 260
a RAID adapter remote battery 60, LED monitor problems 250
317 ac power 19
a ServeRAID controller 315 dc power 19
an adapter 46, 47
battery, system 334
Ethernet-link status 20
for CD-RW/DVD drive activity 14
N
network problems 253
hot-swap SAS/SATA drive 40, 302 for Ethernet activity 16, 20
New Zealand Class A statement 375
hypervisor flash device 59, 319 for hard disk drive activity 14
next generation technology 8
memory modules 34 for hard disk drive status 14
NOS installation
operator-information panel 331 for solid state drive activity 14
with ServerGuide 75
power interposer card assembly 342 for solid state drive status 14
without ServerGuide 75
simple-swap SATA drive 41 power-on 15

Index 381
notes 5 power cable, redundant
notes, important 372 routing 280, 285, 290, 294 cooling 10
notices 371 power features Ethernet connection 10
electronic emission 375 of the server 20 NIC 10
FCC, Class A 375 power interposer card assembly Redundant
notices and statements 5 cabling 277 Ethernet capabilities 12
Nx boot failure 263 removing 341 hot-swap power supplies 12
replacing 342 redundant array of independent disks
power problems 254, 258 (RAID)
O power supplies
redundancy support 10
adapter 40, 42, 303
related documentation 4
obtaining
power supply reliability, server 12
the IP address for the IMM 86
installing 56 remind button 17, 108
online documentation 1
power supply LED errors 114 remote battery, RAID adapter
online publications 4
power supply, fixed installing 60, 317
operator information panel
removing 324 removing 316
controls and LEDs 15
replacing 325 remote presence feature 73
removing 330, 331
power supply, hot-swap using 86
operator information panel release
removing 320 removing
latch 15
replacing 322 a fan 310
optical
power-on LED 15, 20 a hot-swap drive 302
replacing 42
power-on password 80 a hot-swap power supply 320
optical drive
power-supply error LED 20 a power interposer card
cabling 276
Preboot, DSA 8 assembly 341
optical drive, optional
presence detection button 16 a RAID adapter remote battery 316
specifications 6
problem isolation tables 241 a ServeRAID adapter 314
optional device connectors
problems adapter 299
on the system board 29
CD/DVD drive 242 battery, system 332
optional device problems 253
Ethernet controller 258 CD or DVD drive 305
options
hard disk drive 244 DIMM 312
installing 23
hypervisor flash device 243 fixed power supply 324
IMM2 140 hypervisor 318
intermittent 246 the air baffle 33, 365
P memory 249 the bezel 364
particulate contamination 7, 373 microprocessor 250 the CD/DVD cable 309
parts listing, server 265 monitor 250 the front USB connector board 336
parts listing, System x3530 M4 267 mouse 247, 248 the front video connector 339
parts, consumable 269 network 253 the hot-swap SAS/SATA
parts, structural 269 optional devices 253 backplane 344
password 81 pointing device 248 the SATA backplate assembly 345
administrator 81 power 254, 258 the simple-swap SATA backplate
power-on 81 serial port 255 assembly 345
password, power-on software 257 removing and replacing
switch on the system board 81 troubleshooting 99 consumable and structural parts 362
PCI undetermined 259 Tier 1 CRUs 299
riser-card assembly 328 USB port 257 removing the cover 33, 362
replacing 329 video 250, 258 removing/replacing
PCI expansion slots 6 procedure, checkout 103 operator information panel 330, 331
PCI riser product service, IBM Taiwan 369 the system board 354
slot 1 19 replacement parts for the server 265
slot 2 19 replacing
PCI riser-card assembly
installing 45
R a CD/DVD 306
a heat sink 349
rack release latches 14
replacing 66 a hot-swap power supply 322
RAID battery cable, remote
People's Republic of China Class A a microprocessor 349
routing 279
electronic emission statement 378 a optical 42
rank sparing
POST a PCI riser-card assembly 66, 329
description 36
error codes 122 battery, system 332, 334
rank sparing mode 36
error log 116 CD or DVD drive 305
rank sparing mode DIMM population
POST event log 115 fixed power supply 325
sequence
POST test 118 hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane 344
on the server 36
power hypervisor flash device 319
RAS features, server 12
power-control button 15 memory DIMMs 313
rear view 18
specifications 7 power interposer card assembly 342
of the server 18
supply 6 the air baffle 66, 366
recovering the server firmware 261
power and signal cables the CD/DVD cable 309
redundancy support
connecting to internal drives 276
power supplies 10

382 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

replacing (continued) ServeRAID support 11 system board (continued)
the front USB connector board 337, ServerGuide jumpers 27
340 features 74 LEDs 28
the server cover 67, 363 NOS installation 75 power-on password switch 81
the simple-swap SATA drive and setup 75 removing 354
backplate assembly 346 Setup and Installation CD 71 system board external connectors 26
the system board 359 using 74 system board internal connectors 26
notes to consider 359 ServerGuide CD 1, 9 system board jumpers
replacing an adapter 300 Service Advisor feature 121 description 27
replacing consumable and structural parts service and support system board optional devices
and Tier 1 CRUs 362 before you call 367 connectors 29
reset button 16, 18, 109 hardware 369 system event logs 116
riser-card assembly software 369 system reliability guidelines 32, 275
location 299 service bulletins 102 system-event log 115
routing serviceability, server 12 system-event log, assertion event 115
the configuration cable 280, 284, 289 Setup utility 71 system-event log, deassertion event 115
the hardware RAID cable 282, 287, menu choices 76 systems management 8, 11
292, 296 starting 76 systems management tool
the power cable 280, 285, 290, 294 using 75 IBM Systems Director 13, 91
the remote RAID battery cable 279 shutting down the server 21
the software RAID cable 283, 288, signal and power cables
293, 297
Russia Class A electromagnetic
connecting to internal drives 276
simple-swap SATA backplate assembly
T
Taiwan Class A compliance
interference statement 378 removing 345
statement 378
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) simple-swap SATA drive
temperature 7
Class A statement 378 installing 41
test log, viewing 121
simple-swap SATA drive and backplate
thermal grease 55, 353
assembly
Tier 1 CRUs
S installing 346
simple-swap SATA drive backplate
removing and replacing 299
SAS/SATA drive TOE 6
assembly
hot-swap tools, call home 121
cabling 289, 294
removing 302 tools, diagnostic 104
size 7
SAS/SATA hot-swap drive trademarks 372
slots
installing 40, 302 troubleshooting 99
PCI expansion 6
SAS/SATA IDs turning off the server 21
SMP 10
for hot-swap drives 41, 303 integrated baseboard management
software problems 257
SATA simple-swap drive controller 22
software RAID
installing 41 turning on the server 21
creating 89
sending diagnostic data to IBM 368
software RAID cable,
sending DSA data to IBM 24
routing 283, 288, 293, 297
serial and model number
location 260
software service and support telephone U
numbers 369 UEFI
serial connector 20
software, RAID boot recovery jumper 261
serial number 1
creating 89 UEFI compatible devices
serial port problems 255
solid state drive activity LED 14 configuring 72
server
solid state drive status LED 14 undetermined problems 259
configuring 72
solid state drive, ServeRAID controller undocumented problems 101
error codes and messages 122
removing 314 United States electronic emission Class A
offerings 8
specifications 6 notice 375
power features 20
standby mode 20 United States FCC Class A notice 375
turning it off 21
starting Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 257
turning it on 21
the backup firmware 82 UpdateXpress 83
server , backup firmware
the Setup utility 76 updating
starting 82
statements and notices 5 server firmware 51
server components 25, 265
static-sensitive devices the server configuration 69
server configuration
handling 32, 275 updating firmware 71
updating 69
structural parts 269 USB
server controls, LEDs, and power 14
support web page, custom 369 connector 15, 20
server firmware
symmetric multiprocessing 10 using
updating 51
system embedded hypervisor 84
server firmware, recovering 261
error LED front 16 the boot manager program 82
server rear view 18
locator LED, front 16 the remote presence feature 86
server replaceable units 265
System the Setup utility 75
server shutdown 21
Log LED 16 using best practices
server, front view 14
system board to apply firmware and device-driver
ServeRAID controller
installing 359 updates 23
installing 49

Index 383
Utility program
IBM Advanced Settings 91
utility, Setup
menu choices 76
starting 76
using 75

V
video connector
front 15
rear 20
video controller, integrated
specifications 6
video problems 250
viewing
event logs through the Setup
utility 116
viewing event logs
without restarting the server 116

W
Wake on LAN feature 21
Web site
UEFI flash diskette 261
weight 7
what the server offers 8

384 System x3530 M4 Type 7160: Installation and Service Guide

Part Number: 00V9815

Printed in USA

(1P) P/N: 00V9815